. At ~~ PAG bas si ).) | ele f AP aa BR Fee eee ee te Mea lik Gah biragatth: Age oan lt eae hain i thagit agit Aged l hagas be hh! eet neil ang S) sdaaiottewpieatiede reid " Ht 4 bela tiati and 1¥ eee a 4 seuiatatita tie ieee nh saa i i} aa ah s it a i‘ ' Ata) { te t WMA 5 An 1 I, lesa pati n4a4 Va at atay ily bate yacel iy 4 "1 ‘ i" i a fs With e ais eenennyet el drial ly fete r " Scat ae ie ve in Abele yaa 7 visit Me ‘ iN une - oo ra Meet say i et ak aie paiyt! I ae a ningeeisd send oe i ee ya i Mo ea alatawiagl f havent Hitt ie ; 4 amet : . . : | arti i, i The pit | yn | 7 inarpeuacerty , P u Kohuowin t 1 eis \) : ‘i a! v2. 7 : Wy cf } . eer ery ; if i i iH te K , whats Maa je Pee apgyotiabey iM ial Ti " “4 iit jadal es " tt ie iN ae iy taka \ i iy} : at f) ’ SR Dia eee HI MNT Anu MOURA TSANG GUI ED bi Hat oo He Aili me iH ae A ‘ H ey a i caret a Wedd tank) i ihadteta a \ i el it " a a ‘ ait in ; pen a i Best Ses eS TS ¥! | Ae tit pital fips ih f a aaa Henk { Fy vy aes nate i aE Ete cee tiliatie ae PVT ininadinavet ena shade 4: nth H4 HRA CR ASS Fire tee Re ep pistaant PMC ee tee gtign na ial Hi “rat “ al | Ny ian : ; \ : i he E eat her alls | Hat: { ‘ sagt is Gaius AI te a He Aeiatinge i Ht | ots a ; i i) \ a 7 | HN th nah Alet Ws Plt i HR \ \ | eit MAE cat : i: My i Re ehh i 4} Ht HGH REL in tty he ica! i md iti Hijet Uyeiss Ra muslte rn ae f EY } if "4 iit ie (hye HY 2 i tie is Es Hey aie NE NT ver ro er een oa va AB DY 4 aed ie oa AAD : TDAP ae ] * in " i iN | Ais hart Pale amelie rane i i 4 ae es re Het F iy i ; t wots Lictie tats ¥ pai etesh i ie ayy iat H y id. | errr TAGS td sd pee: He a te ceatet aS Sse nw aa | hi a Th dais ida he nag iy " , ohetapenene ayer d (hk: i ny etal i aay eae jody SIV g8 pany ad iat eras eA A, 17 Es Waren Vi Rel id eats 3 Hote ; A das 4 Mi mi rath ai ave uth He LN ap jan i Peer Glen Wii em 2 i Ae Perret i PT ee | tel 3 Rune i iy ane i ) ; i ih’) iy Wi Hs : yah Sep nia) Hy POCORN eiiey ee) ie vie 5 ‘ sya gist tes) ; a4 od iv oH tt as ate (hy { Ce 1% ae ‘ is hy sais abs 1 nanan ys 3 wr Hee Ape nay Mh if ni " i ah a ie fe si vane a wiih tie nah ays Sari oe 2 AVE Hone RU Mg Hf fe i i ! af Aa gs ' Vag abs ava | vik hand Filsindecsie ! i } duh tail ith te say iat it ; ey : " i is ay ra i 7 i i EO nage AWE RUDE NOL hee ME LtaT LHD eUigae Hon re ae esac Ky HOT y Sete: at aR La h fhe Pa a en RR +i tye r i adigh ‘ Sapte Tent ain M Weta e i ait qed MAY t kek jay en NTH Gat ais nn ay Mink ' pe} py gy REO th deli Lady ir iets ae ea La heads sia sa arith Pe owl eda His tie f oie ane ‘ ; pet feu AR Wass cane as i i Misa woh bith | Shi Wea das SELENE Tinea HEH ik fh ne ‘ ; Pree aeat ate ‘ oe \ bb a be Bee ‘ i Vga i atgrs i : ew hails : “ae vi Bey Hi nit ‘ i is uaa bs . ‘ ' Wat cheba) Fe ty SURLY YA $ i sys May a Pith j ce i aie bh ae , i 1 7 wae i wy errett ¥ ! | | “aetiwd sh U4 Hah 4 | en milage ae ae PHI thy ite AUN 4 i a TL i ; i ; He bet My i} e iad sats tn ROMRCRU COMMA WEP PIL PMC DrHatiRMMNP TIC rr TGR Leet ac EPE aoe I a ea ae on aa i esnaisie iE eee eet aed pale aia \ Awad dadesttta HI phaaegnt ta ‘yey Vy ey HH RT SH aigils Le Wi Uh a 0 Da int * to rd te Pe eaegneein Feet vite \ Ya Haba Wy } AUCLLE hee eM e RON ae Et) " ff wed i a att 4 ith 4 ae tA " aay fies WI hobs Ng eet ie patty Coch en athe Pal ‘ ein ELE Ne reds a Nyy gaa hae , i ih j y af enh? tau) maw tbe tet i vik ih iy agi! nt ( eh eile ‘ bd | chive Me i "a ‘ i ay {4 ‘ ft ‘ tat ‘ t : } ria { t J ‘ ¥ mos. 7¢¢ JOURNAL AND PROCEEDINGS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF NEW SOUTH WALES FOR 1951 (INCORPORATED 1881) VOLUME LXXXV Parts I-IV EDITED BY IDA A. BROWNE, D.Sc. Honorary Editorial Secretary THE AUTHORS OF PAPERS ARE ALONE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE STATEMENTS MADE AND THE OPINIONS EXPRESSED THEREIN SYDNEY PUBLISHED BY THE SOCIETY, SCIENCE HOUSE GLOUCESTER AND ESSEX STREETS Issued as a complete volume, July 16, 1952 ae a Uy hash ee CONTENTS VOLUME LXXxXV Part I* OFFICERS FOR 1951-1952 NOTICES List oF MEMBERS AWARDS ANNUAL REPORT OF THE COUNCIL BALANCE SHEET REPORT OF SECTION OF GEOLOGY OBITUARY ArT. I.—Presidential Address. By F. 'R. Morrison. General The Science Museum—Its Duties and Its Dues Art. II.—Occultations Observed at Rigo Oe aa mee 1950. no W. H. Robertson d . ; t Art. IIJ.—An relia Non-Conservative Electrical Eater aed W. B. Smith- White ee : sit “s we is ae a, Art. IV.—The Peele of canes ae Beams Under Normal Loads. By C. A. M. Gray et a8 oe nae Part II} Art. V.—Clarke Memorial Lecture. The Ore Minerals and their Textures. By A. B. Edwards se me ate a a a a sis a ae Art. VI.—Seismicity of Australia. By T. N. Burke-Gaffney Art. VII.—Contour Trench Formations in ‘ele Plains of New South Wales. By C. T. McElroy vy vig é a Hs “5 i wy a Art. VIII.—The Geology of the Nanima-Bedulluck District, near ei. New South Wales. By Kathleen Sherrard ; ‘ : * Published January 7, 1952. + Published April 18, 1952. Page iv Xvi xx . XXiil . XXvil 13 15 20 26 47 53 63 CONTENTS Part III* Art. IX.—The Poisson-Kelvin Hypothesis and the Theory of Dielectrics. By W. B. Smith- White : as a - eis a Si Je Art. X.—The Chemistry of Osmium. Part VIII. The Preparation of Some Hexam- mine Osmium III Salts. By F. P. Dwyer and J. W. Hogarth Art. XI.—Palladium Complexes. Part III. Bridged Compounds of Palladium containing other Metal Atoms ; Complexes of o-Methyl-mercaptobenzoic Acid with other Metals. By 8. E. Livingstone and R. A. Plowman Art. XII.—The Essential Oil of a Physiological Form of Hucalyptus citriodora Hook. By A. R. Penfold, F. R. Morrison, J. L. Willis, H. H. G. McKern and (Mrs.) M. C. Spies Part IV+ Art. XIII.—The Occurrence of a Physiological Form of Backhousia citriodora F. Muell. and Its Essential Oil. By A. R. Penfold, F. R. Morrison, J. L. Willis, H. H. G. McKern and (Mrs.) M. C. Spies Art. XIV.—Graptolite Zones in the Silurian of the Yass-Bowning District of New South Wales. By Ida A. Brown and Kathleen M. Sherrard Art. XV.—The Resolution of Tris-2 : 2’-Dipyridyl Metal Complexes through the Iodide Antimonyl Tartrates. By F. P. Dwyer and (Miss) E. C. Gyarfas .. Art. XVI.—Coordination Compounds of Copper. III. Complex Iodo-Cuprates I from Acetone Solution. By C. M. Harris ART. XVII.—Some Complexes Derived from Silver Halides. By C. M. Harris Art. XVITI.—Coordination Compounds of Copper. IV. Some Cuprates (I) from Acetone Solution. By C. M. Harris and H. N. S. Schafer Art. XIX.—Some Halogenoargentates (I) and Halogenoplumbates (II) from Acetone Solution. By C. M. Harris and H. N. 8S. Schafer ArT. XX.—Palladium Complexes. IV. Reactions of Palladium Compounds with 1: 10 Phenanthroline. By S. E. Livingstone Index to Volume LXXXV * Published May 23, 1952. + Published July 16, 1952. 82 (113 116 120 123 127 135 138 142 145 148 151 . xe FOR Cane Heian 5 ee (INCORPORATED 1881) — y > ‘ fee 3 mars SS | ea sa) Oe, ee MR AS VOL. LXXXV_ Containing List of Members, Report of Council, Balance. Sheet, an a4 a Obituary Notices, Presidential Address and Papers read ie ViPS fet as Sow in April and May, 1951.90 Yon eeu a EDITED BY mie kd aaa ee Ida A. BROWNE, DSc oo I d- : ‘ ic he f gay . Honorary Editorial Secretary aw Ps: « Wo rae AUTHORS OF PAPERS’ ARE ALONE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE 4. || | STATEMENTS MADE AND THE OPINIONS EXPRESSED THEREIN ‘ | \ ee ce eS | / ‘ : , ae | 4 = ‘ \ Cae i . ay : Vas 2 OF Ek ria} a 4 SHS Rat SYDNEY } ’ ; be . ' J ay pee | i. { we ; PUBLISHED BY THE SOCIETY, SCIENCE HOUSE rey Renee wre Wik) et OS ee AND ESSEX STREETS Rear | ace Naren es 1952 Officers for 1951-1952 Notices List of Members Awards Annual Report of the Council . Balance Sheet .. Report of Section of Geology Obituary ArT. I.—Presidential Address. Art. IIl.—Occultations Observed at Sydney Observatory During 1950. Robertson CONTENTS Part I By F. R. Morrison. The Science Museum—Its Duties and Its Dues .. VOLUME LXXxV General .. By (Wo Sa ArT. IIIJ.—An Elementary Non-Conservative Electrical System. By W. B. Smith- White Art. IV.—The Analysis of Infinitely Long Beams Under Normal Loads. Gray Cah aa ee. By C. A. M. : 1 20 JOURNAL AND PROCEEDINGS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF NEW SOUTH WALES FOR 1951 (INCORPORATED 1881, ee VOLUME LXXXV Part I EDITED BY Ida A. BROWNE, D.Sc. Honorary Editorial Secretary ee THE AUTHORS OF PAPERS ARE ALONE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE STATEMENTS MADE AND THE OPINIONS EXPRESSED THEREIN SYDNEY PUBLISHED BY THE SOCIETY, SCIENCE HOUSE GLOUCESTER AND ESSEX STREETS Royal Society of New South Wales OFFICERS FOR 1951-1952 Patrons: His EXcELLENCY THE GOVERNOR-GENERAL OF THE COMMONWEALTH OF AUSTRALIA THE Rr. Hon. W. J. McKELL, P.c. His EXCELLENCY THE GOVERNOR OF NEW SoutH WALES, LIEUTENANT-GENERAL SIR JOHN NORTHCOTT, K.c.M.G., ©.B., M.v.O. President : R. C. L. BOSWORTH, .sc., D.Sc. (Adel.), Ph.D. (Camb.), F.R.A.C.I., F.Inst.P. Vice-Presidents : R. O. CHALMERS, a.s.17.c. | D. J. K. O’CONNELL, s.3., D.Sc., D.Ph., H. O. FLETCHER. | F.R.A.S. F. R. MORRISON, 4.R.A.¢.1., F.C.S. | Honorary Secretaries : IDA A. BROWNE, D.sc. | H. W. WOOD, M.Sc., A.Inst.P., F.R.A.S.. Honorary Treasurer : C. J. MAGEE, D.sc.agr. (Syd.), M.Sc. (Wis.). Members of Council: BAXTER, B.sSc., Ph.D., A.M.I. chen E. F. D. McCARTHY, Dip.anthr. BULLEN, M.A., B.Sc. (N.Z.), C. E. MARSHALL, ph.p., D.Sc. CARTER, B.V.Sce. J. DONEGAN, A.S.1T.C., A.R.A.C.1. SP. 5 1D (Melb.), Ph.D., Sc.D. (Camb.), F.R.S. 2B, pee . K. HUGHES, B.sc. C. St. J. MULHOLLAND, B.sc. PHYLLIS M. ROUNTREE, D.sc. (Meib.), Dip.Bact. (Lond.). W. B. SMITH-WHITE, m.a. (Cantab.), B.Sc. (Syd.). LV : NOTICES, NOTICE. Tut Royau Society of New South Wales originated in 1821 as the ‘“ Philosophical Society of Australasia’; after an interval of inactivity, it was resuscitated in 1850, under the name of the “ Australian Philosophical Society ’’, by which title it was known until 1856, when the name was changed to the “ Philosophical Society of New South Wales ”’; in 1866, by the sanction of Her Most Gracious Majesty Queen Victoria, it assumed its present title, and was incorporated by Act of the Parliament of New South Wales in 1881. TO AUTHORS. Particulars regarding the preparation of manuscripts of papers for publication in the Society’s Journal are to be found in the “ Guide to Authors”, which is obtainable on appli- cation to the Honorary Secretaries of the Society. FORM OF BEQUEST. I bequeath the sum of £ to the Royat Socrery or New Sours WaALEs, Incorporated by Act of the Parliament of New South Wales in 1881, and I deelare that the receipt of the Treasurer for the time being of the said Corporation shall be an effectual discharge for the said Bequest, which I direct to be paid within calendar months after my decease, without any reduction whatsoever, whether on account of Legacy Duty thereon or otherwise, out of such part of my estate as may be lawfully applied for that purpose. [Those persons who feel disposed to benefit the Royal Society of New South Wales by Legacies are recommended to instruct their Solicitors to adopt the above Form of Bequest.] The volumes of the Journal and Proceedings may be obtained at the Society’s Rooms, Science House, Gloucester Street, Sydney. Volumes XI to LIII (that is to 1919) at 12/6 each be LIV ,, LXVI (1920 to 1932) ,, 25/- ,, = LXVIII (1936) 99 20/55 9 LXX ,, LXXXII (1938 to 1948) ,, 25/- _,, » LUXXXIIT and LXXXIV 90, sO Of its ants Volumes I to X (to 1876) and LX VII and LXTIX (1935 and 1937) are out of print. Reprints of papers are available. LIST OF THE MEMBERS OF THE Royal Society of New South Wales as at April 1, 1951 P Members who have contributed papers which have been published in the Society’s Journal. The numerals indicate the number of such contributions. t Life Members. Elected. 1944 Adamson, Colin Lachlan, Chemist, 36 McLaren-street, North Sydney. 1938 P 2 /tAlbert, Adrien, D.sc., Ph.D. Lond., B.Sc. Syd., A.B.1.C. Gt. B., Professor of Medical Chemistry, The Australian National University, 183 Euston-road, London | N.W.1. 1935 |t Albert, Michael Francois, *‘ Boomerang,”’ Billyard-avenue, Elizabeth Bay. 1950 Alexander, Albert Ernest, B.Sc., M.A., Ph.D., Professor of Chemistry, N.S.W. University of Technology ; p.r. 178 Raglan-street, Mosman. 1898 tAlexander, Frank Lee, Surveyor, 5 Bennett-street, Neutral Bay. 1941 . tAlldis, Victor le Roy, I.s., Registered Surveyor, Box 57, Orange, N.S.W. 1948 Anderson, Geoffrey William, B.sSc., 17 Carlton-street, Harbord. 1948 eee Andrews, Paul Burke, c/o North Broken Hill Ltd., Broken Hill. 1950 Astbury, Norman Frederick, M.a. (Cantab.), M.1.E.E. (Lond.), F.Inst.P., F.R.S.A., Professor of Applied Physics, N.S.W. University of Technology, Broadway, Sydney. 1930 aa Aston, Ronald Leslie, B.sc., B.E.. Syd., M.Sc., Ph.D. Camb., A.M.1.E. Aust., Lecturer in Civil Engineering and Surveying in the University of Sydney; p.r. 24 Redmyre-road, Strathfield. (President, 1948.) 1919 iP} Aurousseau, Marcel, B.sc., 16 Woodland-street, Balgowlah. 1935 Back, Catherine Dorothy Jean, m.sc., The Women’s College, Newtown. 1949 P 2 Backhouse, James Roy, m.sc. Syd., Lecturer, Sydney Technical College ; p.r. Fowler-avenue, Bexley North. 1924 Pp? Bailey, Victor Albert, M.A., D.Phil., F.Inst.P., Professor of Experimental Physics in the University of Sydney. 1934 ipa 2 Baker, Stanley Charles, mM.sc., A.tInst.P., Head Teacher of Physics, Newcastle Technical College, Tighe’s Hill; p.r. 8 Hewison-street, Tighe’s Hill, N.S.W. 1937 Baldick, Kenric James, B.Sc., 19 Beaconsfield-parade, Lindfield. 1946 Pid Barclay, Gordon Alfred, Chemistry Department, Sydney Technical College, Harris Street, Ultimo, N.S.W.; p.r. 78 Alt Street, Ashfield. rong Bardsley, John Ralph, 76 Wright’s-road, Drummoyne. 1950 Baxter, John Philip, B.sc., Ph.D., A.M.I.cChem.E., Professor of Chemical Engineer- | ing, N.S.W. University of Technology, Broadway, Sydney. 1947 Beckmann, Peter, A.s.T.c., Lecturer in Chemistry, Technical College, Wol- longong. 1933." | Bedwell, Arthur Johnson, Eucalyptus Oil Merchant, ‘‘ Kama,” 10 Darling Point-road, Edgecliff. 1926 Bentivoglio, Sydney Ernest, B.sc.agr., 42 Telegraph-road, Pymble. 1937 Pog Birch, Arthur John, M.sc., D.Phil. Oxon., The University Chemical Laboratory, Cambridge, England. 1916 {Birrell, Septimus, 17 Appian Way, Burwood. 1920 tBishop, Eldred George, Manufacturing and General Engineer, 37-45 Myrtle- street, Chippendale; p.r. 264 Wolseley-road, Mosman. 1939 Pers Blake, George Gascoigne, M.I.E.E., F.Inst.p., ‘‘ Holmleigh,”’ Cecil-avenue, Pennant Hills. Vi Elected. 1948 1946 1933 1920 1939 1948 1948 4938 1949 1946 1919 1942 1945 1941 1935 1913 1947 1940 1946 1898 1926 1950 1950 1938 1948 1903 1945 1950 1944 1933 1940 1913 1935 1935 1938 1941 1940 1940 1940 1948 1940 P 29 eS) P 25 Bae, 1 1 Py P 23 Pid Paco P 21 P. 2 iP 2 Pad Pee Fred Roy., B.sc. (Hons.), Industrial Chemist, 12 Culworth-avenue, Killara. Blaschke, Ernst Herbert, 6 [llistron Flats, 63 Carrabella-street, Kirribilli. Bolliger, Adolph, Ph.D., F.R.A4.C.1., Director of Research, Gordon Craig Urological Research Laboratory, Department of Surgery, University of Sydney. (President, 1945.) Booth, Edgar Harold, M.c., D.sc., F.Inst.p., ‘‘ Hills and Dales,’ Mittagong. (President, 1935.) Bosworth, Richard Charles Leslie, M.sc., D.sc. Adel., Ph.D. Camb., F.R.A.C.1., F.Inst.P., c.o. C.S.R. Co. Ltd., Pyrmont; p.r. 41 Spencer-road, Killara. Boyd, Eric Harold, B.a., B.Sc., Dip.Hd., F.P.S., The King’s School, Parramatta. Boyd, Joan, B.sc. Hons. Lond., Dip.zd. Lond., The King’s School, Parramatta. Breckenridge, Marion, B.sc., Department of Geology, The University of Sydney ; p.r. 19 Handley-avenue, Thornleigh. Brewer, Roy, B.sc. Syd., Research Officer, Division of Soils, C.S.I.R.O. ; p.r. Block 1, Section 56, O’Connor, Canberra, A.C.T. Breyer, Bruno, M.D., Ph.D., M.A., F.R.A.C.1., Lecturer in Agricultural Chemistry, Faculty of Agriculture, University of Sydney, Sydney. Briggs, George Henry, D.Sc., Ph.D., F.Inst.P., Officer-in-Charge, Section of Physics, National Standards Laboratory of Australia, University Grounds Sydney; p.r. 13 Findlay-avenue, Roseville. Brown, Desmond J., m.sc. (Syd.), Ph.D. (Lond.), D.1.c., Department of Medical Chemistry, Australian National University, 183 Euston-road, London, N.W.1. Brown, Norma Dorothy (Mrs.), B.Sc., Biochemist, 2 Macauley-street, Leich- hardt. Brown, Samuel Raymond, 4.c.a. Aust., 87 Ashley-street, Chatswood. Browne, Ida Alison, D.sc., Geology Department, The University of Sydney. tBrowne, William Rowan, D.se., Reader in Geology,University of Sydney. (President, 1932.) Buchanan, Gregory Stewart, B.sc. (Hons.), Lecturer in Physical Chemistry, Sydney Technical College; p.r. 19 Ferguson-avenue, Thornleigh. Buckley, Lindsay Arthur, B.sc., 29 Abingdon-road, Roseville. Bullen, Keith Edward, M.A., B.sc. N.Z., M.A. Melb., Ph.D., Sc.D. Camb., F.RB.S., Professor of Applied Mathematics, University of Sydney, Sydney, N.S.W. {Burfitt, W. Fitzmaurice, B.A., M.B., Ch.M., B.Sc. Syd., F.R.A.C.S., ‘‘ Radstoke,”’ Elizabeth Bay. Burkitt, Arthur Neville St. George, M.B., B.sc., Professor of Anatomy in the University of Sydney. Burton, Gerald, B.sc. (Syd.), Geologist, c.o. Bureau of Mineral Resources, Canberra, A.C.T. Caldwell, John Henry, B.sc. (Syd.), 63 Arthur-street, Homebush. tCarey, Samuel Warren, D.Sc., Professor of Geology, University of Tasmania, Tasmania. Carroll, Dorothy, B.A., B.Sc., Ph.D., D.I.C. tCarslaw, Horatio Scott, Sc.D., LL.D., F.R.S.E., Emeritus Professor of Mathe- matics, University of Sydney, Fellow of Emmanuel College, Cambridge ; Burradoo, N.S.W. Carter, Harold Burnell, B.v.sc., Officer-in-Charge, Wool Biology Laboratory, 17 Randle-street, Sydney. Carver, Ashley George, 234 Shell Cove-road, Neutral Bay. Cavill, George William Kenneth, m.sc., 40 Chandos-street, Ashfield. Chalmers, Robert Oliver, 4A.s.t.c., Australian Museum, College Street, Sydney. Chambers, Maxwell Clark, B.sc., c/o Coty (England) Ltd., 35-41 Hutchinson- street, Moore Park; p.r. 58 Spencer-road, Killara. {Cheel, Edwin, 40 Queen-street, Ashfield. (President, 1931.) Churchward, John Gordon, B.Sc.Agr., Ph.D., 1 Hunter-street, Woolwich. Clark, Sir Reginald Marcus, K.B.E., Central Square, Sydney. Clune, Francis Patrick, Author and Accountant, 15 Prince’s-avenue, Vaucluse. Cohen, Max Charles, B.sc., 9 Richmond-street, East, Toronto 1, Ontario, Canada. Cohen, Samuel Bernard, M.sc., A.R.A.C.1., 74 Boundary-street, Roseville. Cole, Edward Ritchie, B.sc., 7 Wolsten-avenue, Turramurra. Cole, Joyce Marie, B.sc., 7 Wolsten-avenue, Turramurra. Cole, Leslie Arthur, Company Executive, 21 Carlisle-street, Rose Bay. Collett, Gordon, B.sc., 27 Rogers-avenue, Haberfield. Elected. 1948 1946 1945 1913 1933 1940 1919 1909 1941 1921 1948 1940 1950 1919 1906 1928 1947 1950 1943 1937 1948 1924 1934 1945 1950 1934 1949 1940 1944 1908 1935 1949 1950 1909 1940 1940 1933 1949 1932 1940 1943 1950 P 5 Pei tae | Pipl Pp *2 P 15 P 55 P 2 Beak Vii Cook, Cyril Lloyd, m.sc., University of Manchester. Cook, Rodney Thomas, A.s.T.c., 10 Riverview-road, Fairfield. Coombes, Arthur Roylance, 4.s.T.c. (chem.), 14 Georges River-road, Croydon. t{Coombs, F. A., F.c.s., Instructor of Leather Dressing and Tanning, Sydney Technical College; p.r. Bannerman-crescent, Rosebery. Corbett, Robert Lorimer, Scot Chambers, Hosking-place, Sydney. Cortis-Jones, Beverly, M.sc., 62 William-street, Roseville. Cotton, Frank Stanley, p.sc., Research Professor in Physiology in the University . of Sydney. {Cotton, Leo Arthur, M.A., D.sc., 113 Queen’s Parade East, Newport Beach. (President, 1929.) Craig, David Parker, ph.p., Chemistry Department, University College, Gower- street, London, W.C.1., England. {Cresswick, John Arthur, A.R.A.C.I., F.c.S., Production Superintendent and Chief Chemist, c/o The Metropolitan Meat Industry Commissioner, State Abattoir and Meat Works, Homebush Bay; p.r. 101 Villiers-street, Rockdale. Cymerman, John, Ph.D., D.1.C., A.R.C.S., B.Sc., A.R.I.C., Lecturer in Organic Chemistry, University of Sydney. | Dadour, Anthony, B.sc., 25 Elizabeth-street, Waterloo. Dalziel, Edwin Robert, m.a. (N.Z.), Ph.D. (Hdin.), M.1.M.s. (U.S.A.), c/o The Overseas Telecommunications Commission, 47 York-street Sydney. de Beuzeville, Wilfred Alex. Watt, 5.P., ‘‘ Melamere ”’, Welham-street, Beecroft. tDixson, Sir William, ‘‘ Merridong’”’, Gordon-road, Killara. Donegan, Henry Arthur James, A.8.T.C., A.R.A.C.I., Analyst, Department of Mines, Sydney ; p.r. 18 Hillview-street, Sans Souci. Downes, Alan Marchant, B.Sc. (Hons.), Grandview-avenue, Croydon, Victoria. Drummond, Heather Rutherford, B.sc., 15 Watson-street, Neutral Bay. Dudgeon, William, Manager, Commonwealth Drug Co., 50-54 Kippax-street, Sydney. Dulhunty, John Allan, pD.sc., Geology Department, University of Sydney ; p.r. 40 Manning-road, Double Bay. (President, 1947.) Dunlop, Bruce Thomas, B.sc., Schoolteacher, 77 Stanhope-road, Killara. Dupain, George Zephirin, A.R.A.C.I., F.C.S., Director Dupain Institute of Physical Education and Medical Gymnastics, Manning Building, 449 Pitt-street, Sydney ; p.r. “‘ Rose Bank ’’, 158 Parramatta-road, Ashfield. Dwyer, Francis P. J., p.sc., Lecturer in Chemistry, University of Sydney, Sydney. Eade, Ronald Arthur, B.sc., 21 Steward-street, Leichhardt. Edgell, Henry Stewart, 8 Barkly-crescent, Forrest, Canberra, A.C.T. Elkin, Adolphus Peter, M.a., Ph.p., Professor of Anthropology in the University of Sydney. (President, 1940.) Ellison, Dorothy Jean, m.sc. (Hons.) N.Z., Science Teacher, Abbotsleigh, Wahroonga; p.r. 51 Tryon-road, Lindfield. Emmerton, Henry James, B.Sc., 1 Rosedale-road, Gordon. Erhart, John Charles, Chemical Engineer, c/o “‘Ciba”’ Coy., Basle, Switzerland. \tEsdaile, Edward William, 42 Hunter-street, Sydney. Evans, Silvanus Gladstone, 4.1.4.4. Lond., A.R.A.1.A., 6 Major-street, Coogee. Everingham, Richard, 3 The Bastion, Castlecrag. Fallon, Joseph James, B.Ec. (Zurich), Photographer, 11 Bennett-street, Bondi. tFawsitt, Charles Edward, D.Sc., Ph.D., F.R.A.C.I., Emeritus Professor of Chemistry, 144 Darling Point-road, Edgecliff. (President, 1919.) Finch, Franklin Charles, B.sc., Kirby-street, Rydalmere, N.S.W. Fisher, Robert, B.sc., 3 Sackville-street, Maroubra. Fletcher, Harold Oswald, Palzontologist, Australian Museum, College-street, Sydney. Flinter, Basil Harold, B.sc. (Hons.), 75 Elizabeth Bay-road, Elizabeth Bay. Forman, Kenn. P., M.1.Refr.E., Box 1822, G.P.O., Sydney. Franki, Robert James Anning, B.sc., 891 New South Head-road, Rose Bay. Frederick, Robert Desider Louis, B.E., 1540 High-street, Malvern, Victoria. Freeman, Hans Charles, B.sc., Teaching Fellow in Chemistry, University of Sydney; p.r. 43 Newcastle-street, Rose Bay. Vili Elected. 1940 1944 1945 1948 1935 1939 1926 1942 1947 1947 1940 1948 1945 1947 1949 1936 1949 1948 1938 1946 1948 1947 1934 1892 1949 1940 1905 1936 1934 1948 1949 1946 1934 1919 1945 Poe 2 4 PG 1 7 P 14 PG dee Freney, Martin Raphael, B.sc, entral Wool Testing House, 17 Randle-street, Sydney. Friend, James Alan, M.sc. (Syd.), Ph.D. (Camb.), Biochemistry Unit, C.S.I.R.O., Wool Textile Research Laboratories, 572 Flinders-lane, Melbourne, C.1. Furst, Hellmut Friedrich, B.D.s. (Syd.), D.M.D. (Hamburg), Dental Surgeon, 158 Bellevue-road, Bellevue Hill. Gardiner, Edward Carson, A.M.1.E. (Aust.), Electrical Engineer in Charge of Construction at the Captain Cook Graving Dock, for the Department of Works and Housing; p.r. 39 Spencer-street, Rose Bay. Garretty, Michael Duhan, D.sc., ‘“‘ Surry Lodge ’’, Mitcham Road, Mitcham, Victoria. Gascoigne, Robert Mortimer, Chemistry Department, University of Liverpool, England. Gibson, Alexander James, M.E., M.Inst.c.E., M.I.E.Aust., Consulting Engineer, 906 Culwulla Chambers, 67 Castlereagh-street, Sydney; p.r. ‘* Wirruna,”’ Belmore-avenue, Wollstonecraft. Gibson, Neville Allan, M.sc., A.R.1.c., Industrial Chemist, 217 Parramatta-road, Haberfield. Gill, Naida Sugden (Miss), B.sc., 45 Neville-street, Marrickville. tGill, Stuart Frederic, School Teacher, 45 Neville-street, Marrickville. Gillis, Richard Galvin, Senior Lecturer, Organic Chemistry, Melbourne Technical College; p.r. 4 Tennyson-avenue, Caulfield, S.E.7, Victoria. Glasson, Kenneth Roderick, B.sc., Geologist, Lake George Mines Ltd., Captain’s Flat, N.S.W. Goddard, Roy Hamilton, F.c.a. Aust., Royal Exchange, Bridge-street, Sydney. Goldsworthy, Neil Ernest, M.B., ch.m. Syd., Ph.D., D.T.M. & H. Camb., D.T.M. & H. Eing., D.P.H. Camb., 65 Roseville-avenue, Roseville. Gordon, William Fraser, B.sc. Syd., Industrial Chemist ; p.r. 176 Avoca-street, Randwick. Goulston, Edna Maude, B.sc., 83 Birriga-road, Bellevue Hill. Gover, Alfred Terence, M.com., 32 Benelong-road, Cremorne. Gray, Charles Alexander Menzies, B.Sc., B.E., 75 Woniora-road, Hurstville. Griffiths, Edward L., B.sc., A.R.A.C.I., A.R.I.C., Chief Chemist, Department of Agriculture ; p.r. 151 Wollongong-road, Arncliffe. Gutmann, Felix, Ph.D., F.Inst.P., M.I.R.E., N.S.W. University of Technology, Broadway, Sydney. Gyarfas, Eleonora Clara, M.Sc. Budapest, Ph.D. (Syd.), Research Assistant, University of Sydney ; p.r. 53 Simpson-street, Bondi. Hall, Lennard Robert, B.sc., Geological Survey, Department of Mines, Bridge- street, Sydney. Hall, Norman Frederick Blake, M.sc., Chemist, 154 Wharf-road, Longueville. ‘tHalloran, Henry Ferdinand, L.s., A.M.I.E.Aust., F.S.I.Eng., M.T.P.1.Eng., 153 Elizabeth-street, Sydney ; p.r. 23 March-street, Bellevue Hill. Hampton, Edward John William, A.s.T.c.; p.r. 1 Hunter Street, Waratah, N.S.W. Hanlon, Frederick Noel, B.sc., Geologist, Department of Mines, Sydney. tHarker, George, D.Sc., F.R.A.C.I.; p.r. 89 Homebush-road, Strathfield. Harper, Arthur Frederick Alan, M.Sc., A.Inst.P., National Standards Laboratory, University Grounds, City-road, Chippendale. Harrington, Herbert Richard, Teacher of Physics and Electrical Engineering, Technical College, Harris-street, Ultimo. Harris, Clive Melville, A.s.T.c., A.R.A.C.1., Demonstrator, Chemistry Depart- ment, Sydney Technical College; p.r. 12 Livingstone-road, Lidcombe. Harris, Henry Maxwell, B.Sc., B.E., Assistant Engineer, W.C. & I.C., 25 Prospect- road, Summer Hill. Harrison, Ernest John Jasper, B.sc., Geologist, N.S.W. Geological Survey, Department of Mines, Sydney. Hayes, William Lyall, A.s.T.c., A.R.A.c.I., Works Chemist, c/o Wm. Cooper & Nephews (Aust.) Ltd., Phillip-street, Concord; p.r. 34 Nicholson-street, Chatswood. Henriques, Frederick Lester, 208 Clarence-street, Sydney. Higgs, Alan Charles, Manager, Asbestos Products Pty. Ltd.; p.r. corner Bungaloe-avenue and New-street, Balgowlah. Elected. 1938 1936 1928 1948 1916 194] 1938 1923 1943 ix Ee Hill, Dorothy, m.sc. Q’ld., Ph.p. Cantab., Geological Research Fellow, University of Queensland, Brisbane. Hirst, Edward Eugene, A.M.1.E., Vice-Chairman and Joint Managing Director, British General Electric Co. Ltd.; p.r. “ Springmead,’’ Ingleburn. Hirst, George Walter Cansdell, B.Sc., A.M.1.E. (Aust.), ** St. Cloud,’’ Beaconsfield- road, Chatswood. P's Hogarth, Julius William, 8 Jeanneret-avenue, Hunter’s Hill. tHoggan, Henry James, A.M.1.M.E. Lond., A.M.1.E. Aust., Consulting and Designing Engineer, 81 Frederick-street, Rockdale. Howard, Harold Theodore Clyde, B.sc., Principal, Technical College, Granville. P 13 Hughes, Gordon Kingsley, B.sc., Department of Chemistry, University of Sydney, Sydney. P 3 |tHynes, Harold John, D.sc., B.Sc.agr., Biologist, Department of Agriculture, Box 36a, G.P.O., Sydney ; p.r. “ Belbooree,’’ 10 Wandella-avenue, Rose- ville. Iredale, Thomas, D.Sc., F.R.I.c., Chemistry Department, University of Sydney p-r. 96 Roseville-avenue, Roseville. 1 Jaeger, John Conrad, M.A., D.Sc., University of Tasmania, Hobart, Tasmania. 15 Johnston, Thomas Harvey, M.A., D.Sc., C.M.Z.S., Professor of Zoology in the University of Adelaide. (Cor. Mem., 1912.) 1 Joklik, Gunther F., B.sc., c/o Bureau of Mineral Resources, Canberra, A.C.T. 6 | Joplin, Germaine Anne, B.Sc., Ph.D., D.Sc., c/o Bureau of Mineral Resources, Canberra, A.C.T. 1 | Jopling, Alan Victor, B.sc., B.E., Geology Department, N.S.W. University of Technology, Broadway, Sydney. Judd, William Percy, 123 Wollongong-road, Arncliffe. 2K n>} lao) c lila] Kelly, Caroline Tennant (Mrs.), Dip.anth., ‘“‘ Withington ’’, Castle Hill-road, Castle Hill. Kennard, William Walter, 9 Bona Vista-avenue, Maroubra. P 1 | Kenny, Edward Joseph, Geological Surveyor, Department of Mines, Sydney ; p-r. 17 Alma-street, Ashfield. Kimble, Frank Oswald, Engineer, 16 Evelyn-avenue, Concord. Kimble, Jean Annie, B.Sc., Research Chemist, 383 Marrickville-road, Marrick- ville. Kirchner, William John, B.sc., A.R.A.C.1., Manufacturing Chemist, c/o Messrs. Burroughs Wellcome & Co. (Australia) Ltd., Victoria-street, Waterloo ; p.r. 18 Lyne-road, Cheltenham. Knight, Oscar Le Maistre, B.E. Syd., A.M.I.C.E., A.M.I.E.Aust., Engineer, 10 Mildura-street, Killara. Knowles, George Henry Anderson, B.sc. (Syd.), Soil Conservationist, Box 49, iP:O:, Hay, N:S2W. Koch, Leo E., Dr.phil.Hrabil (Cologne), Research Lecturer, N.S.W. University of Technology ; p.r. 39 Bond-street, Mosman. Pye Lambeth, Arthur James, B.sc., ‘“‘ Naranje,’’? Sweethaven-road, Wetherill Park, N.S.W. Lancaster, Kelvin John, B.sc., 43 Balfour-road, Rose Bay. Langley, Julia Mary, ‘*“‘ Linwood,’? Womerah-street, Turramurra. Leach, Stephen Laurence, B.A., B.Sc., A.R.A.C.1., British Australian Lead Manu- facturers Pty. Ltd., Box 21, P.O., Concord. Lederer, Michael, Newcastle Technical College, Tighe’s Hill. Le Fevre, Raymond James Wood, D.S8c., Ph.D., F.R.1.C., Professor of Chemistry, Chemistry Department, University of Sydney, Sydney. i 2 Lemberg, Max Rudolph, p.phil., Institute of Medical Research, Royal North Shore Hospital, St. Leonards. P 56 |{tLions, Francis, B.Sc., Ph.D., A.R.I.C., Reader, Department of Chemistry, Uni- versity of Sydney. (President, 1946-47.) Lloyd, James Charles, B.sc. Syd., N.S.W. Geological Survey, 41 Goulburn-street, Liverpool. X Elected. 1940 1906 1949 1950 1947 1943 1945 1948 1942 1939 1949 1943 1950 1949 1940 1948 1906 1944 1943 1947 1927 1943 1946 1946 1947 1950 1947 1940 1947 1949 1944 1946 1935 1949 1912 1929 1950 1940 1922 1941 1934 1 14 P 4 1B) Peay dete nk egeye Pot P 14 Piel P 25 P 30 { | Lockwood, William Hutton, B.sc., c.o. Institute of Medical Research, The Royal North Shore Hospital, St. Leonards. tLoney, Charles Augustus Luxton, M.Am.soc.Refr.E., National Mutual Building, 350 George-street, Sydney. Loughnan, Frederick Charles, ‘‘ Bodleian ’’, 26 Kenneth-street, Longueville. Low, Angus Henry, B.sc., 74 Turnbull-street, Merewether. _ Lowenbein, Gladys Olive (Mrs.), B.sc. Melb., F.R.1.c. Gt. B., A.R.A.C.1., 5 Berrima Flats, 12 Mulwarrie-avenue, Randwick. tLuber, Daphne (Mrs.), B.sc., 98 Lang-road, Centennial Park. Luber, Leonard, Pharmacist, 80 Queen-street, Woollahra. Lyons, Lawrence Ernest, B.A., M.sc., Chemistry Department, University College, Gower-street, London, W.1. Lyons, Raymond Norman Matthew, m.sc., Biochemical Research Worker, 84 Marine-parade, Maroubra. Maccoll, Allan, M.sc., Department of Chemistry, University College, Gower- street, London, W.C.1. McCarthy, Frederick David, Dip.anthr., Curator of Anthropology, Australian Museum, Sydney; p.r. 10 Tycannah-road, Northbridge. McCoy, William Kevin, Analytical Chemist, c/o Mr. A. J. McCoy, 39 Malvern- avenue, Merrylands. McCullagh, Morris Behan, Inspecting Engineer, 23 Wallaroy-road, Edgecliff. McElroy, Clifford Turner, 147 Arden-street, Coogee. McGregor, Gordon Howard, 4 Maple-avenue, Pennant Hills. McInnes, Gordon Elliott, Department of Geology, The University of Sydney; p.r. 46 Laycock-street, Bexley. t{McIntosh, Arthur Marshall, ‘““ Moy Lodge,”’ Hill-street, Roseville. McKenzie, Hugh Albert, B.sc., 52 Bolton-street, Guildford. McKern, Howard Hamlet Gordon, A.S.T.c., A.R.A.C.I., Assistant Chemist, Museum of Applied Arts and Sciences; p.r. Flat 2, 424 Waimea-street, Burwood. McMahon, Patrick Reginald, m.agr.sc. N.Z., Ph.p. Leeds, A.R.1.C., A.N.Z.I.C., Lecturer-in-charge, Sheep and Wool Department, Sydney Technical College, East Sydney. McMaster, Sir Frederick Duncan, kt., ‘‘ Dalkeith,’’ Cassilis, N.S.W. McNamara, Barbara Joyce (Mrs.), M.B., B.s., Yeoval, 7.W. McPherson, John Charters, 14 Sarnar-road, Greenwich. McRoberts, Helen May, B.sc., New England University College, Armidale. Magee, Charles Joseph, p.sc.agr. Syd., M.sc. Wis., Chief Biologist, Department of Agriculture; p.r. 4 Alexander-parade, Roseville. Mahoney, Albert John, B.sc., Industrial Chemist, 112 Archer-street, Chatswood. Maley, Leo Edmund, m.sc., B.Sc. (Hons.), A.R.A.C.I., A.M.A.I.M.M., 116 Maitland- road, Mayfield. Malone, Edward E., 33 Windsor-road, St. Mary’s. Mapstone, George E., M.Sc., A.R.A.C.I., M.Inst.Pet., Chief Chemist of National Oil Pty. Ltd., Glen Davis; p.r. 2 Anderson Square, Glen Davis, N.S.W. Marshall, Charles Edward, Ph.D., D.sc., Professor of Geology, The University of Sydney, Sydney. Martin, Cyril Maxwell, Chemist, 22 Wattle-street, Haberfield. May, Albert, Ph.p., M.A., 94 Birriga-road, Bellevue Hill. Maze, William Harold, m.sc., Registrar, The University of Sydney, Sydney. Meares, Harry John Devenish, Technical Librarian, Colonial Sugar Refining Co. Ltd., Box 483, G.P.O., Sydney. tMeldrum, Henry John, B.A., B.sc., Lecturer, The Teachers’ College, University Grounds, Newtown; p.r. 98 Sydney-road, Fairlight. Mellor, David Paver, D.sc., F.R.A.C.I., Reader, Department of Chemistry, Uni- versity of Sydney ; p.r. 137 Middle Harbour-road, Lindfield. (President, 1941-42.) Millar, Lily Maud (Mrs.), 4 Waratah House, 43 Bayswater-road, King’s Cross. Millership, William, m.sc., Chief Chemist, Davis Gelatine (Aust.) Pty. Ltd., 15 Shaw-avenue, Earlwood. Morrison, Frank Richard, F.R.A.C.I., F.C.S., Deputy Director, Museum of Applied Arts and. Sciences, Harris-street, Board, Sydney. (President, 1950-1951.) : Morrissey, Mathew John, B.A., F.S.T.C., A.R.A.C.1., M.B., B.S., ¢/O Residents’ Quarters, Sydney Hospital, Macquarie Street, Sydney. Mort, Francis George Arnot, A.R.A.C.I., Chemist, 110 Green’s Road, Fivedock. Elected. 1950 1948 1944 1946 1948 1915 1923 1950 1948 1930 1943 1932 1950 1943 1935 1945 1938 1920 1947 1948 1940 1935 1947 1921 1950 1920 1949 1948 1938 1935 1946 1943 1919 1949 iP 2 Pa 1 1 4 P 25 P 4 legal | cami P il Pay xi Mortlock, Allan John, B.Sc. (Hons.), Research Officer, Division of Physics, C.8.I.R.O.; p.r. 28 Stanley-street, Chatswood. | Mosher, Kenneth George, B.sc., Geologist, c.o. Joint Coal Board, 66 King-street, Sydney. Moye, Daniel George, Geologist, 6 First-avenue, Snowy Mountains Hydro- Electric Authority, Cooma, N.S.W. Mulholland, Charles St. John, B.sc., Geologist, Department of Mines, Sydney. Mulley, Joan W., Technical Officer, C.S.I.R.O.; p.r. 4 Billyard-avenue, Elizabeth Bay. {Murphy, Robert Kenneth, Dr.Ing., Chem., A.S.T.C., M.I.Chem.E., F.R.A.C.L., Principal, Sydney Technical College, Sydney. Murray, Colonel Jack Keith, B.A., B.Sc.Agr., Administrator, Territory of Papua, New Guinea, Government House, Port Moresby. | Murray, Patrick Desmond Fitzgerald, m.a., D.sc., Professor of Zoology, Uni- versity of Sydney. Naylor, Betty Yvonne, B.sSc., 6 Niblick-avenue, Roseville. Naylor, George Francis King, M.A., M.Sc., Dip.Ed., A.A.1.1.P., Lecturer in Philosophy and Psychology, University of Queensland, Brisbane, Qld. ‘t{Neuhaus, John William George, 190 Old Prospect-road, Wentworthville. Newman, Ivor Vickery, M.Sc., Ph.D., F.R.M.S., F.L.S., Professor of Botany, The University of Ceylon, Colombo, Ceylon. Ney, Michel, B.sc., Research Assistant, Geology Department, The University of Sydney; p.r. 6 Fairlight-avenue, Killara. Nicol, Alexander Campbell, 4.S.1T.c., A.R.A.C.1., Chief Chemist, Crown Crystal Glass Co.; p.r. 200 Paine-street, Maroubra. Nicol, Phyllis Mary, M.sc., Sub-Principal, The Women’s College, Newtown. Noakes, Lyndon Charles, Geologist, c/o Mineral Resources Survey, Canberra, A.C.T. Noble, Norman Scott, D.Sc.Agr., M.Sc., D.1.0., c/o C.S.I.R.O., 314 Albert-street, East Melbourne, Vic. tNoble, Robert Jackson, M.Sc., B.Sc.Agr., Ph.D., Under Secretary, Department of Agriculture, Box 36a, G.P.O., Sydney; p.r. 324 Middle Harbour-road, Lindfield. (President, 1924.) Nordon, Peter, A.S.T.C., A.R.A.C.I., Chemical Engineer, 39 Tahlee-street, Burwood. Northcott, Jean, B.sc. (Hons.), Chemistry Department, The University of Sydney; p.r. 38 Canberra-street, Lane Cove. Nyholm, Ronald Sydney, m.sc., Chemistry Department, University College, Gower-street, London, W.C.1, England. O’Connell, Rev. Daniel J. K., S.3., D.Sc., D.Ph., F.R.A.S., Riverview College Observatory, Sydney. - Old, Adrian Noel, B.sc.agr., Chemist, Department of Agriculture ; p.r. 4 Spring- field-avenue, Pott’s Point. Osborne, George Davenport, D.Sc. Syd., Ph.p. Camb., Lecturer and Demonstrator in Geology in the University of Sydney. (President, 1944.) Oxenford, Reginald Augustus, B.Se., 9 Cambridge-street, Singleton, N.S.W. Penfold, Arthur Ramon, F.R.A.C.1., F.c.S., Director, Museum of Applied Arts and Sciences, Harris-street, Broadway, Sydney. (President, 1931.) Penrose, Ruth Elizabeth, B.sc., 92 Baringa-road, Northbridge. Perry, Hubert Roy, B.sc., 74 Woodbine-street, Bowral. Phillips, Marie Elizabeth, B.sc., Botany Department, University, Manchester, 13, England. Phillips, Orwell, 55 Darling Point-road, Edgecliff. Pinwill, Norman, B.A. (Q’land), The Scots College, Bellevue Hill. Plowman, Ronald Arthur, B.Sc. Lond., A.S.T.C., A.R.A.C.1., Analytical Chemist, 21 Harris-street, Normanhurst. : Poate, Hugh Raymond Guy, M.B., chm. Syd., F.R.c.S. Hng., L.R.c.P. Lond., F.R.A.c.S., Surgeon, 225 Macquarie-street, Sydney; p.r. 38 Victoria-road, Bellevue Hill. Poggendorff, Walter Hans George, B.Sc.Agr., Chief of the Division of Plant Industry, N.S.W. Department of Agriculture, Box 364, G.P.O., Sydney. xii Elected. 1896 1946 1921 1938 1945 1927 1918 1945 1893 1935 1922 1940 1919 19364 1947 1947 1931 1947 1946 1950 1947 1947 1939 1939 1933 1940 1949 © 1935 1940 1948 1940 1948 1945 1945 1920 1948 1946 1940 1950 1949 Pd Poa P 3 6 P22 Pies iP pal P19 Py,'3 P 4 Pail Py i[Pope, Roland James, B.A. Syd., M.D., Ch.M., F.R.C.S. Hdin., c/o Perpetual Trustee Co., 33 Hunter-street, Sydney. Potter, Bryce Harrison, B.Sc. (Hons.) Syd., 68 Wharf-road, Gladesville. Powell, Charles Wilfrid Roberts, F.R.1.C., A.R.A.C.I., Company Executive, c/o Colonial Sugar Refining Co., O’Connell-street, Sydney ; p.r. ‘‘ Wansfell,”’ Kirkoswald-avenue, Mosman. Powell, John Wallis, A.s.T.c., A.R.A.C.I., Managing Director, Foster Clark (Aust.) Ltd., 17 Thurlow-street, Redfern. Prescott, Alwyn Walker, B.Eng., Lecturer in Mechanical and Electrical Engineering in the University of Sydney ; p.r. Harris-road, Normanhurst. Price, William Lindsay, B.E., B.Sc., Teacher of Physics, Sydney Technical College; p.r. 8 Wattle-street, Killara. Priestley, Henry, M.D., Ch.M., B.Sc., 54 Fuller’s-road, Chatswood. (President, 1942-43.) Proud, John Seymour, Mining Engineer, 4 View-street, Chatswood. tPurser, Cecil, B.a., M.B., ch.m. Syd., “‘ Ascot,” Grosvenor-road, Wahroonga. tQuodling, Florrie Mabel, B.sc., Lecturer in Geology, University of Sydney Raggatt, Harold George, D.sc., Director, Bureau of Mineral Resources, Geology and Geophysics, 485 Bourke-street, Melbourne, C.1, Victoria. Ralph, Colin Sydney, B.sc., 24 Canberra-street, Epping. Ranclaud, Archibald Boscawen Boyd, B.sc., B.E., 57 William-street, Sydney. Randall, Harry, Buena Vista-avenue, Denistone. Ray, Nancy Evelyn (Mrs.); Plastics Manufacturer. Ray, Reginald John, Plastics Manufacturer and Research Chemist. Rayner, Jack Maxwell, B.sSc., F.Inst.P., Chief Geophysicist, Bureau of Mineral Resources, Geology and Geophysics, 485 Bourke-street, Melbourne, Vic. Reuter, Fritz Henry, ph.p. (Berlin, 1930), F.R.A.c.1., 94 Onslow-street, Rose Bay. Rhodes-Smith, Cecil, 261 George-street, Sydney. Rickwood, Frank Kenneth, Lecturer in Geology, The University of Sydney. Ritchie, Arthur Sinclair, a.s.t.c., Lecturer in Mineralogy and Geology, New- castle Technical College; p.r. 188 St. James-road, New Lambton, N.S.W. Ritchie, Bruce, B.Sc. (Hons.), c/o Pyco Products Pty. Ltd., 576 Parramatta- road, Petersham. Ritchie, Ernest, m.sc., Senior Lecturer, Chemistry Department, University of Sydney, Sydney. Robbins, Elizabeth Marie (Mrs.), M.sc., 344 Railway-parade, Guildford. Roberts, Richard George Crafter, Electrical Engineer, c/o C. W. Stirling & Co., Asbestos House, York and Barrack-streets, Sydney. Robertson, Rutherford Ness, B.sc. Syd., Ph.D. Cantab., Senior Plant Physiologist, C.8.I.R.O., Division of Food Preservation, Private Bag, P.O., Homebush ; p.r. Flat 4, 43 Johnston-street, Annandale. Robertson, William Humphrey, B.sc., Astronomer, Sydney Observatory, Sydney. Room, Thomas G., M.A., F.R.S., Professor of Mathematics in the University of Sydney. Rosenbaum, Sidney, 23 Strickland-avenue, Lindfield. Rosenthal-Schneider, Ilse, Ph.p., 48 Cambridge-avenue, Vaucluse. Ross, Jean Elizabeth, B.sc., Dip.Ed., 5 Stanton-road, Haberfield. Ross, Leonard Paul, s.se., 137 Burwood-road, Enfield. Rountree, Phyllis Margaret, D.sc. Melb., Dip.Bact. Lond., Royal Prince Alfred Hospital, Sydney. Sampson, Aileen (Mrs.), Sc.Dip. (A.S.T.C., 1944), 9 Knox-avenue, Epping. Scammell, Rupert Boswood, B.Sc. Syd., A.R.A.C.1., F.C.S., c/o F. H. Faulding & Co. Ltd., 98 Castlereagh-street, Redfern; p.r. 10 Buena Vista-avenue, Clifton Gardens. Schafer, Harry Neil Scott, B.sc., 18 Bartlett-street, Summer Hill. Scott, Beryl (Miss), B.sc., Geology Department, University of Tasmania. Scott, Reginald Henry, B.sc., 3 Walbundry-avenue, East Kew, Victoria. Searl, Robert Alexander, B.Sc., Geologist, c/o Bureau of Mineral Resources, Canberra, A.C.T. See, Graeme Thomas, Analytical Chemist, 2 Skipton Flats, corner Mount and Dudley-streets, Coogee. Elected. 1933 1936 1950 1948 1938 1936 1948 1945 1945 1948 1943 1950 1933 1940 1947 1919 1949 1916 1914 1948 1900 1942 1916 1918 1919 1920 1941 1948 1915 1944 1946 1946 1919 Pp P Xiil | Selby, Esmond Jacob, Dip.com., Sales Manager, Box 175 D, G.P.O., Sydney. Sellenger, Brother Albertus, St. Ildephonsus College, New Norcia, W.A. Sergeyeff, William Peter, Mining Geologist and Engineer, 92 Herbert-street, Rockdale. tSharp, Kenneth Raeburn, c/o §8.M.H.E.A., Cooma, N.S.W. Sheahan, Thomas Henry Kennedy, B.sc., Chemist, c/o Shell Co. of Aust., North Terrace, Adelaide. Sherrard, Kathleen Margaret Maria (Mrs.), m.sc. Melb., 43 Robertson-road, Centennial Park. Sherwood, Ian Russell, D.sc., F.R.A.C.I., Research Bacteriologist, Research Laboratory, Colonial Sugar Refining Co. Ltd., John-street, Pyrmont. Shulman, Albert, B.sc., Industrial Chemist, Flat 2, Linden Court, Linden- avenue, Woollahra. Simmons, Lewis Michael, B.sc. (Hons.) Lond., ph.p. Lond., F.R.A.C.1., Head of Science Department, Scots College; p.r. The Scots College, Victoria-road, Bellevue Hill. Simonett, David Stanley, B.sc., Geography Department, The University of Sydney; p.r. 14 Selwyn-street, Artarmon. Simpson, John Kenneth Moore, Industrial Chemist, “‘ Browie,’? Old Castle Hill-road, Castle Hull. Sims, Kenneth Patrick, B.sc., 13 Onyx-road, Artarmon. Slade, George Hermon, B.Ssc., Director, W. Hermon Slade & Co. Pty. Ltd., Manufacturing Chemists, Mandemar-avenue, Homebush; p.r. ‘‘ Raiatea,”’ Oyama-avenue, Manly. Smith, Eric Brian Jeffcoat, 1 Rocklands-road, Wollstonecraft. Smith-White, William Broderick, m.a. Cantab., B.sc. Syd., Department of Mathematics, University of Sydney ; p.r. 28 Cranbrook-avenue, Cremorne. Southee, Ethelbert Ambrook, 0.B.E., M.A., B.Sc., B.Sc.Agr., Principal, Hawkes- bury Agricultural College, Richmond, N.S.W. Stanton, Richard Limon, B.sc., Teaching Fellow in Geology, The University of Sydney, Sydney ; p.r. 42 Hopetoun-avenue, Mosman. tStephen, Alfred Ernest, F.c.s., c/o Box 1158 HH, G.P.O., Sydney. tStephens, Frederick G. N., F.R.c.S., M.B., Ch.M., 135 Macquarie-street, Sydney ; p.r. Captain Piper’s-road and New South Head-road, Vaucluse. Stevens, Neville Cecil, B.sc., Geology Department, The University of Sydney ; p.r. 12 Salisbury-street, Hurstville. tStewart, J. Douglas, B.v.sc., F.R.c.v.s., Emeritus Professor of Veterinary Science in the University of Sydney; p.r. “ Berelle,’> Homebush-road, Strathfield. (President, 1927.) Still, Jack Leslie, B.sc., Ph.D., Professor of Biochemistry, The University of Sydney, Sydney. tStone, Walter George, F.S.T.C., F.R.A.C.1I., Chief Analyst, Department of Mines, Sydney; p.r. 26 Rosslyn-street, Bellevue Hill. tSullivan, Herbert Jay, Director in Charge of Research and Technical Depart- ment, c/o Lewis Berger & Sons (Australia) Ltd., Rhodes; Box 23, P.O., Burwood; p.r. “ Stonycroft,’’ 10 Redmyre-road, Strathfield. tSutherland, George Fife, a.r.c.sc. Lond., 47 Clanwilliam-street, Chatswood. Sutton, Harvey, 0.B.E., M.D., D.P.H. Melb., B.sc. Oxon., Professor of Preventive Medicine and Director, School of Public Health and Tropical Medicine, University of Sydney ; p.r. “‘ Lynton,” 27 Kent-road, Rose Bay. Swanson, Thomas Baikie, m.sc. Adel., c/o Technical Service Department, Icianz, Box 1911, G.P.O., Melbourne, Victoria. Swinbourne, Ellice Simmons, Organic Chemist, A.S.T.C., A.R.A.C.1., 1 Raglan- street, Manly. tTaylor, Brigadier Harold B., M.c., D.Sc., F.R.1.C., F.R.A.C.1., Government Analyst, Department of Public Health, 93 Macquarie-street, Sydney; p.r. 12 Wood-street, Manly. | Thomas, Andrew David, Squadron Leader, R.A.A.F., M.sc., A.Inst.P., 26 Darebin-street, Heidelberg, N.22, Victoria. | Thomas, Ifor Morris, m.sc., Department of Zoology, University of Adelaide, Adelaide, S.A. | Thompson, Nora (Mrs.), B.Sc. Syd., c/o Australasian Petroleum Coy., Port Moresby, Papua. | Thorne, Harold Henry, m.a. Cantab., B.sc. Syd., F.R.A.S., Lecturer in Mathe- matics in the University of Sydney; p.r. 55 Railway-crescent, Beecroft. X1V Elected. 1935 1923 1940 1949 1943 1949 1921 1935 1933 1903 1948 1943 1919 1950 1913 1944 1919 1919 1944 1911 192] 1947 1947 1949 1946 1943 1949 1949 1945 1943 1940 1936 1906 1916 1946 1950 1948 Pig PEO Plo PZ P 5 1 7 Pt Pe P 12 Tommerup, Eric Christian, M.sc., A.R.A.C.I., Queensland Agricultural College, Lawes, via Brisbane, Queensland. Toppin, Richmond Douglas, a.R.1.c., 51 Crystal-street, Petersham. Tow, Aubrey James, M.sc., No. 5, “* Werrington,’’ Manion-avenue, Rose Bay. Trebeck, Prosper Charles Brian, A.C.1.s., F.com.A. Hng., F.F.1.A., A.A.A., J.P., Central Australian Hotel, Bourke. Turner, Ivan Stewart, M.A., M.Sc., Ph.D., p.r. 120 Awaba-street, Mosman. Vallance, Thomas George, 57 Auburn-street, Sutherland. Vicars, Robert, Marrickville Woollen Mills, Marrickville. Vickery, Joyce Winifred, M.sc., Botanic Gardens, Sydney; p.r. 17 The Promenade, Cheltenham. Voisey, Alan Heywood, pD.sc., Lecturer in Geology and Geography, New England University College, Armidale. tVonwiller, Oscar U., B.Sc., F.Inst.P., Emeritus Professor of Physics in the University of Sydney; p.r. ‘“‘ Withington,” Castle Hill-road, Castle Hill. (President, 1930.) Walker, Donald Francis, Surveyor, 13 Beauchamp-avenue, Chatswood. Walker, James Foote, Company Secretary, 11 Brucedale-avenue, Epping. Walkom, Arthur Bache, D.sc., Director, Australian Museum, Sydney; p.r. 45 Nelson-road, Killara. (Member from 1910-1913. President, 1943-44.) Warburton, William Kingston, B.sc., Research Officer, McMaster Laboratory, Glebe. tWardlaw, Hy. Sloane Halcro, D.sc. Syd., F.R.A.C.1., c/o Kanematsu Institute, Sydney Hospital, Macquarie Street, Sydney. (President, 1939.) Warner, Harry, A.Ss.T.c., Chemist, 6 Knibbs-street, Turner, Canberra, A.C.T. Waterhouse, Lionel Lawry, B.E. Syd., ‘‘ Rarotonga,’ 42 Archer-street, Chats- wood. Waterhouse, Walter L., M.c., D.Sc.Agr., D.I.C., F.L.S., Research Professor of Agriculture, University of Sydney; p.r. “‘ Hazelmere,’’ Chelmsford-avenue, Lindfield. (President, 1937.) Watkins, William Hamilton, B.sc., Industrial Chemist. tWatt, Robert Dickie, M.a., B.Sc., Gladswood House, Gladswood Gardens, Double Bay. Watts, Arthur Spencer, “‘Araboonoo’’, Glebe-street, Randwick. Webb, Gordon Keyes, A.F.1.A., A.C.1.S., Accountant, c/o Max Wurcker (1930) Pty. Ltd., 99 York-street, Sydney. Werner, Ronald Louis, Industrial Chemist, 25 Dine-street, Randwick. Westheimer, Gerald, B.Sc., F.S.T.C., F.1.0., Optometrist, 727 George-street, Sydney. Weston, Margaret Crowley, B.A., 41 Bulkara-road, Bellevue Hill. Whiteman, Reginald John Nelson, M.B., Ch.M., F.R.A.C.S., 143 Macquarie-street, Sydney. Williams, Benjamin, A.s.T.c., 97 McMichael-street, Maryville, N.S.W. Williamson, William Harold, Hughes-avenue, Ermington. Willis, Jack Lehane, B.sc., Flat 5, “‘ Narooma’’, Hampden-street, North Sydney. Winch, Leonard, B.sc., 26 Boonah-street, Griffith, N.S.W. Wogan, Samuel James, Range-road, Sarina, North Queensland. Wood, Harley Weston, M.Sc., A.Inst.P., F.R.A.S., Government Astronomer, Sydney Observatory, Sydney. (President, 1949.) tWoolnough, Walter George, D.sc., F.G.S., c/o Mr. W. L. Woolnough, “ Calla- bonna ’’, & Park-avenue, Gordon. tWright, George, Company Director, c/o Hector Allen, Son & Morrison, 7 Wynyard-street, Sydney ; p.r. 22 Albert-street, Edgecliff. Wyndham, Norman Richard, m.D., m.s. (Syd.), F.R.c.S. (Hng.), F.R.A.C.S., Surgeon, 225 Macquarie-street, Sydney. Zehnder, John Oscar, B.sc., Geologist, c/o Australasian Petroleum Coy., Port Moresby, Papua. Zingel, Judith, B.sc., 68 Upper-street, Bega, 7C. Blected. 1949 1951 1949 1914 1946 1915 1912 1948 1948 1946 XV Honorary MEMBERS. Limited to Twenty. Burnet, Frank Macfarlane, M.D., Ph.D., F.R.Ss., Director of the Walter and Eliza Hall Research Institute, Melbourne. Fairley, Sir Neil Hamilton, 0.B.E., M.D., D.Sc., F.R.S., 73 Harley-street, London, W.1. Florey, Sir Howard, M.B., B.S., B.Sc., M.A., Ph.D., F.R.S., Professor of Pathology, Oxford University, England. Hill, James P., pD.sc., F.R.S., Professor of Zoology, University College, Gower- street. London, W.C.1, England. Jones, Sir Harold Spencer, M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S.. Astronomer Royal, Royal Observatory, Greenwich, London, 8.E.10. Maitland, Andrew Gibb, r.a.s., ‘‘Bon Accord,” 28 Melville-terrace, South Perth, W.A. Martin, Sir Charles J., C.M.G., D.Sc., F.R.S., Roebuck House, Old Chesterton, Cambridge, Engiand. Oliphant, Marcus L., B.sSc., Ph.D., F.R.S., Professor of Physics, The University, Edgbaston, Birmingham 15, England. Robinson, Sir Robert, M.A., D.Sc., F.C.S., F.I.C., F.R.S., Professor of Chemistry, Oxford University, England. Wood-Jones, F., D.Sc., M.B., B.S., F.R.C.S., L.R.C.P. (Lond.), F.R.S., F.Z.S., Professor of Anatomy, University of Manchester, England. OBITUARY, 1950-51. 1913 Richard W. Challinor. 1913 William M. Doherty. 1949 Frank W. Follett. 1905 Mark Foy. 1920 Albert Sherbourne Le Souef. 1942 Arthur S. Lippmann. 1950 George Millar. 1921 Gustavus A. Waterhouse. 1928 Frederick A. Wiesener. THE REV. W. B. CLARKE MEMORIAL FUND. The Rev. W. B. Clarke Memoriai Fund was inaugurated at a meeting of the Royal Society of N.S.W. in August, 1878, soon after the death of Mr. Clarke, who for nearly forty years rendered distinguished service to his adopted country, Australia, and to science in general. It was resolved to give an opportunity to the general public to express their appreciation of the character and services of the Rev. W. B. Clarke “‘ as a learned colonist, a faithful minister of religion, and an eminent scientific man.’ It was proposed that the memorial should take the form of lectures on Geology (to be known as the Clarke Memorial Lectures), which were to be free to the public, and of a medal to be given from time to time for distinguished work in the Natural Sciences done in or on the Australian Commonwealth and its territories; the person to whom the award is made may be resident in the Australian Commonwealth or its territories, or elsewhere. The Clarke Memorial Medal was established first, and later, as funds permitted. the Clarke Memorial Lectures have been given at intervals. CLARKE MEMORIAL LECTURES. Delivered. 1906. ‘“‘The Volcanoes of Victoria,’ and “‘The Origin of Dolomite’’ (two lectures). By Professor E. W. Skeats, D.Sc., F.G.S. 1907. ‘‘ Geography of Australia in the Permo-Carboniferous Period’”’ (two lectures). By Professor T. W. E. David, B.A., F.R.S. “The Geological Relations of Oceania.””> By W. G. Woolnough, D.Sc. ‘** Problems of the Artesian Water Supply of Australia.”” By E. F. Pittman, A.R.S.M. ““The Permo-Carboniferous Flora and Fauna and their Relations.” By W. 8S. Dun. 1918. ‘“ Brain Growth, Education, and Social Inefficiency.” By Professor R. J. A. Berry, M.D., F.R.S.E. 1919. ‘* Geology at the Western Front,” By Professor T. W. E. David, C.M.G., D.S.O., F.R.S. 1936. ‘‘ The Aeroplane in the Service of Geology.” By W. G. Woolnough, D.Se. (THs JOURN., 1936, 70, 39.) 1937. ‘* Some Problems of the Great Barrier Reef.’’ By Professor H. C. Richards, D.Sc. (THs JOURN., 1937, 71, 68.) 1938. ‘‘The Simpson Desert and its Borders.”” By C. T. Madigan, M.A., B.Se., B.E., D.Sc. (Oxon.). (THis Journ., 1938, 72, 503.) 1939. ‘‘ Pioneers of British Geology.’ By Sir John §S. Flett, K.B.E., D.Sc., LL.D., F.R.S. (Tu1s Journ., 1939, 73, 41.) 1940. ‘‘The Geologist and Sub-surface Water.” By E. J. Kenny, M.Aust.I1.M.M. (THIS JourRNn., 1940, 74, 283.) 1941. ‘‘ The Climate of Australia in Past Ages.”” By C. A. Sussmilch, F.G.S. (THis JourRn., 1941, 75, 47.) 1942. ‘‘ The Heroic Period of Geological Work in Australia.’’ By E. C. Andrews, B.Sc. 1943. ‘‘ Australia’s Mineral Industry in the Present War.” By H. G. Raggatt, D.Sc. 1944, ‘‘ An Australian Geologist Looks at the Pacific.” By W. H. Bryan, M.C., D.Sc. 1945. ‘‘ Some Aspects of the Tectonics of Australia.’’ By Professor E. 8. Hills, D.Sc., Ph.D. 1946. ‘‘ The Pulse of the Pacific.”” By Professor L. A. Cotton, M.A., D.Sc. 1947. ‘‘ The Teachers of Geology in Australian Universities.”” By Professor H. S. Summers, D.Se. 1948. ‘* The Sedimentary Succession of the Bibliando Dome: Record of a Prolonger Proterozoic Ice Age.”? By Sir Douglas Mawson, O.B.E., F.R.S., D.Sc., B.E. 1949. ‘‘ Metallogenetic Epochs and Ore Regions in Australia.”” By W. R. Browne, D.Sc. | 1950. ‘‘ The Cambrian Period in Australia.”” By F. W. Whitehouse, Ph.D., D.Sc. AWARDS OF THE CLARKE MEDAL. Established in memory of The Revd. WILLIAM BRANWHITE CLARKE, M.a., F.R.S., F.G.S., etc. Vice-President from 1866 to 1878. The prefix * indicates the decease of the recipient. Awarded. 1878 *Professor Sir Richard Owen, K.C.B., F.R.S. 1879 *George Bentham, c.M.G., F.R.S. 1880 *Professor Thos. Huxley, F.R.s. 1881 *Professor F. M’Coy, F.R.S., F.G.S. 1882 “Professor James Dwight Dana, LL.D. xvi Awarded. 1883 1884 1885 1886 1887 1888 1889 1890 1891 1892 1893 1895 1895 1896 1900 1901 1902 1903 1907 1909 1912 1914 1915 1917 1918 1920 1921 1922 1923 1924 1925 1927 1928 1929 1930 1931 1932 1933 1934 1935 1936 1937 1938 1939 194] 1942 1943 1944 1945 1946 1947 1948 1949 1950 *Baron Ferdinand von Mueller, K.C.M.G., M.D., Ph.D., F.R.S., F.L.S. *Alfred R. C. Selwyn, LL.D., F.R.S., F.G.S. *Sir Joseph Dalton Hooker, 0.M., G.C.s.1., C.B., M.D., D.C.L., LL.D., F.R.S. *Professor L. G. De Koninck, m.p. *Sir James Hector, K.C.M.G., M.D., F.R.S. *Rev. Julian E. Tenison-Woods, F.G.S., F.L.S. *Robert Lewis John Ellery, F.R.S., F.R.A.S. *George Bennett, M.D., F.R.c.Ss. Eng., F.L.S., F.Z.S. *Captain Frederick Wollaston Hutton, F.R.S., F.G.S. *Sir William Turner Thiselton Dyer, K.C.M.G., C.I.E., M.A., LL.D., Sc.D., F.R.S., F.L.S. *Professor Ralph Tate, F.L.s., F.G.S. *Robert Logan Jack, LL.D., F.G.S., F.R.G.S. *Robert Etheridge, Jnr. *The Hon. Augustus Charles Gregory, C.M.G., F.R.G.S. *Sir John Murray, K.C.B., LL.D., Sc.D., F.R.S. *Kdward John Eyre. *F, Manson Bailey, C.M.G., F.L.S. *Alfred William Howitt, pD.sc., F.G.S. *Professor Walter Howchin, F.c.s., University of Adelaide. *Dr. Walter E. Roth, B.a. *W. H. Twelvetrees, F.G.s. Sir A. Smith Woodward, LL.D., F.R.Ss., Keeper of Geology, British Museum (Natural History), London. *Professor W. A. Haswell, M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S. *Professor Sir Edgeworth David, K.B.E., C.M.G., D.S.0., M.A., SC.D., D.Sc., F.R.S., F.G.S. *Leonard Rodway, c.M.a., Honorary Government Botanist, Hobart, Tasmania. *Joseph Edmund Carne, F.G.S. *Joseph James Fletcher, M.A., B.Sc. *Richard Thomas Baker, The Crescent, Cheltenham. *Sir W. Baldwin Spencer, K.C.M.G., M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S. *Joseph Henry Maiden, 1.8.0., F.R.S., F.L.S., J.P. *Charles Hedley, F.L.s. Andrew Gibb Maitland, F.a.s., ‘‘ Bon Accord,’’ 28 Melville Terrace, South Perth, W.A. *Ernest C. Andrews, B.A., F.G.S., 32 Benelong Crescent, Bellevue Hill. Professor Ernest Willington Skeats, D.Sc., A.R.C.S., F.G.S., University of Melbourne, Carlton, Victoria. L. Keith Ward, B.A., B.E., D.Sc., Government Geologist, Geological Survey Office, Adelaide. *Robin John Tillyard, M.A., D.Sc., Sc.D., F.R.S., F.L.S., F.E.S., Canberra, F.C.T. *Frederick Chapman, A.L.S., F.R.S.N.Z., F.G.S., Melbourne. Walter George Woolnough, D.sc., F.c.s., Department of the Interior, Canberra, F.C.T. *Edward Sydney Simpson, D.sc., B.E., F.A.C.1., Carlingford, Mill Point, South Perth, W.A. *George William Card, s.R.s.M., 16 Ramsay-street, Collaroy, N.S.W. Sir Douglas Mawson, Kt., 0.B.E., F.R.S., D.Sc., B.E., University of Adelaide. J. T. Jutson, B.sc., Lu.B., 9 Ivanhoe-parade, Ivanhoe, Victoria. *Professor H. C. Richards, D.sc., The University of Queensland, Brisbane. *C. A. Sussmilch, F.a.s., F.S.T.c., 11 Appian Way, Burwood, N.S.W. Professor Frederic Wood Jones, M.B., B.S., D.Sc., F.R.S., Anatomy Department, University of Manchester, England. William Rowan Browne, D.sc., Reader in Geology, The University of Sydney, N.S.W. Walter Lawry Waterhouse, M.C., D.Sc.Agric., D.I.C., F.L.S., Reader in Agriculture, University of Sydney. Professor Wilfred Eade Agar, 0.B.E., M.A. D.Sc , F.R.S., University of Melbourne, Carlton, Victoria. Professor William Noel Benson. B.A., D.Sc., F.G.S., F.R.G.S., F.R.S.N.Z., F.G.S.Am., University of Otago, Dunedin, N.Z. Black, J. M., a.t.s. (honoris causa), Adelaide, S.A. *Hubert Lyman Clark, a.B. D.sc., Ph.p., Hancock Foundation, v.s.c., Los Angeles, California. Walkom, Arthur Bache, pD.sc., Director, Australian Museum, Sydney. Rupp, Rev. H. Montague, 24 Kameruka-road, Northbridge. Mackerras, Ian Murray, B.Sc., M.B., Ch.M., The Queensland Institute of Medical Research, Brisbane. XViii AWARDS OF THE JAMES COOK MEDAL. Bronze Medal. Awarded annually for outstanding contributions to science and human welfare in and for the Southern Hemisphere. 1947 Smuts, Field-Marshal The Rt. Hon. J. C., P.c., C.H., K.C., D.T.D., LL.D., F.R.S., Chancellor, University of Capetown, South Africa. 1948 Houssay, Bernado A., Professor of Physiology, Instituto de Biologia y Medicina Ex- perimental, Buenos Aires, Argentina. 1949 No award made. 1950 ~=—s- Fairley, Sir Neil Hamilton, c.B.z., M.D., D.Sc., F.R.S., 73 Harley-street, London, W.1. / AWARDS OF THE EDGEWORTH DAVID MEDAL. Bronze Medal. Awarded annually for Australian research workers under the age of thirty-five years, for work done mainly in Australia or its territories or contributing to the advancement of Australian Science. 1948 Giovanelli, R. G., M.sce., Division of Physics, National Standards Laboratory, ’ Sydney. Joint Ritchie, Ernest, m.sc., University of Sydney, Sydney. Award. 1949 Kiely, Temple B., D.Sc.agr., Caroline-street, Kast Gosford. 1950 Berndt, Ronald M., B.A., Dip.anthr., University of Sydney. Joint Berndt, Catherine H., M.A., Dip.Anthr., University of Sydney. } Award. AWARDS OF THE SOCIETY’S MEDAL AND MONEY PRIZE. Money Prize of £25. Awarded. 1882 John Fraser, 8.4., West Maitland, for paper entitled ‘“‘ The Aborigines of New South Wales.” 1882 .Andrew Ross, m.D., Molong, for paper entitled ‘“‘ Influence of the Australian climate and pastures upon the growth of wool.” The Society’s Bronze Medal. 1884 W. E. Abbott, Wingen, for paper entitled ‘‘ Water supply in the Interior of New South Wales.” 1886 S. H. Cox, F.a.s., F.c.s., Sydney, for paper entitled “The Tin deposits of New South Wales.”’ 1887 Jonathan Seaver, ¥F.G.s., Sydney, for paper entitled ‘“‘ Origin and mode of occurrence of gold-bearing veins and of the associated Minerals.” 1888 Rev. J. E. Tenison-Woods, F.G.S., F.L.S., Sydney, for paper entitled ‘““ The Anatomy and Life-history of Mollusca peculiar to Australia.” , 1889 ‘Thomas Whitelegge, F.R.M.s., Sydney, for paper entitled ‘‘ List of the Marine and Fresh- water Invertebrate Fauna of Port Jackson and Neighbourhood.” 1889 Rev. John Mathew, m.a., Coburg, Victoria, for paper entitled ‘‘ The Australian Aborigines.” 1891 Rev. J. Milne Curran, F.a.s., Sydney, for paper entitled ‘“‘ The Microscopic Structure of Australian Rocks.”’ 1892 Alexander G. Hamilton, Public School, Mount Kembla, for paper entitled ‘‘ The effect which settlement in Australia has produced upon Indigenous Vegetation.”’ 1894 J. V. De Coque, Sydney, for paper entitled the “‘ Timbers of New South Wales.” 1894 R. H. Mathews, L.s., Parramatta, for paper entitled ‘‘ The Aboriginal Rock Carvings and Paintings in New South Wales.” 1895 C. J. Martin, D.sc., M.B., F.R.S., Sydney, for paper entitled ‘‘ The physiological action of the venom of the Australian black snake (Pseudechis porphyriacus).”’ 1896 Rev. J. Milne Curran, Sydney, for paper entitled ‘* The occurrence of Precious Stones in New South Wales, with a description of the Deposits in which they are found.” 1943 Edwin Cheel, Sydney, in recognition of his contributions in the field of botanical research and to the advancement of science in general. 1948 Waterhouse, Walter L., M.s., D.Sc.Agr., D.I.C., F.L.S., Sydney, in recognition of his valuable contributions in the field of agricultural research. 1949 Elkin, Adolphus P., m.a., ph.p., Sydney, in recognition of his valuable contributions in the field of Anthropological Science. 1950 Vonwiller, Oscar U., B.Sc., F.Inst.P., Sydney, in recognition of his valuable contributions in the field of Physical Science. x1x AWARDS OF THE WALTER BURFEITT PRIZE. Bronze Medal and Money Prize of £75. Established as the result of a generous gift to the Society by Dr. W. F. Burrirt, B.A., M.B., Ch.M., B.Sc., of Sydney, which was augmented later by a gift from Mrs. W. F. Burrirr. Awarded at intervals of three years to the worker in pure and applied science, resident in Australia or New Zealand, whose papers and other contributions published during the past six years are deemed of the highest scientific merit, account being taken only of investigations described for the first time, and carried out by the author mainly in these Dominions. Awarded. 1929 Norman Dawson Royle, M.D., ch.m., 185 Macquarie Street, Sydney. 1932 Charles Halliby Kellaway, M.c., M.D., M.S., F.R.C.P., The Walter and Eliza Hall Institute of Research in Pathology and Medicine, Melbourne. 1935 Victor Albert Bailey, M.a., D.Phil., Associate-Professor of Physics, University of Sydney. 1938 Frank Macfarlane Burnet, m.p. (Melb.), Ph.D. (Lond.), The Walter and Eliza Hall Institute of Research in Pathology and Medicine, Melbourne. 1941 Frederick William Whitehouse, D.sc., Ph.D., University of Queensland, Brisbane. 1944 Hereward Leighton Kesteven, D.Sc., M.D., c/o Allied Works Council, Melbourne. 1947 John Conrad Jaeger, M.A., D.Sc., University of Tasmania, Hobart. 1950 Martyn, David F., pD.sc. (Lond.), F.R.S., Radio Research Board, c/o Commonwealth Observatory, Mount Stromlo, Canberra, A.C.T. AWARDS OF LIVERSIDGE RESEARCH LECTURESHIP. This Lectureship was established in accordance with the terms of a bequest to the Society by the late Professor Archibald Liversidge. Awarded at intervals of two years, for the purpose of encouragement of research in Chemistry. (THis JOURNAL, Vol. LXII, pp. x-xiii, 1928.) Awarded. 1931 Harry Hey, c/o The Electrolytic Zinc Company of Australasia, Ltd., Collins Street, Melbourne. 1933. W. J. Young, D.sc., M.sc., University of Melbourne. 1940 G. J. Burrows, B.sc., University of Sydney. 1942 J.8S. Anderson, B.Sc., Ph.D. (Lond.), A.R.C.S., D.I.C., University of Melbourne. 1944 FF. P. Bowden, Ph.D., Sc.D., University of Cambridge, Cambridge, England. 1946 Briggs, L. H., D.Phil. (Oxon.), D.Sc. (N.Z.), F.N.Z.1.C., F.R.S.N.Z., Auckland University College, Auckland, N.Z. 1948 Ian Lauder, M.sc., Ph.D., University of Queensland, Brisbane. 1950 Hedley R. Marston, F.R.S., C.S.I.R.O., Adelaide. BB Royal Society of New South Wales REPORT OF THE COUNCIL FOR THE YEAR ENDING 3lst MARCH, 1951. PRESENTED AT THE ANNUAL AND GENERAL MONTHLY MEETING OF THE SOCIETY, 4TH APRIL, 1951 (RULE XXVI). The membership of the Society at the end of the period under review stood at 369, an increase of eight. Twenty-nine new members were elected during the year. However, 11 members were lost by resignation, and one, who was in arrears with his subscription, was removed from the register. Nine members have been lost to the Society by death since Ist April, 1950: Richard W. Challinor (1913). William M. Doherty (1913). Frank W. Follett (1949). Mark Foy (1905). Albert Sherbourne Le: Souef (1920). Arthur 8. Lippmann (1942). George Millar (1950). ~ Gustavus A. Waterhouse (1921). Frederick A. Wiesener (1928). During the year nine General Monthly Meetings were held, at which the average attendance was thirty. Thirty-one papers were accepted for reading and publication by the Society, thirteen papers less than the previous year. The following Exhibits were discussed on dates as under: 3rd May : ‘* Demonstration of the Bourdillon Air Sampler ’’, by Dr. P. M. Rountree. 6th September : ‘* Demonstration of Coal Dust Inflammability Apparatus ”’, by Mr. H. A. J. Donegan. ‘* Demonstration of Stresses Produced by Shearing Viscous Liquids ’’, by Dr. R. C. L. Bosworth. 6th December : ‘“Manila Hemp ”’, by Dr. C. J. Magee. At the meeting held on the 2nd August, the film ‘‘ Clouds and their Formation ’’ was shown. This had been made possible by the kindness of Dr. E. B. Kraus, who also presented a splendid commentary. In thanking Dr. Kraus for the loan of this interesting film, the Chairman moved a vote of thanks to Captain Silcock and Lieutenant Simpson for having made available the necessary equipment for the screening of the film, and to Sergeant Brown for his valuable assistance on this occasion. The meeting devoted to the commemoration of great scientists was held on the 4th October, at which the following addresses were given : ‘“* Descartes ’’, by Mr. W. B. Smith-White. ““Gay Lussac’’, by Dr. D. P. Mellor. “WW. M. Davis’, by Dr. W. R. Browne. At the meeting held on the lst November, the President welcomed members and their friends to the Conversazione. The evening was devoted to Exhibits and Films of Scientific Interest. This programme had been made possible through the courtesy of the following : The Australian Museum, The Chemistry Department, University of Sydney, The Mining Museum, The Museum of Technology and Applied Science. Lecturettes given during the year were as follows: 3rd May: ‘“‘ Moulds and Mildews’’, by Dr. C. J. Magee. 7th June: ‘‘ Fleece Growth and Problems of Climatic Adaptation in Sheep ”’, by Mr. H. B. Carter. 5th July: ‘‘ Heard Island’’, by Mr. A. J. Lambeth. REPORT OF COUNCIL. Xx Five Popular Science Lectures were delivered during the year and were appreciated by members of the Society and the public : 18th May: ‘‘ Pharmacology in the New Age’’, by Professor R. H. Thorp. 15th June: ‘‘ Clouds and their Formation ’’, by Dr. E. B. Kraus. 17th August: ‘‘ Recent Developments in Town and Country Planning ’’, by Professor D. Winston. 21st September: ‘ Coal’’, by Professor C. E. Marshall. 4th October: ‘‘ Storms on the Sun”’, by Dr. R. G. Giovanelli. The Annual Dinner of the Society was held in the New Bevery of the University Union on the 29th March, 1951. There were present 60 members and friends. The Council of the Society held eleven ordinary meetings during the year, at which the average attendance was eight. On Science House Management Committee the Society was represented by Messrs. H. O. Fletcher and F. R. Morrison, with substitute representatives Dr. R. L. Aston and Mr. H. H. Thorne. On Science House Extension Committee the Society was represented by Drs. R. L. Aston and A. Bolliger. The Clarke Memorial Lecture for 1950 was delivered by Dr. F. W. Whitehouse on the 20th July, the title being ‘“‘ The Cambrian Period in Australia ’’. The Liversidge Research Lecture for 1950 was delivered by Mr. Hedley R. Marston, F.R.S., on the 15th November, and was entitled ‘‘ Energy Transactions in Homeothermic Animals ’’. The Clarke Memorial Medal for 1951 was awarded to Dr. Frank Leslie Stillwell of Melbourne for outstanding petrological and mineralogical research. The Walter Burfitt Prize for 1950 was awarded to Dr. David F. Martyn, F.R.S., Radio Research Board, for outstanding contributions in the field of Ionospheric Research. The Medal of the Royal Society of New South Wales for 1950 was awarded to Professor O. U. Vonwiller in recognition of his valuable contributions in the field of physical science. The Edgeworth David Medal for 1950 was awarded to Ronald M. Berndt conjointly with Catherine H. Berndt in recognition of the outstanding contributions made by them in the field of anthropological science. The James Cook Medal for 1950 was awarded to Sir Neil Hamilton Fairley in recognition of his work on malaria. On the 8th December the President and members of Council entertained at afternoon tea Professor Dirk Brouwer, Director of Yale University Observatory, on the occasion of his visit to this city. The financial position of the Society, as disclosed by the Annual Audit, is not a satisfactory one. The deficit which was £436 in 1949-50 has now grown to £687. To meet heavy current expenses the Hon. Treasurer has been forced to sell Treasury Bonds amounting to £1,000. By far the most serious drain on the Society’s finances comes from the rapidly mounting costs of printing the Society’s Journal and Proceedings. In spite of the fact that the Council accepted thirteen papers fewer this year, the cost of the Journal was £921. This represents approximately a 30% increase in the cost per page on the last Journal (44 papers at a cost of £1,001). A small portion of this cost will, it is true, ultimately be offset by a grant obtained from the Commonwealth Scientific Publications Committee towards the cost of printing two valuable papers. However, this does not represent the total cost to the Society of the printing of the Journal, as this year an additional sum of £140 was spent on reprints as against a sum of £23 for the previous year. The outgoing Council desires particularly to draw the attention of the new Council and of members in general to this serious state which has arisen in connection with the financing of the Journal. A recent advice from the printer informs us that the unit cost—already 167% above the 1940 cost—rose further from £2 per page to £2 15s. per page—a further 37-5% increase. While a thorough examination and vigorous exploitation of other possible sources of revenue—of publication grants, publication fees, assistance from outside bodies ultimately to benefit from the information published in our Journal, etc.—may do much to help, it appears that economies are imperative and some form of restriction on publication expenses must be contemplated. The Society has published its first Monograph, entitled ‘‘ The Structural Evolution of the Hunter-Manning-Myall Province, New South Wales’, by G. D. Osborne, D.Sc. The Society’s share of the profits from Science House for the year was £450, an increase of £50 on the previous year. The grant of the Government of New South Wales has been received. The continued interest of the Government in the work of the Society is much appreciated. xxii REPORT OF COUNCIL. The Library. The amount of £77 3s. 9d. has been spent on the purchase of periodicals, and £33 17s. on binding. Extra shelving was placed in the library during the year, the cost of this being £46 Os. 10d. Exchange of publications is maintained with 420 societies and institutions, an increase of 21 over the previous year. The number of accessions entered in the catalogue during the year ended 28th February, 1951, was 2,718 parts of periodicals. The number of books, periodicals, etc., borrowed by members, institutions and accredited readers was 252. Among the institutions which made use of the library through the inter-library borrowing scheme were: Commonwealth Observatory, Taubmans Ltd., McMaster Laboratories, Fisher Library, Plant Industry and Entomological Laboratories, Waite Agricultural Research Institute, National Standards Laboratories, Melbourne University, Snowy Mountains Hydro-Electric Authority, Colonial Sugar Refining Co. Ltd., Elliotts and Australian Drug Co., Adelaide Uni- versity, Sydney Technical College, Timbrol Ltd., School of Public Health and Tropical Medicine Museum of Applied Arts and Sciences, C.S.I.R.O. Fisheries, Institution of Engineers, University of Tasmania, Food Preservation Laboratories, Sydney Hospital, Australian Paper Manufacturers, Water Conservation and Irrigation Commission, Department of Works and Housing, Royal Society of Tasmania, Public Library of Victoria, Forestry Commission of N.S.W. F. R. MORRISON, President. 7,401 25,580 £33,591 11,160 £33,591 BALANCE SHEETS. XXillI THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF NEW SOUTH WALES. BALANCE SHEET AS AT 28th FEBRUARY, 1951. LIABILITIES. 1951. fi 8 a: £ s. d. Accrued Expenses : Ae bs a 274 14 4 Subscriptions Paid in Advance ue ’ 35 14 0 Life Members’ Subscriptions—Amount carried forward 97 16 0 Trust and Monograph Capital Funds one Far Clarke Memorial .. : .. 1,926 2 10 Walter Burfitt Prize ne fv is .. 1,126, 10 11 Liversidge Bequest. . : A ss va, dali 18; 9 Monograph Capital Fund ie us .. 3,733 0 6 —_——————_ 7,507 13 0 ACCUMULATED FUNDS .. ae avs A a 24,886 2 9 Contingent liability (in connection with perpetual leases). £32,802 0 1 ASSETS. 1951 r a 6 £ se d. Cash at Bank and in Hand 633 15 9 Investments—Commonwealth Bonds and Inscribed Stock, etc.—at Face Value— Held for— Clarke Memorial Fund ae Bs os .. 1,800 0 0O Walter Burfitt Prize Fund Le a .. 1,000 0 O Liversidge Bequest .. ns ot sue se 100% 0) (0 Monograph Capital Fund .. dhe as .. 3,000 0 O General Purposes af Ne is ded .. 3,660 0 0 10,160 0 0O Debtors for Subscriptions .. fis Fie ihe 58 6 6 Deduct Reserve for Bad Debts oe ar sis 58 6 6 Science House—One-third Capital Cost .. as Ae 14,835 4 4 Library—At Valuation Le ae ne BH 6,800 0 0O Furniture—At Cost—less Depreciation Bs is us 342 0 0 Pictures—At Cost—less Depreciation ath ws vis 25 0 0 Lantern—At Cost—less Depreciation ee se a 6 0 0 £32,802 0 XXiV BALANCE SHEETS. TRUST AND MONOGRAPH CAPITAL FUNDS. Clarke Walter Burfitt Liversidge Monograph Memorial. Prize. Bequest. Capital Fund. iol Ges PS ne 6 1 go. 8a a By Gus ‘Capital at 28th February, 1950 .. 1,800 0 0 1,000 0 0 700 0 0O 3,000 0 0O Revenue— Balance at 28th February, 1950 157) 90 12 5 33. 5 3 620 3 4 Interest for twelve months “a4 67 12 6 7 us a 26° THOS 112. 87) 2 29413 7 4128 4 8 £45912 6 733 0 6. Deduct Expenditure... wile 98 10 9 P1399 37 13 9 — Balance at 28th February, 1951 .. £126 210 £12610 11 £2118 9 £733 0 6 i ACCUMULATED FUNDS. £ s. d. Balance at 28th February, 1950 i i os 205570. Tenis Less— Increase in reserve for bad debts £0), 191-6 Deficit for twelve months (as shown by Income and Ex- penditure Account) ar sis 686 13 0 Bad Debts written off .. his 6 6 O — 693 8 6 £24,886 2 9 The above Balance Sheet has been prepared from the Books of Account, Accounts and Vouchers of the Royal Society of New South Wales, and is a correct statement of the position of the Society’s affairs on the 28th February, 1951, as disclosed thereby. We have satisfied ourselves that the Society’s Commonwealth Bonds and Inscribed Stock are properly held and registered. HORLEY & HORLEY, Public Accountants. Prudential Building, 39 Martin Place, Sydney, 27th March, 1951. BALANCE SHEETS. XXV INCOME AND EXPENDITURE ACCOUNT. 1st March, 1950, to 28th February, 1951. 1949-50. 1950-51. £ Se sedi Sy (Sod 1,002 To Printing and Binding Journal—Vol. 83 ae Si G20. Lo. 6 520. ,, Salaries’ .. ae ans 578 15 4 Le ee Library—Purchases and Binding uP ze we 199i).8% 7 102. ,, Printing—General : ae aie ote 117 6 10 68 ,, Miscellaneous ae ue we aN “ us 108 13 9 58 ,, Postage and Telegrams .. ae Rae Meliss 32 54 ,, Rent—Science House Management Committee tie 59 4 2 16 ,, Entertainment Expenses se at aw A 4 6 1 ao. Cleaning .. ae cif ae ie Ud es 36 0 O 21 ~+«4, Depreciation wg ee a is ae Bye 20 0 O 15 ,, Telephone .. ue oe Re tats Oe a 2 4 3 24 ~+~«,, Insurance .. ay a a ays a Bs 23 10 9 19 ,, Audit a oN as nee ave a ae 31 10 0O 5 ,, Electricity ce aie a ie ae aif 13: 01 1 13. ,,. Repairs .. ce a Pa as a is 0 1 7 », Reprints— Expenditure es ats i) 639002519 Less Received av ore tye 194 6 9 23 —_——— 140 16 0 ,» Annual Dinner— Expenditure SA Me PMP ESOL. ti], Less Received ee me oe 76 12 6 18 one 2S oe £2,107 £2,365..-2 2: 1949-50. 1950-51. £ Sr seeds 599 By Membership Subscriptions Bus pe for meeting halls only once since pre-war days, whereas maintenance, repairs, cleaning, etc., costs have increased greatly during those years, the fact that the Society’s share of profit was greater than that of the previous year is very eratifying, and a tribute to the work of the Secretary, Mr. N. B. Walker. Thanks are due to those who contributed to the Society’s meetings. Scientific papers reached a high standard, lecturettes, exhibits and films were of particular interest to all present, and furnished evidence of careful preparation and attention on the part of contributors. The Popular Science Lectures were well attended, and the lecturers, who devoted much time and thought to their preparation, deserve the gratitude of members of the public who heard them, and the Society, which sponsored them. Finally, I wish to express appreciation of the cooperation of members who took part in meetings and other activities of the Society during my term of office. THE SCIENCE MUSEUM—ITS DUTIES AND ITS DUES. The appelation ‘‘ Science Museum ”’ is here used to describe the prototype of the Science Museum of South Kensington, London, England, and more specifically the Museum of Applied Arts and Sciences, Sydney, New South Wales, Australia, with which latter institution the speaker has been associated for over 30 years. In this address it is intended to say something of science museums in general and of the present and future outlook of Australian science museums in particular. For a considerable time it has been realized that the ultimate fate of museums and similar educational institutions in Australia will depend on appropriate action to keep them up to date, and thus enable them to perform the functions and fulfil the aims for which they were established. A Museum of Applied Arts and Sciences must keep abreast of the world’s progress and developments in science and its industrial applications, as well as in applied arts and craftsman- ship. Its resources, financial and otherwise, should enable it to illustrate by appropriate exhibits and displays the latest advances in research, as well as ideas and suggestions inspired by such researches. The public, for which the institutions exist, would thus reap the fruits of the world’s knowledge with a minimum of delay. Such an objective is the ideal to which all museums should aspire. The means by which it can be attained are not easy of definition, and the path is beset with many obstacles. These are often very discouraging, ‘especially when hard work and enthusiasm on the part of the personnel concerned are the principal resources of the institution. THE PRESENT POSITION OF SCIENCE MUSEUMS IN AUSTRALIA. It might surprise, and perhaps shock, many people to learn that in spite of maximum effort and enthusiasm our science museums may be in many respects from one to two decades ‘‘ behind the times ’”’ compared with science museums in Europe and North America. The principal obstacle is lack of finance for buildings, equipment and trained personnel. These remarks are not intended as criticism of any authority. It is realized that so far as the individual States of Australia are concerned, it is doubtful if the educational finances could cope with the demands of a modern science museum. It would appear that a common pool of finance should be involved, and the Commonwealth Treasury is the logical source. Perhaps the advent of the Commonwealth Jubilee Celebrations makes the suggestion appropriate in this year of grace 1951. The question might well be asked, Is it essential that a museum strive to attain the objective previously mentioned? If it is apparently serving the needs of the public and no complaints are heard, why press for further aid ? The answer is that if, in spite of continual efforts to keep pace with progress cc 4 F. R. MORRISON. in applied arts and sciences, there is a lag between information received by the institution and its being made available to the public, neither of the parties receives its dues. The museum is aware of its deficiency, while the public may or may not be cognisant of its lack of up-to-date information. With all the goodwill and sympathy of which the States of Australia are: capable, it is perhaps too much to expect, and certainly too much to hope, that finance will be available to conduct science museums in a manner befitting their importance. The cost appears to be one to spread over the resources of the Commonwealth of Australia, and all States should share in the benefits which the Federal Government is able to bestow. Importance of the public service rendered by the museums of the various States should be the deciding factor in the allotment of assistance. The logical authority to make recommendations is a committee, responsible to parliament, consisting of personnel with an intimate knowledge of the obligations and requirements of museums. If constituted on a pattern similar to that of the Standing Commission on Museums and Galleries set up in London in 1931, each institution would have the benefit of careful investigation from time to time into its resources and requirements, and recommendations for assistance would be placed before the appropriate government authority without delay. Impartial judgments would guarantee that the institutions were given assistance in direct proportion to their services to the public. ~ _Dsr,3r,2' D?s* \7,27,2 | 83r,4 ame a)? | RP _ _ BAge? — 4AjAge? —_— Aye? al 2A, : Dr,> Ds®r,r,3 — -D?s* \7,2r,2 | s8r,4 = > It may be seen that the forces (7) cannot in general be derived from an energy principle and then the system considered is non-conservative. In a differential displacement of the system the work done by these forces is aW —Fde+Fdxe,4+F.da,—f dryt+Pedry. 5... (8) AN ELEMENTARY NON-CONSERVATIVE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM. 1% The expression (8), where /’,, F, have the values (7), is a perfect differential if and only if A,, A, are constants. In fact, writing A,’, Aq’, (A,A2)’ for derivatives with respect to s, and RAG. } PT pmmareny’ | ho , 4Aa(AqA2)’ A,= "2 + ae oe eee (9) ; | (AyAg) oS Diet? | a Straightforward calculation gives D2 Of, OF, _2¢ A, pe tte 2B ryt" (10) J Ca Ors 1; The right-hand side of (10) vanishes if A,, A, are constants. Conversely, if the right-hand side of (10) vanishes identically in a domain of values of 7,, 7. and we put 2=r,-+7), $=1r,—1,, we see that 2 6e2 (eg? 2th? 18) Age oS)? te Ba(e— 8") pra fe re ieee: Up) is identically zero in 2, s. It follows that B, A,, A, must vanish identically in s, and then by (9), (A,A,)’=0, A, =0, A,’=0. Thus, when A,, A, are not constants the system considered is not mechanically conservative.’ THE ENERGY METHOD. Instead of deriving the forces acting on the dipoles directly as in the preceding section, the ‘‘ energy method”? would assume “the system to be mechanically conservative and would derive these forces by differentiation of the energy function. The force on the charge e would be taken from the first formula in (7) and the energy would be ai 2r,62 (°dr, 2A .e2? (Pdr, 128A,A.62 (° ede == if eee! Lraeeesen art Pee teed estes AP : is a D loa DO Ne patiae Ds* | gear where 2=r,+7,. Evaluating the integrals, he? Age? 2AAo€7 U=— spi Odea Deir aye (11) The forces acting on the dipoles would now be taken as 0U 0U . (nh) — ——_— (OD ae PEO Aaa eins a Sa ee 2 ary? 1 ary a Calculating these derivatives and comparing with (7) we find Po P= ay age ele : i} HITS PAE OF | rate (13) CpAG eA ZC | (inlet 9) aN ieee 2 aera: oie + op iets J KE 18 WwW. B. SMITH-WHITE. These formulae show that the mechanical forces in the system, according to the energy method, may be obtained from those derived directly by introducing an additional mutual repulsion between the dipoles of amount e°7A, | e7A, )2e*B Dred Drak gegen kite hes occa (14) From (3) and (9) we see that expression (14) is the same as LH A 1B AS a ee (15) DIELECTRIC FORCES. Any suggestion that the spurious repulsive force (14), between the dipoles of the elementary system, should be regarded seriously would probably be dismissed as fantastic. What I wish to make plain here is that precisely such a force is generally accepted in the commonly presented theory of dielectric forces due to Helmholtz. In the case of a fluid dielectric the force per unit volume, derived directly, is F=tkV E?, and that given by the energy method is Fo = pry kt+4V (#5) where 1+47k is the dielectric constant, and t is the density of the fluid. The difference between these expressions is Fi) Fo1y (#*5-(2)). a (16) This formula corresponds exactly with the formula (13) above. The following remarks may serve to elaborate the last statement. In a continuous isotropic medium the dipole element is KEdv, where dv is an element of volume. If, to allow for dilatation of the medium, we use 7t,, dv, to denote undeformed or initial density and volume of an element, then t,dvy=tdv, so that _ kt Pa dv). Accordingly we may suppose (k/t)t,dv, to correspond with the coefficient A of the elementary system. Again we may associate t of the dielectric with 1/s of the elementary system; we take t/t, to correspond with s)/s, where s) is an initial value of s. Then to vag NAG] will correspond 0 OE oi 39 (k aaa eS ra 7%) = —dvyt ac (:): Substituting (15) for the right-hand side of (13) and noting that i dy Oy We i ds a eae ae we have : OA r ers Hi ee ae AN ELEMENTARY NON-CONSERVATIVE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM. 19 We now replace the right-hand side successively by 0 IN re] dn DAT fee epn Vets de aes SEA fe npc (Lo “52 an) b5,(2 is) 0 TIN 0 O Lic tS Cao Aegean 1 snes pmlc b(B vas) Lares, ( 2 i 3-(=)): Finally, reckoning the force per unit volume, and replacing the last expression by the corresponding vector form we get 0 (k (nyo Ree pei (ik F F 1 (B c i(;)) REFERENCES. Smith-White, W. B., 1949. Phil. Mag., Ser. 7, 40, 466. Smith-White, W. B., 1950. Nature, 166, 689. which is (16). THE ANALYSIS OF INFINITELY LONG BEAMS UNDER NORMAL LOADS. By C. A. M. GRAY, B.Sc., B.E. Manuscript received, March 19, 1951. Read, May 2, 1951. INTRODUCTION. The determination of the stresses and displacements in an infinitely long beam under normal loads has been made by Filon and Th. v. Karman. Their solutions, however, were obtained by using Fourier integral expansions of the loads, and their results are expressed as definite integrals, which are rather difficult to interpret. In this paper, the theory of the complex variable is used to develop the solution as a complex power series, giving a direct solution of the problem. Use is made of some general results given by Muscelisvili, in which he has reduced the solution of two dimensional problems in elasticity to the determination of two analytic functions, given, for simply connected areas, by two integral equations. These integral relations are applied quite generally to the problem of a long beam, and it is shown that their solution is reduced to solving an infinite set of simultaneous equations. The solution of these equations is quite practic- able by an iteration process, and a simple example already considered by Filon is given to illustrate this point. FUNDAMENTAL EQUATIONS. Consider a two-dimensional elastic system in which the z or #,y plane is the plane of the applied forces. Define the two analytic functions Q(z) and w(z) of the complex variable z by va +yy = Rea. Q(z), | 2 (ax —yy +2iey) = —(2Q"(z) +w"(2)), where the dashes (”) denote differentiation, the bars (—) the conjugates and the quantities LX, yy, xy the stresses. Then, when the boundary loads are given, Muschelisvili (1933) has shown that they may be expressed as = - =. = Ss Q(zB) +2pQ’ (Zp) +0") =4i (Xi A4Y yds: 2. ee (2) where X, and Y, are the components of the surface tractions along the # and y axes respectively, zg is the boundary value of z, and the line integral is taken in the positive sense around the contour of the loaded body. Further, if the area in the z plane is conformally transformed to the unit circle y:|¢| <1 in the ¢ plane by the relation z=f(Z), equation (2) becomes OL f(c)} +f(6)Q'z(6) +0 (G)—F thas. ee. ae eee (3) the value of ¢ on the boundary of y being denoted by c=e'0 and the subscript 2 in the second term denoting that the differentiation is with regard to z. ANALYSIS OF INFINITELY LONG BEAMS UNDER NORMAL LOADS. 21 Multiplying both sides of (3) by do /2ni(o —Z), integrating round the contour y and applying Cauchy’s Theorem, Muschelisvili then obtains (from (3)) the integral relation 2riQd{f =| (Ff, +iF )do/(o—G) 4] f(o)Q'2(c)do/(o —C) +constant, Y Y and from the conjugate of (4) arin '(f(Ch=| WP, iF da/(a—t)— | f(c)Q'z(6)da /(o —C) +constant Y 6 ae (5) The solution of these equations is quite simple if the mapping function f(Z) is rational, but, in general special consideration must be given to the second integral on the R.H.S. of (4) and (5). In the next section, the particular case of the mapping of an infinitely long rectangle on the unit circle is considered and, it will be shown, that if 02’,(Z) is given by the power series & b;C? equation (4) } r=0 can be replaced by an infinite set of simultaneous equations for the b’s. GENERAL SOLUTION FOR INFINITELY LONG BEAMS. The transformation z= —(2th/m) loge (1+C€)/(1—C) transforms the infinite strip r= +h, —o1. 22 C. A. M. GRAY. Hence, | D/x{1/u) log (1—w)du/(u 0) =0 5 D i | Bialt/a) log (1—2\da /o—2) + | D'x{1/2) log (1—EME/E—K) B ie i _L’x(1/0") log (1—c' a’ /(o’ —0) + | al /) log (1 —E)dE/E—) where the contour integrals are taken in the positive sense. n / NG CONTOUR C Wy \ CONTOUR C 7 \ 7 ~ = +S Bie ens aia . — a Fig. 2. Now, along CD, £=p; and along AB, &=pe2in, 2 f O40 log a—eaee—o+f 0/2 log (1—2)de (eG) = —2in | W(t /plde/(p =) a | 20) log (1—c)do/(o —C) = —2in | Delt /edde/e—¥) +] Gatt/o" log (1—o’)da’/(o’ —Z). Similarly, we have for the contour C’ — — =e | aua log (1+0)do/(o—¢) = —2in | D'a(t/e)de/(9 =) + 2'x(1/o') log (1+0")da’ /(o’ —2). Hence, Q',(a) log (1+6)/(1—c) . de/(o —C) ‘ rR R = —2ir| _W'lt/e)de/(e—8) 42! | De(1/e)de/(o ~9) +] n2'n(1/0") log (1 -+0")da' /(a’ —2). -| Bat/o log (1—o’)da' /(a’ —Z). ANALYSIS OF INFINITELY LONG BEAMS UNDER NORMAL LOADS. 23 Now, if I’ and I” increase indefinitely, and {2’,(w) is bounded for u—0, this becomes [o.@) (1/271) | 2x0) log (1+c)/(1—c) . do/(o—%)= | Q’,(1/e)de/(e —%) 1 i Q’,(1/e)de/(e —Z). But, | Sa1/erdete —f) =|. +b,/p+b./o2. . .)de/(p —2) =f] de/(o—0)—O,/%) log (1 —€) —(b2/€?)[log (1—@) +]. . ., where Q’,(¢)= & b,¢r, for | | <1, since Q’,(¢) is analytic for | ¢ | <1. r=0 Similarly, J Mall /e)de/(o—)=h | _de/(e—) —(y/%) log (146) —(b,/C2)(log (1+0)—€). . . “(1 /2ni) | Wale) log (1+«)/(1—s) . do/(o —¢) =by log (1+-%)/(1—2) +(b,/6) log (1+0)/(1—0) +... Now for | ¢|<1, log (1+€)/(1 —G) =2(6 +07/3 +07/5. . .). Hence, (1/2ri) | 220) log (1+6)/(1 —o) . do/(o —C)=(2b, +.2b5/3. . .) $2 (By +bo/3. . )C+2(b,/3+B5/5. . JC... Again, dQ /dG = (dQ. /dz)dz /a = —(4ih/m)[bo+b,0+(Bo+b)C+. . .)- Also (1/277) u (f,+i1F,)do/(o—C) can be expressed a8 a power series & p;Ct, dc : 1 2 ay fon Gti. Hence differentiating both sides of (4A) with regard to ¢ the following infinite set of equations is obtained to determine the b’s: by + (Bp -+bo/3-+b4/5+. . .) =ipor/4h by +2(b,/3-+b,/8-+b;/7. . .) =ipyn/4h © by +b +3(bo/3+b2/5+b4/7 . igen | ete. With the b’s determined, (’, can be computed by either of two methods. We have directly by definition Q’,= &% 6,C', however, sometimes it is more r=0 . 24 Cc. A. M. GRAY. convenient to obtain an expression from (4A). Differentiating both sides of (4A) with regard to 2 we have: , 4h.Q’, =in(1 —@) jaseninge | (FP, +tF,)do/(o—S) + (Sih /)[(inpa/Sh—by) + (ip,/th—y+. «J. To complete the solution we require w’(z). From equation (5) and carrying out the second integration in a similar fashion as for the corresponding integral in (4), 2riw' (2) =| (F', —iF,)do/(o —G) =| Q'2(6)f(a)do/(o SiG) ¥ nf =O GG ene © os where C,=q, —(4th/t) [bg +b6/5+649/9. . «], Co=Go—(4ih/) [by +0 5/3+,/3 . . I, C3 = 3 —(4th/x)[b,+),/3+0,/5 .. .], etc. and a/2miy | (F, —iF y)do/(o —G)=G +5 +926". - - As an example consider the infinite beam loaded with two equal opposing normal forees placed at corresponding points of the two edges (refer to Fig. 1). Then, along BCD, F,+i1F,=—41, F,—if,=41, and along DAB, F,+iF,=0, f,—if,=0. Hence, aan] F +iP,)do/(o —C)=(—2/n) log (op —C)/(on —S). oe | (F, iF ,)do/(o—t)= —8(1 02-4040. . ). 1 Similarly, a/2ni)| (Py iP, \da/o—-0)=2/m log (op —¢)/(on —S) =(2/m)[log op/og —210 + 2102/3. . «| Equations (6) then become 26) +6,/3+06,/5+0,/7... = —h-! 2b) +1-6b,-+0 -428571b, +0 -333333),+. . . s=//jeL 2b) +1-71084b, +1 -55555b, +0-4545450,4-. . . =—h-} 2b) +1:77778b, +1 -63636b,-+1-538460,4+... =h-1 etc. These equations can be solved by iteration, and Table I gives the results of seven iterations together with the accepted values. Hence, hae, 2 O=} 1— © | 9.341 —0-21%2—0 05040-0436. . ie nares Ah? . dQ’, /de=int(1 —C2)[4 /(1 +2)? 0-42 —0 -202—0-2604. . J. dav'(z)/dz—= —(1 —G*)[—(1 +?) *—0-7854(1 —C*)/(1 +0?) +3 +1416C2/(1 -+-C2)? 0 -55014 +0 -21502+0-21504. . .JA-1, ANALYSIS OF INFINITELY LONG BEAMS UNDER NORMAL LOADS. 25 TABLE I. Iteration. by Xh. b, Xh. b, xh. b, xh. bs Xh. | bi Xh. 0 males cree oats zt ae cus 1 sale aes elk ius mas ek, 2 —0-61207 1-76415 —1-80009 1-32181 a — 3 —0- 708431 1-71731 —2-00701 1-72058 —1-34823 a + —0- 634263 1-82678 —2-00593 1-90613 —1-77065 1-33048 5 —0-703277 1-75369 —2:07246 1-92217 —1-94988 1-75816 6 —0- 64225 1-82921 —2-02635 1-96914 —1-97449 1-97113 7 —0-69795 1- 76036 2-07620 1-94526 —2-01862 2-0286 Accepted values |—0-659 1-79 —2-05 1-957 —2 2 The stresses can now be calculated from (1) and the distributions along OX and OY are shown in Figure 3. As a check on the approximation the values calculated by Filon (1900) are shown. —~ Y 0-2 0:4 O06 Nf 0:0 O-2 0:4 O-6 0:8 1-0 1-2 ee DISTANCE ALONG OY v. VOLUME LXXXV x VI—Seismicity of Australia. By T. N. Burke-Gaffney . Wales. By Kathleen Sherrard ie JOURNAL AND PROCEEDINGS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY. OF NEW SOUTH WALES FOR 1951 (INCORPORATED 1881) ——— VOLUME LXXXV Part II EDITED BY IDA A. BROWNE, D.Sc. Honorary Editorial Secretary —_—__—_____ THE AUTHORS OF PAPERS ARE ALONE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE STATEMENTS MADE AND THE OPINIONS EXPRESSED THEREIN SYDNEY PUBLISHED BY THE SOCIETY, SCIENCE HOUSE GLOUCESTER AND ESSEX STREETS CLARKE MEMORIAL LECTURE THE ORE MINERALS AND THEIR TEXTURES.* By A. B. EDWARDS, D.Sc., Ph.D., D.I.C. With Plates I-IV and three text-figures. I. COMMEMORATIVE. We are gathered tonight in commemoration of the Reverend W. B. Clarke, one of the founders of Australian geology. William Branwhite Clarke was born in Suffolk in 1798. He entered Jesus College, Cambridge, in 1817, where he studied under Professor Sedgwick, received the degree of Bachelor of Arts in 1821, and the Master’s degree in 1824. He was ordained a minister of the Church of England in 1821, and in that capacity he migrated in 1839 to New South Wales, where he continued his ministrations until his retirement in 1870 at the age of 72 years. He began his geological studies soon after his arrival, and continued them until his death in 1878. They are preserved for us in more than 50 papers published in the Journal of this Society and in the Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society, and in his book, ‘‘ Remarks on the Sedimentary Formations | of New South Wales ”’, which ran to four editions in his lifetime. His interests embraced the whole field of geology. He was the first, after Strzelecki, to discover gold in the colony, in 1841, and the first to discover tin, in 1849. He made the first records of Silurian and Cretaceous fossils in Australia, and many of the formations of this country received their names at his hand, such as your familiar Hawkesbury Sandstone. His chief contribution, however, was in determining the structure, succession and age of the Permian coalfields of New South Wales, in the face of vigorous controversy. In 1876 he was elected a Fellow of the Royal Society—still a rare distinction for scientists in this country—and in 1877 the Geological Society of London gave further recognition to his work by awarding him its Murchison Medal. It is pleasing to record that he was not without honour in his own country, and that in the very year of his death, 1878, the Clarke Memorial Medal was founded in his honour. His annual commemoration has been extended to include a public lecture, which it is my duty tonight to present to you. It is a considerable honour to have been chosen to do this, and I trust you will forgive me in that my subject does not relate very closely to William Clarke’s work. Nowadays we are forced to be more restricted in our geological interests, and I have thought it proper that on this occasion I should review some aspects of the subject of which I have most first-hand experience, namely ‘‘ The Ore Minerals and their Textures ’’. My subject is the more apposite in that the Clarke Memorial Medal for 1951 has been awarded to my chief and colleague, Dr. Frank Leslie Stillwell, in recognition, among other things, of his work with the ore minerals. Dr. Stillwell has done . more than any other to promote the study of the ore minerals in this country, and much of what I have to say is based on his labours and teaching. * Delivered to the Royal Society of New South Wales, June 14, 1951. THE ORE MINERALS AND THEIR TEXTURES. 27 Il. THE ORE MINERALS AND THEIR TEXTURES. The ore minerals, or as they may be termed equally, the opaque minerals, are in some respects simpler in their atomic structures than the common rock minerals, but paradoxically from this simplicity comes a complexity within themselves that is revealed in their textures. They comprise three groups: (i) the sulphides, with which may be included arsenides, antimonides and tellurides, and which comprise by far the greater variety of the ore minerals, (ii) the opaque oxides, which are few in number but of greater economic importance, as a source of iron and the ferro-alloys, and (iii) the native metals, equally few in number, but also of considerable economic importance. The sulphides are most distinctive compounds. They are predominantly covalent (or homopolar) structures. The only essentially ionic sulphides are those of the alkalis and the alkaline-earths, which are water-soluble, and are not found as discrete minerals. The predominantly covalent character of the sulphides probably arises from the fact that the large sulphur atoms, and in particular the S?- ions, are highly polarizable structures. This could explain the selective association, found under natural conditions, of sulphur with the B sub-group elements of the Periodic Table—the so-called chalcophile elements—which are all strongly polarizing, 18-electron shell-type elements, and with certain of the transition metals, which approximate to 18-electron shell-type elements. An association of sulphur with a chalcophile element appears to satisfy the polarizing characters of both, more effectively than other associations can; and the intensity of the resulting polarization is apparently such that these sulphide molecules, once formed, are indifferent, even in a melt, to a silicon-oxygen environment. They become immiscible in a silicate melt, so that they fail to be incorporated in silicate minerals. Many of the sulphides in addition possess metallic characteristics, indicating some degree of metallic bonding. This arises from their high metal content, and the fact that in most of them the metal atoms occur in well defined planes from which non-metallic elements are excluded. Structures of the Sulphides. As a result of these features the sulphides form a variety of more or less close packed crystal structures that include infinite three-dimensional complexes, layer structures and chain structures, in a general way comparable with silicate structures, but mutually exclusive. The structures of the main sulphide groups are described in W. L. Bragg’s ‘‘ Atomic Structure of Minerals’ (1937) and in numerous papers in the journals. Their chemical aspects are discussed in A. F. Well’s “ Structural Inorganic Chemistry ’? (1945) and R. C. Evans’ ‘* Introduction to Crystal Chemistry ’’ (1948), and need not be considered here. Brief reference to the forms of some of these sulphide structures is necessary, however, to explain the peculiar textures and relationships of the ore minerals. Table 1 (from Wells, p. 386) summarizes the chief types of crystal structure shown by the simple sulphides. The antifluorite type of sulphide structure does not concern us, because these compounds are not found as minerals. Of the sulphides crystallizing with a rock salt structure (Text-fig. 1 (a)), one, galena, PbS, is of great importance as an ore mineral. The lead and sulphur atoms are arranged alternately at the corners of a set of cubes, the atoms of either kind forming a face-centred cubic lattice. Each lead atom is surrounded by six sulphur atoms, and each sulphur by six lead atoms. Few other of the common sulphides assume this form, which accounts for the ‘“ aloofness ”’ of galena in assuming relationships with other minerals. Er 28 A. B. EDWARDS. The crystallization of galena with the rock salt structure does not imply ionic bonding of the crystal, as is apparent from the physical properties of galena, which is opaque, with a brilliant metallic lustre, quite unlike the colourless and transparent ionic sulphides. The pyrite structure (Text-fig. 1 (b)) (after Bragg, p. 71; Wells, p. 390) may be regarded as a variant of the rock-salt or galena structure, if we suppose the Fe atoms to replace the Pb atoms, and a double S group to replace the single S atoms of the galena structure. These dumb-bell shaped 8, groups are so oriented that each of the eight small cubes into which the unit cube is divided in Text-fig. 1 (b) has only one group pointing towards its centre. Each of the S atoms is linked to one S atom on one side, and to a triad of Fe atoms on the other, TABLE l. The Crystal Structures of Some Sulphides. (From Wells, Structural Inorganic Chemistry, p. 386.) Coordination Type of Numbers of Name of Structure. Examples. Structure. M and §. Infinite 3 - dimen- 4:8 Antifluorite. Li,S, NaS, KS, Rb,S. sional complexes. 6:6 Rock-salt. MgS, CaS, Sr8S, BaS, MnS, PbS. 6:6 Nickel arsenide. FeS, CoS, NiS.* 6: 6F Pyrites or Marcasite. FeS,, CoS,, NiS,, MnS,, OsS,, RuS,. 4:4 Zinc-blende. BeS, ZnS, CdS, HgSt Wurtzite. ZnS, CdS, MnS. 4:4 Cooperite. Pts. Layer structures | Gite Cadmium iodide. TiS,,.2tS., Sis... Piss 6:3 Molybdenum sulphide. | MoS,, WS8,. Chain structures .. | Sb,S8,, Bi,S,, SiSo- Molecular structures | All sulphides consisting of | finite molecules. * Also the millerite structure (5:5 coordination). + The coordination numbers here are those of Fe by S and of 8, groups by Fe (or other metal). t Metacinnabarite—also the hexagonal cinnabar structure. so that the S, group, considered as a unit, lies between six metal atoms, like the S atoms in PbS, and each Fe atom touches six sulphur atoms. The distance between the S atoms is 2:10 A. This is much less than twice the radius of a sulphur atom, which would be about 3-5 A., and indicates that the S atoms are linked by covalent (homopolar) bonds. Closely related to the pyrite structure is the structure of minerals of the ulmanmite class, viz. ulmannite (NiSbS), gersdorffite (NiAsS), cobaltite (CoAsS). In ulmannite a nickel atom takes the place of each iron atom of the pyrite, while an SbS group replaces each 8, group. Comparable substitutions occur . with gersdorffite and cobaltite. The marcasite structure (Text-fig. 1 (c)) (after Bragg, p. 74; Wells, p. 390) is closely related to the pyrite structure. In the marcasite structure the Fe atoms lie at the corners and centre of an ortho-rhombic cell. The inclined 8, groups are centred midway between the Fe atoms in the c-direction, and lie on reflection planes. As in the pyrite structure, each S atom is linked to an S atom on one side and to a triad of Fe atoms on the other side, and each Fe atom touches six S atoms. THE ORE MINERALS AND THEIR TEXTURES. 29 Arsenic substitutes readily for sulphur in this structure, giving either arsenopyrite (FeAsS), with AsS groups, or lollingite (FeAs,) with As, groups. This explains the ready replacement of lollingite by arsenopyrite, observed in many ores, e.g. at Broken Hill (Stillwell and Edwards, 1939) (Plate I, fig. 1). By replacement I mean “ the dissolving of one mineral and the simultaneous deposition of another mineral in its place, without the intervening development of appreciable open spaces, and commonly without change of volume’’. The replacement of lollingite by arsenopyrite involves solid diffusion of an S atom into the lattice and simultaneous outward diffusion of an As atom, without any change in the crystal structure, and as can be seen from Plate I, fig. 1, the inward diffusion of the replacing atoms and the outward diffusion of the sub- stituted atoms follows the crystallographic directions of the lollingite. Another important sulphide structure is the nickel arsenide structure (Text-fig. 1 (d)). Minerals that crystallize with this structure are niccolite (NiAs), breithauptite (NiSb) and pyrrhotite (FeS). In niccolite the nickel atoms lie on a simple hexagonal lattice (Text-fig. 1 (d)). Every arsenic atom lies between six nickel atoms, and every nickel atom lies between six arsenic atoms, and also between two nickel atoms which are so close that they must be regarded as nearest neighbours. The arsenic atoms, aS may be seen from Text-fig. 1 (d), lie on two hexagonal lattices, which are roughly in the position of hexagonal closest packing with respect to one another. With pyrrhotite Fe atoms take the place of Ni atoms, and 8 atoms take the place of As atoms. Compounds of this structure are metallic in appearance, and tend to be of variable composition. The variable composition of pyrrhotite is well known. It almost always contains S in excess of the formula FeS, and a variety of formulae ranging from Fe,S, to Fe,,8,, have been proposed to cover this varia- tion. X-ray examination has established that the variability arises not from variable sulphur content but from the fact that a variable proportion of the iron positions in the structure are vacant, so that in the sulphur-rich varieties the number of iron atoms present is below normal (Hagg and Sucksdorff, 1933). This is demonstrated in Text-fig. 1 (e) (after Bragg, p. 67), which shows the observed densities of pyrrhotites of a range of composition, plotted as circles, against the calculated curves of density variation to be expected from (i) sub- stituting sulphur for iron, and (ii) withdrawing iron atoms from some of the lattice points. As Bragg comments, “‘ the verdict is clearly for the withdrawal of iron ”’. The well-known tendency for some pyrrhotites to react with oxygen, and thereby retard the dissolution of gold in cyanide solutions, is probably related to this habit of lattice defect, which is also shared by pyrite. Pyrite, like pyrrhotite, is notably non-stoichiometric, its composition ranging from FeS,.,, to FeS,.o1, with a corresponding variation in such properties as density and electrical conductivity (Smith, 1942). There is some tendenty for atoms of foreign metals to lodge in the vacant iron sites in these structures, giving a form of limited solid solution. Thus occurrences of gold apparently in solid solution in high temperature pyrite are known from various epithermal gold ores, a notable example being the pyrite of the Dolphin East Lode, at Vatukoula, Fiji, where concentrations of gold as high as 25 ounces (780 grammes) of gold per ton of pyrite have been encountered, the gold being invisible at the highest magnification, though detectable with the spectroscope (Stillwell and Edwards, 1946). If pyrite containing such “‘ invisible ’’ gold is annealed at 600° C. for several hours, the gold aggregates into particles of visible size (1 to 2 microns). The visible particles so formed resemble many natural occurrences of fine-grained FF A. B. EDWARDS. 30 @ SA © As Orr a earat TO Re} 52 3 54 Atomic Fer Cent e sl 49 50 Fig. I. THE ORE MINERALS AND THEIR TEXTURES. 31 gold (Plate I, fig. 2), which may have resulted from the unmixing and segregation of gold in solid solution, during the auto-annealing, i.e. the slow cooling, of the ore deposits concerned (Maslinitsky, 1944). Alternatively it might derive from the spontaneous breakdown of Au,S;, which is stable only at high temper- atures, under a high pressure of sulphur vapour (Maslinitsky, 1944). Gordon Smith (1947) has made an ingenious attempt to use the lattice defects of pyrite as a measure of its temperature of formation. His pyrite . geothermometer consists of a pair of hot and cold electrodes, connected through a sensitive galvanometer, that measures the potential difference set up when the two electrodes are applied simultaneously to the surface of a pyrite crystal. The greater the number of defects the lower the potential difference that results. The theory is that high temperature crystals are most nearly perfect, and that the number of lattice defects increases as the temperature of crystallization decreases. While this seems true for pure substances, it fails to take account of the effects of impurities and foreign atoms in minerals, so that some pyrites give anomalous results. In the zinc blende structure (Text-fig. 1 (f)) (after Wells, p. 83), which characterizes sphalerite and a number of other sulphide minerals, the metal atoms lie in a face-centred cubic lattice, and the sulphur atoms are arranged in a similar lattice. Thus in sphalerite (ZnS) each S atom.is surrounded by four Zn atoms at the corners of a tetrahedron, all the tetrahedra being similarly oriented, and each Zn atom is surrounded similarly by four S atoms at the corners of a tetrahedron. Chalcopyrite (CuFeS,) has a very similar structure in which the Zn atoms of ZnS are replaced by alternate Cu and Fe oe but the unit cell of chaleo- pyrite is twice as large as that of ZnS (Text-fig. 2 (a)) (after Wells, p. 395). The difference in size of the Cu and Fe atoms esa ean the Zn atoms causes the tetrahedral arrangement of the metal atoms in CuF eS, to be slightly irregular, so that CuFeS, is tetragonal, but with its angles very close to those of the cubic system. In stannite (Cu,FeSn8,) the same structure is retained, but half of the Fe atoms are replaced by Sn atoms. A further difference is that in the stannite all the copper atoms occupy planes by themselves, parallel to 001, with the Sn and Fe atoms occupying alternate positions in the intervening metal Duane (Text-fig. 2 (a)). Clearly there is opportunity for extensive isomorphous substitution of Cu, Fe, Sn and Zn for one another in these structures, that is, for solid solution between these minerals. The relationships are more complex in that tetrahedrite (Cu,SbS,) and tennantite (Cu,AsS,) also have this structure. The References to Fig. 1. Text-Fig. 1 (a).—The structure of galena (rock-salt structure) (black circles=lead, open circles= sulphur). Translation can occur either along a (111) plane or parallel to a cube plane (001), provided the movement is in the direction of a cube-diagonal (110), without bringing like- charged atoms opposite one another in adjacent planes. Movement in the (001) plane is referred because the (001) planes are the most widely spaced in the lattice. p p y sp Text-Fig. 1 (b).—The pyrite structure, with the S—S distance reduced to accentuate the resemblance to the galena or rock-salt structure. After Wells. Text-Fig. 1 (c)—The marcasite structure. The iron atoms (shaded) outline the unit cell. The position of the S, group between two iron triads is shown. After Bragg. Text-Fig. 1 (d).—The nickel arsenide structure, NiAs. The central nickel atom is surrounded by six arsenic atoms and two nickel atoms. After Bragg. Text-Fig. 1 (e).—The circles show the observed variation of density of pyrrhotite with com- position. Their proximity to the lower curve proves that variation occurs by withdrawal of iron atoms from lattice positions. After Bragg. Text-Fig. 1 (f).—The zinc-blende structure, ZnS. After Wells. 32 A. B. EDWARDS. Cu atoms substitute for three-quarters of the Zn atoms in the ZnS structure, and the Sb or As atoms for the remaining Zn atoms, but since both Sb and As | form only three strong bonds, one-quarter of the S positions are left unoccupied. Solid Solutions. With increasing temperature the possibilities of solid solution are enhanced, in that the radius of vibration of each atom is increased, so that the space that it occupies is enlarged, and this makes easier any substitution of a foreign metal atom of different size than the normal metal atom of the structure without causing undue distortion of the lattice (Buerger, 1934). Order-Disorder Transformations. Solid solution between a number of the sulphide minerals is further promoted in that high temperature introduces disorder in their crystal structures. The sulphur lattices remain sensibly perfect, but the metal lattices become more or less completely disordered, so that the metal atoms are distributed statistically through the crystal structure, asin aliquid. This behaviour has been established for the silver and copper selenides, and for argentite (Ag,S) and hessite (Ag,Te) by Rahlfs (1936), for chalcocite (Cu,S) and digenite (Cu,S;) by N. W. Buerger (1941), and more recently for chalcopyrite (CuFeS,), stannite (Cu,FeSn8,) and bornite (Cu,FeS,;) by Frueh (1950), and it is probably to be found in any sulphide minerals which show inversion twinning, like hessite (Plate I, fig. 3), stannite and matildite. The symmetry of the ordered form is a sub-group of that of the disordered form, so that inversion twinning commonly develops with a return to order. . If a crystal contains two or more chemically different kinds of atoms, A and B, which play similar roles in the crystal lattice, e.g. Cu and Fe in chalco- pyrite, Cu, Fe and Sn in stannite, at high temperatures disorder may prevail among these atoms, so that instead of occurring in strictly ordered positions relative to one another in the crystal structure, they may proxy for each other indistinguishably (Buerger, 1948, p. 101). In a disordered state an excess of A relative to B can be accepted into the structure ; but with a return to order the excess A must be rejected. When in a state of disorder, i.e. at high temperatures, extensive solid solution is possible between those groups of minerals which have similar crystal structures, and in which the S atoms, or their equivalents, are more or less equally spaced. Thus extensive mutual solid solution is possible between ZnS, FeS, CuFeS,, Cu,FeSn8,, Cu,SbS, and Cu,Ass8s,. Unmixing. With the cooling of such a solid solution there occurs (i) a general shrinkage of the structure, and (ii) a return to the ordered state. Both changes cause precipitation of the solute atoms (Buerger, 1934, p. 444; 1948, p. 101). The precipitates appear as minerals intimately intergrown with the solvent mineral or host, and generally these intergrowths are oriented parallel to certain favoured crystallographic directions of the host (Plate I, fig. 5). In such oriented intergrowths the contact planes between the two minerals are planes in which (i) the atoms in the plane consist of an element common to both minerals, and (ii) in which the atomic spacings are similar for both minerals so that the linear differences in spacing of the atoms of this element in the equivalent planes of the two minerals does not exceed 10° of the spacing of the larger of the two structures concerned (Gruner, 1929, p. 227). The contact plane thus fits equally well into the structure of each of the minerals in the intergrowth and is shared by them, so that no structural break is involved at the interface. Text-fig. 2 (b) shows the spacing of S atoms in the (111) and (100) THE ORE MINERALS AND THEIR TEXTURES. % g & 6 °@ @ g 2 be © © eo 68 ¢ ¢ & (b) va 4 & 0° 6, L 0 ° A O 5 Sh SPHALE RINE (ill) . seHaterite (ico! O CHALCOPYRITE (Ill) © CHALCOPYRITE (100) & CHALCOPYRITE (OO!) Melt Temperature——> t Text-Fig. 2 (a).—Crystal structures of ZnS showing two cell units, CuFeS, and Cu,FeSn8,. After Wells. Text-Fig. 2 (b).—Spacing of S atoms in the (111) and (100) planes of sphalerite and chalcopyrite. (After Gruner, Amer. Mineral., 14, 1929.) Text-Fig. 2 (c).—Diagram to represent the phase relations of hematite and ilmenite. (From Edwards, Aust. Inst. Min. Met. Proc., 110, 1938.) 33 34 A. B. EDWARDS. planes of sphalerite and chalcopyrite. The close coincidence of the S atoms permits these two minerals to share their S planes in intergrowths. Where there is only one set of planes of such pronounced chemical and structural similarity common to both minerals, lamellar intergrowths occur (Plate I, fig. 5). Where there are two or more sets of planes that can be shared lamellar intergrowths may occur, or the solute mineral may form skeletal crystals (Plate I, fig. 4), or more or less globular bodies distributed through the host as droplets in an emulsion (Plate II, fig. 1). Under favourable conditions, naturally occurring intergrowths of this kind can be tested by heat treatment, and the temperature at which unmixing (precipitation) occurs can be determined, thereby providing a point on the geological thermometer. Segregation. Unmixing at high temperatures, with slow cooling, is accompanied by more or less rapid solid diffusion of the precipitated phase out of unfavourable structure, leading to segregation of the solute mineral (precipitate) in the grain boundaries of the host. If the amount of precipitated mineral is small, it will accumulate as a network of narrow curving seams in the grain boundaries of its former host (Plate I, fig. 6), when the original relationship between the two minerals can be recognized. If, however, the proportions of solvent and precipitate mineral are more equal, segregation may lead to a coarse intergranular texture, from which it is difficult to find evidence of former solid solution (Plate IT, fig. 2). Progresswe Unmiaing. Some solid solutions unmix more or less completely at a particular temper- ature at which inversion from the disordered to the ordered state occurs abruptly, as when matildite and galena, both with rock-salt structure, unmix almost completely at 210° C., the inversion temperature of matildite (Ramdohr, 1938). If, however, the disorder level rises with temperature, on cooling a progressive unmixing occurs. Commonly the initial unmixing is into two partial solid solutions, which segregate by solid diffusion, and then continue to unmix in their turn with further slow cooling. A further complication is introduced where more than one mineral is precipitated from a single host. The rates of unmixing of the several precipitate minerals, and of their segregation, varies with temperature and concentration, so that though one solute mineral may begin to precipitate before another, the unmixing of the latter may be completed first. Oxide Minerals. The opaque oxides show a parallel behaviour. Provided that two oxide minerals have similar crystal structures, extensive substitution of the metal atoms of the one in the metal lattice of the other is possible. The ‘‘ foreign ”’ atom must be of similar size to the metal atom for which it substitutes, and of the same valency. Generally the extent of substitution increases with rise in temperature and unmixing occurs on cooling. With a few minerals the sub- stitution is so perfect that the solid solutions remain stable at normal temper- atures. Tantalite (FeTa,O,) and columbite (FeNb,O,) are such a pair, forming a continuous solid solution series in which Nb5+ can substitute for Ta°+. They have identical crystal structures, and the two elements have nearly identical ionic radii, Ta>+ 0-68 A, Nb5+ 0-69 A, and similar chemical properties, being adjacent to each other in Group V of the Periodic Table. THE ORE MINERALS AND THEIR TEXTURES. 35 Ilmenite and Hematite. Iimenite (FeTiO,) and hematite (Fe,O,) form a continuous solid solution at temperatures of about 600° C., and if rapidly cooled the solid solution may be retained in a metastable state. If slowly cooled it unmixes into two partial solid solutions, a ferriferous ilmenite and a titaniferous hematite, both of which unmix progressively on further cooling. Their phase relationships are indicated diagrammatically in Text-fig. 2 (c) (Edwards, 1947, p. 60). The final products of unmixing are ilmenite containing about 4:2% Fe? still in solid solution and hematite containing about 7-5°% Ti3+ still in solid solution (‘‘ titanhematite ”’). Plate IT, fig. 3, shows the type of microtexture that results from unmixing of an ilmenite-hematite solid solution. Ex-solution bodies of titanhematite are distributed in a base of ilmenite. The hematite bodies are all oriented with their long axes parallel to one another, and to the (0001) direction of both the ilmenite and the hematite. The earlier precipitated ex-solution bodies are distinctly larger than the later-formed ones. The irregular shapes of the hematite bodies arise from their growth tn situ by solid diffusion. The plane of the section is inclined to the (0001) plane of the intergrowth. If it were normal ‘to the (0001) plane, the hematite bodies would appear as parallel straight blades, and their duplex nature would not be apparent. Between the rows of coarse hematite bodies are rows of smaller hematite bodies in seriate arrangement (Plate II, fig. 4), resulting from progressive pre- cipitation at more and more competing centres of crystallization, as the concen- _ tration of the solute, and the temperature (and hence the rate of solid diffusion) declined. Similarly, the coarse hematite bodies contain rows of ilmenite ex-solution bodies with a similar seriate arrangement (Plate II, fig. 5), illustrating the progressive unmixing of the two partial solid solutions. The capacity of these two minerals to form such extensive solid solution is explained by their crystal structures (Bragg, 1937, pp. 93-6; Barth and Posnjak, 1934, p. 165). In the unit cell of hematite the oxygen atoms are arranged in approximately hexagonal closest spacing in such a way that each Fe atom falls between six oxygen atoms arranged octahedrally. The ilmenite structure is identical, but with Ti atoms replacing half of the Fe atoms in an ordered sequence. Magnesium, if present, occupies the position of an iron atom. The unit cell of hematite has a=5-42 A. and «55° 17’, that of ilmenite has a=5:40 A, «=55° 1’. The orientation of the intergrowth that forms on unmixing reflects the presence in both structures of oxygen planes parallel to their (0001) directions, in which the spacings of the oxygen atoms are practically identical. Magnetite-Ilmenite. Ti can substitute for Fe in magnetite at high temperatures, forming a homogeneous mineral which is weakly anisotropic, and is intermediate in optical properties between magnetite and ilmenite, while retaining intense magnetism. This mineral is metastable, and natural occurrences are restricted to basalts and other rapidly chilled rocks that formed at high temperatures. With moderate cooling rates, this solid solution unmixes. If magnetite predominates, the ilmenite is precipitated as blades (lamellae) which are elongated parallel to their (0001) direction, and are oriented in the (111) planes of the magnetite, giving a triangular lattice pattern intergrowth (Plate II, fig. 6). If ilmenite predominates, lamellae of magnetite are precipitated parallel to the (0001) plane of the ilmenite, and similarly oriented blades of magnetite are found in some specimens of ilmenite-hematite intergrowths. 36 A. B. EDWARDS. This orientation arises from a sharing of oxygen planes. In the magnetite structure every third and seventh (111) plane consists of oxygen ions only, while in ilmenite every third (0001) plane consists of oxygen only. The spacing of the oxygen ions in these planes is such that if the planes are superimposed on one another the oxygen positions in the two planes practically coincide (Text-fig. 3 (a)). ie wD ~ Q@ aa S OQ © @ @ oO ®@ 7 / oD -, Oui Cam Soy (a) G): a7 oO @° 6-5 © a. 2 Oy aes O = pe A 9 ILMENITE HEMATITE e MAGNETITE (b) PEP CENT conees Of 2 3. ate a Text-Fig. 3 (a).—The (0001) plane of oxygen atoms of ilmenite or hematite superimposed on an oxygen plane (111) of magnetite. (After Gruner, Amer. Mineral., 14, 1929.) Text-Fig. 3 (b).—Relative proportions of silver and copper in assays of Pine Vale ore and mill products. Text-Fig. 3 (c).—The layer lattice structure of molybdenite, MoS,. (Ajfter Bragg.) With slow cooling, segregation of the precipitate occurs, resulting in a granular association of ilmenite and magnetite (Plate III, fig. 1). This illustrates a simple application of textural studies of such ores. Titaniferous magnetite ore that has unmixed to a granular texture, such as this one, are readily freed THE ORE MINERALS AND THEIR TEXTURES. 37 from excessive titanium by magnetic concentration after crushing. Intimate intergrowths such as that in Plate II, fig. 6, defy physical separation. A few polished sections can save or guide a great deal of testing work. Paragenesis. Such complex relationships make it difficult to determine a precise sequence of deposition of the minerals of an ore. Even the most reliable texture indicating sequence, the cross-cutting relationship of a vein, is suspect under certain conditions. Thus if fracturing occurs during or before the unmixing of a solid solution, the precipitate will sepregate in the fracture, forming a ‘ segregation vein ” (Plate III, fig. 2) (Edwards, 1951). Unless such a vein is recognized for what it is, a false impression of the sequence of deposition will result. TABLE 2. Typical Paragenesis Diagram. PARAGENESIS OF HyPOGENE MINERALS. (Vertical lines represent periods of fracturing.) Quartz Pyrite 6.2.0 wk fie ee eee eee Marcasite (?) Arsenopyrite .. .. | 9 ———-— | ~~ |j-----+----- Sphalerite Galena Chalcopyrite Tennantite and _é “Tetra- hedrite Silver Sulpharsenides and Sulphantimonides Gold Calcite Manganocalcite Siderite Fluorite .. ay s., wt MgO alates Stibnite .. ae ve REP a sd A 2 The paragenesis of an ore deposit is commonly expressed in a diagram such as Table 2, indicating a sequence of crystallization, of the various minerals present. Unless qualified, they present an over-simplified picture of a mineralization. In most mineralizations the minerals tend to be deposited as a series of solid solutions of minerals of like crystal structure, which subsequently unmix. With slow cooling, segregation may be so complete as to destroy all evidence of the original solid solutions, but even so it is apparent that the minerals in an ore associate in groups of structurally-like minerals, and that the age relationships between such groups are readily distinguished, whereas the age relationships within the groups are complex. 38 A. B. EDWARDS. The sequence of deposition of the minerals or solid solutions depends partly on their free energies of formation and partly on the concentrations of the elements concerned in the mineralizing solutions. Pine Vale Ore. A clear example of deposition in this manner is provided by the Pine Vale copper ore, near Mackay, Queensland. This orebody is a vein about three feet wide, at a granite contact. The ore minerals are bornite, chalcopyrite and tetrahedrite, in the proportions 92:7: 1. Bornite and chalcopyrite enter into extensive solid solution with one another above 475° (Schwartz, 1931 ; Merwin and Lombard, 1937), and chalco- pyrite and tetrahedrite enter into solid solution at about 500° C. (Edwards, 1946), while a study of Pine Vale ore showed that tetrahedrite enters into solid solution in bornite above 275° C. (Edwards, 1946). Both bornite and chalco- pyrite are in a state of disorder at high temperatures (Frueh, 1950). In the Pine Vale ore the tetrahedrite occurs in an oriented ex-solution intergrowth with the bornite (Plate III, fig. 3), and a proportion of the chalco- pyrite occurs in similar intergrowths (Plate ITI, fig. 4), though the greater part of it has segregated to form more or less granular areas. The unmixing of the ‘chalcopyrite has overlapped the unmixing of the tetrahedrite, because some chalcopyrite bodies are moulded on unmixed tetrahedrite. Further confirmation that the three minerals were formerly a single solid solution is given by the fact that throughout the ore the silver content varies sympathetically with the copper content—1 per cent. copper is equivalent to 10 dwt. of silver. The silver occurs solely in the tetrahedrite, which is uniformly distributed throughout the bornite, but does not occur in the chalcopyrite. If the chalcopyrite was sporadically distributed or locally concentrated, the copper-silver relationship (Text-fig. 3 (b)) would not hold. To satisfy this relationship the chalcopyrite must be uniformly distributed through the bornite, and must originally have been in solid solution in the bornite, so that the three minerals were initially deposited as a single solid solution. The Pine Vale ore is restored to its original condition, i.e. converted to a single homogeneous solid solution, by holding it at 480° to 500°C. for about 100 hours and then quenching it. If the homogenized solid solution is cooled slowly from this temperature, or is annealed at lower temperatures, chalcopyrite unmixes from it and segregates. The ore must have been deposited, therefore, at a temperature of about 500° C. or more. The tetrahedrite dissolves in the bornite if the ore is held at about 285° C. for about 100 hours and is then quenched. If the homogenized bornite-tetra- hedrite solid solution is slowly cooled from this temperature, or is annealed at between 250° C. and 275° C., the tetrahedrite is precipitated and segregates in the grain boundaries of the bornite in a matter of afew minutes. A similar segrega- tion results if the natural ore is held at between 250° C. and 275° C. for a short period. For the natural intergrowth of the tetrahedrite in the bornite to have been preserved, the ore must, therefore, have been “‘ frozen ’’ at about 275° C. This has an interesting implication. If the ore minerals were deposited at 500° C. and were “frozen ’’ at 275° C., it follows that the mineralizing fluids were 200° to 250° C. hotter than the country rock when crystallization began. General Sequence of Deposition. In general sulphide mineralization begins with the deposition of minerals with the pyrite and marcasite structures, viz. pyrite and arsenopyrite or lollingite. Marcasite itself does not often form at this stage because it inverts to pyrite above 450° C. (Allen et al., 1912). These minerals may carry significant amounts of Ni and Co in solid solution. THE ORE MINERALS AND THEIR TEXTURES. 39 _ Minerals with the nickel arsenide structure tend to form next, especially pyrrhotite, which may carry nickel in solid solution. If iron is deficient in the mineralizing fluids, or when it becomes so, minerals with the zine blende structure develop, as a complex solid solution, or a group of partial solid solutions, which will unmix, according to its composition to form sphalerite, pyrrhotite, chalco- pyrite, stannite and even tetrahedrite or tennanite (Hdwards, 1951). The sulphide of the most abundant metal will serve as host, and the others will precipitate from it. The order of unmixing varies with the concentrations of the various metals in solution, the temperature of their order-disorder trans- formations and the rate of cooling, and since the early unmixing is into partial solid solutions which tend to segregate and then unmix further, most complex sequences of deposition result. Then follow minerals with the rock salt structure, notably galena, sometimes with various silver-bearing minerals and lead sulpho-salts in solid solution, and then the lead-arsenic, lead-antimony and lead-bismuth sulphides and the comparable silver minerals, which tend to possess more complex structures. Replacement. The paragenesis may be further complicated by the phenomena of replacement. In most ore bodies the earlier formed sulphides suffer some degree of replacement by the later formed sulphides. Plate I, fig. 1, shows lollingite being replaced by arsenopyrite, Plate II, fig. 2, shows pyrite being replaced by chalcopyrite and bornite. Plate III, fig. 5, shows pyrite being replaced by sphalerite, in Rosebery ore. The metals from the replaced mineral may be incorporated in the replacing mineral (metasome), as could have happened in this instance, where Fe could substitute for Zn, or may migrate in the residual mineralizing solutions, to be reprecipitated elsewhere. According to the composition of the residual solutions these redissolved elements may then be accommodated in later-formed, more complex minerals, or they may be forced to crystallize as a later, minor second generation of the early formed mineral, but only after they have again built up a sufficient concentration in the residual solutions. Plate III, fig. 6, shows early-formed cassiterite dissolving at a fairly late stage of mineralization, and the tin being reprecipitated as stannite. Plate IIT, fig. 6, illustrates a relation that has significance in ore dressing. It is the practice when concentrating tin ores that contain sulphides to float off the sulphides, retaining the cassiterite in the flotation tailings, from which it is then recovered by gravity concentration. Rims of stannite, such as that shown in Plate ITI, fig. 6, will cause some cassiterite to float with the sulphides, causing losses of tin out of proportion to the amount of stannite in the ore. Spontaneous Breakdowns. Further complications are introduced where early-formed minerals dissociate with the changing conditions of the later stages of mineralization. In ores in which the residual mineralizing fluids become enriched in carbonate or bicarbonate, pyrrhotite (FeS) spontaneously converts to marcasite (FeS,), the excess iron being absorbed into carbonate minerals that are commonly intergrown lamellar fashion with the marcasite (Plate IV, fig. 1) or reprecipitated as a late generation of fine-grained magnetite, intergrown with the marcasite. Marcasite requires distinctly acid conditions for its formation. If the solutions are more or less neutral a late generation of fine-grained pyrite forms instead. Any minerals which have precipitated from solid solution in the original pyrrhotite will be retained as fine inclusions in the marcasite, possibly with some reorientation. Stannite, on reduction of the sulphur vapour pressure, while still hot, tends to dissociate, and fractures forming in stannite, while it is within some critical 40 A. B. EDWARDS. temperature range, not yet established, become filled with chalcopyrite and fine-grained cassiterite (‘‘ needle tin ’’) (Plate IV, fig. 2). Metamorphism. Where an ore deposit has been subject to movement or metamorphism, either during or after deposition, this is commonly revealed by distinctive textures in the ore minerals. Contemporaneous Movements. Many ores undergo differential movement during deposition. Minerals deposited before the movement, particularly the brittle minerals like pyrite and arsenopyrite, are fractured, the fractures being healed by minerals deposited subsequently. Plate IV, fig. 3, shows arsenopyrite fractured in this way, the fractures being filled with pyrrhotite, following movement at an early stage of mineralization. Plate IV, fig. 4, shows fractured pyrite, with the fractures filled, in part, with gold. This, incidentally, is a ‘‘ free milling” ore. Crushing will expose the gold to the action of cyanide. In some ores fracturing continues at intervals throughout deposition. An outstanding example is provided by the Mount Isa lead-zinc ores, where con- comitant movements led to the formation of larger and larger fractures as the originally plastic shales were rendered more and more brittle by progressive impregnation and replacement by brittle sulphides (Edwards, 1947, p. 117). The earliest deposited minerals chiefly replaced crumpled finely banded shales, and were correspondingly fine-grained. Following the impregnation of the strata with pyrite, transverse fractures developed, extending across only a single Shale bed a fraction of an inch across. These became filled with sulphides, rendering the rocks still more competent. Continuing movements led to the formation of still later fractures, extending for a few inches up to several feet, across groups of beds, and these were filled by the latest sulphides to be deposited, which were also the coarsest grained, presumably because the larger fractures coupled with falling temperature favoured crystal growth. Flowage. Soft minerals flow under pressure and become notably elongated. Deformation occurs by the slipping of one portion of the crystal relative to another in crystallographic directions that are parallel to rows or planes of consecutively like-charged atoms in the lattice (Buerger, 1928, 1930-45) : Titi ahi neh Movement in other directions would bring like-charged atoms opposite each — other at some stage of the movement, and the resulting repulsion would cause disruption. Movement is theoretically possible along any plane containing such a direction of possible translation, but is most favoured along those planes which in addition are planes of widest interplanar spacing, because the forces of inter- atomic attraction and friction, which oppose slippage, decrease rapidly with increasing width in the spacing of the planes. Thus in galena (Text-fig. 1 (a)) translation could occur either along an octahedral (111) plane or along a cube face (001), provided that the movement is in the direction of a cube-face diagonal (110) plane. The (111) planes are the more obvious, but the wider spacing of the (001) planes renders them the preferred planes of movement. Flowage also occurs easily in layer lattice structures like molybdenite (Text-fig. 3 (c)) in which a sheet of Mo atoms is sandwiched between two sheets of S atoms, parallel to the base of the hexagonal crystal, the three forming a ‘layer’ of the structure. The atoms in the layer are firmly bound, but the THE ORE MINERALS AND THEIR TEXTURES. 4] force of attraction between adjacent layers is slight, and the crystals cleave with ease and are very responsive to pressure, even of quite local development. Clearly, however, the bonding between adjacent sulphur planes is different from that found between metal and sulphur atoms in galena, since molybdenite does not obey the “ like-atom ”’ repulsion rule. Plate IV, fig. 5, shows typical flow or translation twinning in a crystal of molybdenite. Veinlets of native bismuth transecting the molybdenite have been reoriented at each passage from one twin band to the next, giving the appearance of miniature folding. The continuity of the bismuth veinlets across the twin bands, and their smooth edges indicate that they have undergone translation without rupture. The twin planes are the (0001) planes of the molybdenite crystal, and to account for the ‘‘ folding ”’ of the bismuth veinlets it is necessary to postulate a slipping movement in each adjacent layer plane structurally comparable with the twin plane, over the full width of each band, the direction of slip being reversed in adjacent bands. Recrystallization. If the deformation is pressed too far, in soft minerals, they recrystallize after the manner of metals. Molybdenite is so subject to flow that it does not readily recrystallize. Recrystallization is best seen in stibnite. The ready deformation of stibnite is again related to its crystal structure, which consists of a series of chains or bands of closely linked Sb and 8 atoms, which lie parallel to the c-axis of the crystal. The distance between Sb and S atoms in the chains is about 2-5 A., and the bonding is covalent (homopolar). Any two atoms belonging to different chains are at least 3-2 A. apart, and much less strongly bonded. Under pressure the chains slip over one another. With mild deforma- tion stibnite crystals become greatly elongated, but beyond a certain stage of deformation recrystallization sets in and the whole mass recrystallizes as a mosaic of equigranular crystals which tend to absorb each other, building progressively larger crystals as in the recrystallization of metals. Careful reading of such textures in an ore body will reveal whether it has been subject to contemporaneous movements during mineralization, or to subsequent pressure metamorphism, and in some circumstances will help to determine its geological age. Temperatures. The textures of the minerals, and particularly those resulting from unmixing of solid solutions and from inversions, afford a means of measuring the temper- atures at which mineralizations occurred and the rate at which ore bodies cooled. As indicated, the evidence of the Pine Vale copper ore suggests that the mineralizing fluids were several hundred degrees hotter than the country rock they invaded and that mineralization continued through a range of several hundred degrees. Most ores show these features. At Broken Hill mineraliza- tion commenced above 500°C. and finished somewhere below 350°C. At Kalgoorlie deposition began at about 500° C. and ceased between 180° C. and 150°C. At Vatukoula, Fiji, it began above 500° C. and ceased below 150° C. Hither we must postulate that mineralization is an extremely slow process, continuing over the time necessary for erosion to lower the isogeotherms by about 350° C. to permit the full range of mineralization, or we must assume with Lindgren (1933, p. 529) that the country rocks were heated up by igneous intrusions or emanations and then cooled slowly to normal temperatures as mineralization progressed, a process which Schneiderhéhn (1934, p. 471) has Shown involves many thousands of years, or else we must assume that in general the mineralizing fluids reach their loci of deposition at temperatures well above that of the adjacent country rock. 42 A. B. EDWARDS. In view of the ease and rapidity with which minerals precipitated from solid solution segregate into granular structures during laboratory experiments with natural ex-solution intergrowths, their preservation in ore deposits of Devonian or pre-Cambrian age forces me to accept the third conclusion, that the mineralizing fluids reach their seats of deposition at temperatures well above that of the country rocks, and that the preservation of ex-solution intergrowths is due to the resultant rapid cooling. It may be noted that ex-solution inter- growths are much more common in narrow veins than in large ore bodies, and this is particularly true of ex-solutions that occur round about 450° to 500° C. It follows that the temperature of mineralizing fluids at their onset of crystallization bears little relation to the temperature of the country rock, i.e. the depth at which mineralization occurs but reflects the temperature of their (magmatic) source, the distance they have travelled from it, and the time involved in transit (Stillwell, 1951). Thus in the gold-telluride ores of Kalgoorlie, classed by Lindgren (1933, p. 678) as hypothermal, but perhaps better regarded aS mesothermal as regards their depth of formation, and those of Vatukoula, Fiji, which are undoubtedly epithermal as regards their depth of formation, the temperature range was practically identical—from 500° C. at the onset to about 150° C. at completion. This requires that we revise our meanings of the terms hypothermal, meso- thermal and epithermal. Lindgren (1933, pp. 210, 212, 529, 640), in introducing these terms, gave them specific meaning as regards both depth (pressure) and temperature, viz. : Epithermal: pressures equivalent to depths up to 5,000 ft., temperatures of 50° to 200° C. | Mesothermal: pressures equivalent to depths of 5,000 to 10,000 ft., temperatures of 200° to 300° C. Hypothermal: pressures equivalent to depths in excess of 10,000 ft., temperatures of 300° to 500° C. To get any measure of the temperature of the country rock at the locus of mineralization we must estimate the temperature at which mineralization ceased. If this can be determined, the maximum depth at which mineralization could have occurred can be estimated and can be checked against other estimates. Our ideas as to the depth at which a mineralization occurred are qualitative and derive chiefly from the type of structure with which the mineralization is associated, possibly with support of stratigraphic data. Such estimates commonly rest on the assumption that mineralization was more or less con- comitant with the development of the structures in which the ore body occurs. It could, of course, have occurred long subsequent, when erosion had brought pre-existing structures much closer to the surface. Assuming a geothermal gradient of 1° C. increase per 100 ft. of depth, and a surface temperature of 10° C., the following depths are arrived at for the ore bodies just cited : Approximate Temperature of Maximum Depth Ore Body. Cessation of of Formation. Mineralization. (Ft.) (° C.) Pine Vale.. Bi ay 250 24,000 Vatukoula as es 150 14,000 Kalgoorlie id re 150 14,000 Broken Hill At We c. 350 (?) 34,000 THE ORE MINERALS AND THEIR TEXTURES. 43 These figures are over-estimates in so far a8 (1) they over-estimate the final temperature of deposition, and (2) they ignore abnormal heating of the country rock by igneous intrusion or other factors. Thus, at Vatukoula it is possible that the brecciated basalt which serves as the country rock had not cooled to normal temperatures when the andesite intrusions and extrusions, with which the mineralization is associated genetically, occurred. At the time of mineraliza- tion the basalts had been buried beneath a considerable thickness of andesites and perhaps reheated. Where proximity to contemporaneous igneous intrusions can be proved, calculations such as Schneiderhoéhn’s (1934) might permit an estimate of the temperature correction required to offset the heating effect of the intrusion. Thus at Pine Vale it is likely that the country rock was 100° to 200° C. above its normal temperature when mineralization occurred, so that the depth of deposition could have been as little as 5,000 ft. This only serves to emphasize the difference in temperature between the mineralizing fluids and the country rock. Where a large positive discrepancy is established between a calculation of maximum possible depth on this basis and that based on other evidence, as at Pine Vale, we may have evidence of association in time between an ore body and an adjacent igneous intrusion or other source of abnormal heating of the country rock. A large negative discrepancy would suggest that the mineralization occurred long after the development of the structures with which it is associated. The ore of the Homestake gold mine, South Dakota, is possibly a case in point (Noble, 1950, p. 245). Scale of Solid Diffusion. In view of the emphasis placed on solid diffusion in this lecture, it is essential to keep a sense of proportion as to the scale of the movements involved. The ore minerals provide the most favourable structures for solid diffusion, far more so than the more rigid silicate structures. Moreover, they form under conditions likely to promote a maximum of solid diffusion. Yet, in the wnmixing of solid solutions the resultant linear movement of a given atom rarely exceeds a few millimetres, and is generally to be measured in microns ; and the growth in volume of a crystal of the precipitate is compensated by a corresponding reduction in volume of the residual host mineral, so that while there 1s separation, there is no migration away from the place of deposition. The forces promoting the separation are lacking at high temperatures. They develop only with falling temperatures, and the process is self-destroying in that segregation of the solute atoms brings increasing equilibrium to both crystal structures, so that solid diffusion occurs only within a limited range of temperature. In replacements the scale on which solid diffusion operates is much the same, and the temperature range is similar. It is interesting to note that the metasome mineral is always less soluble in water than the host mineral, suggesting that the metasome has the more stable atomic structure. In many ores the process of solid diffusion has been arrested in mid-stage and has remained in that arrested state for a period of the order of 500 to 1000 million years. In other words there has been no solid diffusion in these most favourable media since the ores cooled below a certain temperature, often a temperature above that of the invaded rocks. These facts, combined with the probability that mineralizing fluids are at temperatures well above that of the surrounding country rock when they begin to crystallize, even at depths of five to ten miles, argue strongly against the likelihood that solid diffusion, leading to vast migrations of ions or atoms through miles of thickness of the crust, is the significant process in the formation of granite and related silicate rocks, as some workers would have us believe (Bugge, 44 A. B. EDWARDS. 1945 ; Ramberg, 1944). This is not to deny the likely efficacy of solid diffusion in metamorphic processes, where the conditions and the scale of movement are comparable with those found in ore deposits, or that solid diffusion operates in some silicate minerals, like ex-solution perthites, on a scale comparable with that found in ore minerals. Ill. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS. My thanks are due to Dr. F. L. Stillwell, and to Mr. A. J. Gaskin, of the Geology Department, University of Melbourne, for stimulating criticism and suggestions during the preparation of this lecture. The 23 photomicrographs of ore textures in Plates I-IV are reproduced by kind permission of the Australasian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy ; Text- figures 1c, 1d, le and 3c have been redrawn from W. L. Bragg’s ‘‘ Atomic Structure of Minerals ”’ by kind permission of Cornell University Press ; and Text-figures 1b, 1f and 2a, together with Table 1, have been prepared from A. F. Well’s ** Structural Inorganic Chemistry,’ by kind permission of the Clarendon Press. IV. REFERENCES. Allen, E. T., Crenshaw, J. L., Johnston, J., and Larsen, E. S., 1912. The Mineral Sulphides of Iron. Amer. Jour. Sci., 33, 187-188. Barth, T. F. W., and Posnjak, E., 1934. The Crystal Structure of Ilmenite. Zev. f. Kryst., (A), 88, 165. Bragg, W. L., 1937. Atomic Structure of Minerals. Cornell Univ. Press. Buerger, M. J., 1928. The Plastic Deformation of the Ore Minerals. Amer. Mineral., 13, 35. 1930. Translation Gliding in Crystals. Amer. Mineral., 15, 45. ———__—_————. 1934. The Temperature-Structure-Composition Behaviour of Certain Crystals. Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. (U.S.A.), 20, 444. —_—__—_—_—_—— 1948. The Role of Temperature in Mineralogy. Amer. Mineral., 33, 101. Buerger, N. W., 1941. The Chalcocite Problem. Econ. Geol., 36, 39. Bugge, J. A. W., 1945. The Geological Importance of Diffusion in the Solid State. Norske Vidensk. Akad. I, Nat-Naturv. Kl., No. 13, 5-51. Edwards, A. B., 1946. Solid Solution of Tetrahedrite in Chalcopyrite and Bornite. Aust. Inst. Min. Met., Proc., No. 143. —-——__—__—_—_ 1947. Textures of the Ore Minerals. A.I.M.M., Melb., 60. 1951. Stannite in Some Australian Ores. Aust. Inst. Min. Met. Proc.., Nos. 162-163. Evans, R. C., 1948. Introduction to Crystal Chemistry, Camb. Univ. Press. Frueh, A. P., 1950. Disorder in Sulphide Minerals. Bull. Geol. Soc. Amer. (Abstract.) Gruner, J. W., 1929. Structural Reasons for Oriented Intergrowths in Some Minerals. Amer. Mineral., 14, 227. Hagg, G., and Sucksdorff, I., 1933. Die Kristallstruktur von Troilit und Magnetkies. Zeit. phys. Chem., 22, 444. Lindgren, W., 1933. Mineral Deposits. McGraw-Hill, 529. Maslinitsky, I., 1944. On Some Cases of Formation of Disperse Gold Segregations in Iron Sulphides. Compt. Rend. (Doklady) de lV Acad. Sci. de VU.R.S.S., 45, 385. Merwin, H. E., and Lombard, R. H., 1937. The System Cu-Fe-S. Hcon. Geol., Supp. to 32. Noble, J. A., 1950. Ore Mineralization in the Homestake Gold Mine Lead, South Dakota. Bull. Geol. Soc. Amer., 61, 245. Rahlfs, P., 1936. Uber die kubischen Hochtemperaturmodifikationen der Sulfide, Selenide und Telluride des Silbers und des einwertigen Kupfers. Zeit. phys. Chem., (B), 31, 157. Ramberg, H., 1944. The Thermodynamics of the Earth’s Crust. I. Preliminary Survey of the Principal Forces and Results in the Earth’s Crust. Norske Geol. Tidsk., 24, 98. Ramdohr, P., 1938. Uber Schapbachit, Matildit und den Silber- und Wismut-gehalt mancher Bleiglanze. Sitzungberichte der Preuss. Akad. Wiss., Phys.-Math. Klasse, 71. Schneiderhohn, H., 1934. Time-Temperature Curves in Relation to Mineral Associations in Cooling Intrusions. Econ. Geol., 29, 471. Schwartz, G. M., 1931. Intergrowths of Bornite and Chalcopyrite. Econ. Geol., 26, 186. Smith, F. G., 1942. Variations in the Properties of Pyrite. Amer. Mineral., 27, 1. —-—-———_—— 1947. The Pyrite Geothermometer. Econ. Geol., 42, 515. Stillwell, F. L., 1951. Occurrence of Telluroides at Vatukoula, Fiji. Aust. Inst. Min. Met. Proc. Nos. 154-55. THE ORE MINERALS AND THEIR TEXTURES. 45 Stillwell, F. L., and Edwards, A. B., 1939. Note on Lollingite and the Occurrence of Cobalt and Nickel in the Broken Hill Lode. Aust. Inst. Min. Met. Proc., No. 114. 1946. On the Occurrence of Sub-microscopic Gold in Pyrite from the Dolphin East Lode, Tavua, Fiji. Aust. Inst. Min. Met. Proc., No. 141. Wells, A. F., 1945. Structural Inorganic Chemistry, Clarendon Press. EXPLANATION OF PLATES. PLATE I. Fig. 1.—Arsenopyrite replacing lollingite along crystallographic directions. Etched with FeCl). Broken Hill. 42-5. (From Stillweil and Edwards, Aust. Inst. Min. Met. Proc., 114, 1939.) Fig. 2.—Two particles of gold (white) enclosed in pyrite in a cyanide residue. xX770. (From Edwards, Textures of the Ore Minerals.) Fig. 3.—Characteristic patch lamellar inversion twinning of hessite that has inverted from the high-temperature to the low-temperature form. One set of lamellae appears as light bars, and is crossed by another set appearing as fainter dark bars. Kalgoorlie, crossed nicols. x50. (From Stillwell, Aust. Inst. Min. Met. Proc., 84, 1931.) Fig. 4._Skeletal crystals of tetrahedrite (dark) formed during the unmixing of a solid solution of tetrahedrite in chalcopyrite. New Thologolong, Vic. 270. (From Edwards, Aust. Inst. Min. Met. Proc., 143-4, 1946.) Fig. 5.—Lattice intergrowth of chalcocite (white) and bornite (dark) resulting from the unmixing of a solid solution of these two minerals. 50. (from Van der Veen, Mineragraphy and Ore Deposition.) Fig. 6.—‘‘ Network ”’ texture resulting from the unmixing of a solid solution of pentlandite (light) in pyrrhotite (dark), with subsequent segregation of the pentlandite in the grain boundaries of the pyrrhotite. 18-6. Sudbury, Ontario. (from Van der Veen, Minera- graphy and Ore Deposition.) Pirate II. Fig. 1.—‘‘ Emulsion ”’ texture of chalcopyrite ex-solution bodies in sphalerite. New Thologolong, Vic. 84. (From Edwards, Aust. Inst. Min. Met. Proc., 143-4, 1946.) Fig. 2.—Residuals of pyrite (white), partly replaced by chalcopyrite (light grey) and bornite (dark grey). The bornite has possibly unmixed from solid solution in the chalcopyrite, and segregated by solid diffusion in the grain boundaries of the chalcopyrite. North Lyell Mine, Tas. 290. (From Edwards, Aust. Inst. Min. Met. Proc., 114, 1939.) Fig. 3.—Coarse ex-solution intergrowth of hematite (light) with ilmenite (dark). Olary, South Australia. 134. (From Edwards, Aust. Inst. Min. Met. Proc., 110, 1938.) Fig. 4.—The same, the ilmenite base magnified to show the seriate arrangement of smaller * hematite ex-solution bodies between the rows of larger ex-solution bodies of hematite (lower edge). 356. (From Edwards, Aust. Inst. Min. Met. Proc., 110, 1938.) Fig. 5.—The same, a larger hematite ex-solution body magnified to show the seriate arrangement of ilmenite ex-solution bodies that have unmixed from it. 356. (From Edwards, Aust. Inst. Min. Met. Proc., 110, 1938.) ; Fig. 6.—Ex-solution intergrowth of ilmenite lamellae (dark grey) in the (111) planes of magnetite> now largely oxidized to hematite (white). Warramba, W.A. 150. (From Edwards, Aust. Inst. Min. Met. Proc., 110, 1938.) Pruate III. Fig. 1.—Granular intergrowth of ilmenite (dark) and magnetite (now largely oxidized to hematite), resulting from the complete unmixing and segregation of an ilmenite-magnetite solid solution. Wannamal, W.A. x70. (from Edwards, Aust. Inst. Min. Met. Proc., 110, 1938.) Fig. 2.—Segregation veins of chalcopyrite (white) forming in an ex-solution intergrowth of chalcopyrite and sphalerite. Conrad, N.S.W. x66. Fig. 3.—Ex-solution intergrowth of tetrahedrite lamellae (white) in the (111) planes of bornite. Pine Vale, Q’ld. x<306. (From Edwards, Aust. Inst. Min. Met. Proc., 143, 1946.) Fig. 4.—Ex-solution intergrowth of chalcopyrite lamellae (white) in the (111) planes of bornite. Pine Vale, Q’ld. x88. (From Edwards, Aust. Inst. Min. Met. Proc., 143, 1946.) Fig. 5.—Corroded pyrite, with some traces of cubic form, partly replaced by enclosing sphalerite. Rosebery, Tas. x<210. (From Stillwell, Aust. Inst. Min. Met. Proc., 94, 1934.) Fig. 6.—Cassiterite crystals (hard medium grey) corroded and enclosed by stannite (light grey),. in gangue. North Valley lode, Mt. Bischoff, Tas. x57. 46 Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. A. B. EDWARDS. PuatTe IV. 1.—Lamellar intergrowth of marcasite (grey) and carbonate (black) formed from pyrrhotite which had undergone translation twinning (cf. Fig. 5, below). Consolidate Mine, Irvinebank, Qld. x66. (from Edwards, Textures of the Ore Minerals.) 2.—Segregation vein of ex-solved chalcopyrite traversing an ex-solution intergrowth of sphalerite (dark grey), stannite (medium grey) and chalcopyrite (white spots). Where the vein traverses the band of stannite bodies, it contains small areas of cassiterite (‘‘ needle tin ’’) formed by the breakdown of the stannite. Conrad Mine, N.S.W. x66. 3.—Pyrrhotite (grey) filling fractures in arsenopyrite (white). Dreadnought Lode, Renison Bell, Tas. 110. (From Stillwell and Edwards, Aust. Inst. Min. Met. Proc., Nos. 131-132, 1943.) 4.—Gold veins (white) filling fractures in pyrite, and to some extent replacing the pyrite. La Mascotte Mine, Dart River, Vic. 220. (From Edwards, Textures of the Ore Minerals.) 5.—Veins of native bismuth (white) in molybdenite that has been twinned by pressure. Wolfram Camp, Q’ld. (Cf. Fig. 1, above.) x70. (From Edwards, Textures of the Ore Minerals.) % ee et BY, S pars 3 "peer eat Vee a eee OS ke 4h oo ABD, GM 4 va i Bie oh RE % Wuedwp Gay? A y mamemepeney SEY BORG peer Lk, A . - . aa \ pNSe ay “3 jg ty 78. OF ik - ss oS eo av eee aE Oh FY, : a Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. LDXXXV, 1952, Plate I LR + Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. LXXXV, 1952, Plate II i J . r . . \ 4 c ‘ eee a 4 1 on pe ; a 1 “ . % Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. LXXXV, 1952, Plate III — pommert Se Oh Sd Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. LXXXV, 1952, Plate IV oA ye rab ee o mi SEISMICITY OF AUSTRALIA. By T. N. BuRKE-GAFFNEY, 8.J. (Communicated by D. J. K. O’Conne tt, S.J.) Manuscript received, June 12, 1951. Read, July 4, 1951. Since the first settlement of Australia more than 500 earth tremors are known to have been felt in various parts of the Continent, exclusive of a remark- able series of 2,540 felt in Tasmania between 1883 and 1886. It is highly probable that many more have occurred, which either were not at any time reported, or not reported in any of the sources of which use was made in this enquiry. The sources are: the Seismological Bulletins of Adelaide, 1921-41; of Brisbane, 1937-++ ; of Melbourne, 1929-39; of Perth, 1929+; of Riverview, 1909+ ; of Sydney, 1930-45 ; the Reports of the Australasian Association for the Advancement of Science, Vols. [IV-XIV, where 338 tremors are reported, 210 of which were collected by G. F. Dodwell from South Australia ; it is possible that greater numbers from other States would have been included had there been equally enthusiastic collectors to report them. For the few tremors large enough to have been recorded outside Australia, use has also been made of the Bulletins of Batavia (Djakarta), Christchurch, Wellington (N.Z.) and Manila, and of Gutenberg and Richter’s ‘‘ Seismicity of the Earth’’. These sources have been supplemented by Press reports and by special papers on particular tremors, acknowledged in the references. Only those tremors are included here for which an epicentre could be determined with reasonable certainty, and then only when the epicentre is not beyond the Continental Shelf. Earthquakes, therefore, originating in the Banda Sea or in the region off the north-west coast of Australia are excluded, even when great enough to have been felt at Darwin, Broome or other places in that area. For those tremors reported in the years before which instrumental recording was available, the epicentres have been determined by drawing isoseismal lines, based upon the Modified Mercalli Scale of Intensities. These intensities were deduced from the reports received from observers on the spot, which are included in the notes to the Reports of the A.A.A.S., and which comprise such effects as rumbling noises, rattling windows, displacement of objects, falling plaster and so on. Evidently such reports depend on the subjective impressions of the observers and in some few cases—remarkably few, indeed—the reports were so discordant that isoseismals based upon them could not be drawn. This method gives an indication of the region of the epicentre, but does not serve to locate it to high precision. For tremors for which data are obtainable from Station Bulletins, epicentres have been determined by stereographic projection. Where three, or more, stations have recorded. the tremor, this presents no difficulty ; where only two stations have recorded a tremor, use has been made of press reports to confirm the epicentre so determined. In a few cases an epicentre is given based upon the readings of a single station. This has only been attempted when the records G 48 T. N. BURKE-GAFFNEY. EPICENTRES ACCORDING TO STATES. (Where magnitudes are not given, the place where the intensity was greatest and its value there on the M.M. Scale, is given in the last column.) Date. 1883, July 1886, June July 1887, April April 1889, Feb. 1890, July 1891, Aug. Sept. 1893, Aug. 1897, May 1902, May Sept. Sept. Sept. 1904, Sept. 1905, Aug. 1937, Oct. 1939, Mar. May June 1942, Feb. 1948, Aug. 1886, Nov. 1887, July 1888, July 1912, Jan. 1919, Aug. 1921, May 1922, Feb. 1925, Dec. 1930, Oct. 1931, Mar. 1932, May June 1933, Jan. 1934, Jan. Jan. Nov. Nov. Nov. Nov. Nov. Nov. 1935, Dec. South Australia. Epicentre. Qual. | Mag. Remarks. 18S. 138-8 E. c Mt. Barker. V. 5 139 c Mt. Barker. III. 5 138:°5 c Blyth, Hoyleton. III. 139 Cc Terowie, Farrell’s Flat. IV. 137 c Pt. Lincoln, Kadina. IV. 9 139 Cc Adelaide and Suburbs. III. 1 139 c Terowie. IV. 138-5 c Hawker, Wilson. IV. 5 139 c Gawler, Roseworthy. III. 2, 139 Cc Eudunda, Kapunda. III. 139 Cc All over State; VIII at Blackport. Epicentre by Hogben. Dodwell gives 36°-98S. 139°:3 E. -7 138°7 Cc Carrieton, Orroroo. V. -8 138-8 c Auburn, Redhill. IV. 3 137-8 c Warooka. VI. Dodwell’s epi-- centre. *3 137°8 c Aftershock. -8 138-5 c Hawker. IV. -2 139-1 ‘s Lyndoch, Nairne. V. -0 132-5 b 6% | Epicentre from data.of Adel., Bris., Riv. a) 138-0 b 63 | From data of Adel., Melb., Riv. -4 138 Cc 4 From data of Adel., Riv. -5 138-5 Cc 4 From data of Adel., Riv. °5 136 c 43 From data of Adel., Riv. 137 b 6 From data of Adel., Bris., Riv. New South Wales. -8 146-8 Cc Yass. VII. -3 147 c Cannonbar, Girilambone. VI. °5 150-5 c Baw Baw, Berrima. IV. -5 150-5 c 34 | Bega. Epicentre by H. F. Pigot. -5 150-7 Cc 4 From Riv., and press reports. 145 c 43 | From Riv., and local reports. 150 Cc 34 | From Riv., and local reports. 152 Cc 44 | From Riv., and local reports. -5 149-0 b 54 From Melb. and Riv. 150 c 34 From Riv., and local reports. °5 143-8 Cc 4 From Riv., and local reports. *5 143-8 Cc 34 Aftershock. -8 139-5 b 41 From Melb. and Riv. -8 139-5 Cc 32 From Melb. and Riv. -8 139-5 b 4} From Melb. and Riv. -9 150°0 b 44 From Melb., Perth, Riv. -9, 150-0 Cc 34 Aftershock. °5 149-5 b 54 From Adel., Melb., Perth, Riv. -5 149-5 Cc 3 Aftershock. °5 149-5 c 34 | Aftershock. °5 149-2 c 44 From Adel., Melb., Riv. om) 150-5 Cc 3 From Riv. and local reports. SEISMICITY OF AUSTRALIA. 49 EPICENTRES ACCORDING TO STATES.. New South Wales.—Continued. Time Date. (U.T.) Epicentre. Qual. | Mag. Remarks. hm s 2 a 1938, Mar. 24 | 20 03 33 | 35-58. 146-0 E. b 54 | From Adel.,‘Melb., Bris., Riv. June 27 | 22 38 47 | 30-4 151-8 c 41 | From Bris., Riv. 1940, Sept. 21 | 14 54 46 | 35-4 149-2 Cc From Riv. and local reports. 1947, May 5 | 04 43 48 | 35 149-5 Cc 4 From Riv. and local reports.- May 5 | 04 46 2 35 149-5 @ Aftershock. May 5 | 04 57 4 35 149-5 c Aftershock. Sept. 25 | 10 56 27 | 34 148-6 € 4 From Riv. and local reports. 1949, Mar. 10 | 22 30 33 | 34-8 149-3 b 44 From Bris. and Riv. Mar. 11 | 03 33 02 | 34-8 149-3 Ce 34 | Aftershock. Mar. 16 | 13 24 06 | 34-8 149-3 @ 3 Aftershock. Victoria and Tasmania. 1883, Apr., to 4] 154 e 2,540 shocks, felt in Tasmania, 1886, Dec. greatest VI. Epicentre by | | Hogben. 1885, May 12 | 23 50 4] 154 c One of above; VI at Wilson’s | | Prom. July 2 | 16 20 41 154 Cc VI at Flinders. 1900, May 27 | 02 25 | 38-5 145-8 c Foster, Sassafras. V. 1902, Dee. 22 | 12 45 | 38 144-8 c Ballarat. V. 1903, Apr. 6] 11 52 fe) 144 c Warrnambool. VII. Epicentre by Gregory and Baracchi. Apr. 8 | 09 30 39 144 Cc Aftershock. 1922, Apr. 10 | 10 47 39 | 40 147-5 b 43 | From Adel., Christchurch, Riv. Wellington. 1929, Dec. 28 | 01 22 43 | 40:5 148-5 b 5 From Adel., Chrisc., Melb., Riv., Well. 1932, Nov. 2 | 13 22 32 | 38-3 145 c Mornington. V. Epicentre by | Holmes. 1939, Apr. 3 | 12 59 41 | 38 144-5 c From Melb., Riv. 1944, Nov. 2 | 14 05 43 | 38-0 145-9 Cc Cerberean Range. IV. Epi- centre by Gaskin. 1946, Sept. 14 |, 19 48 41 | 40 147 Cc 5 From Riv. and local reports. Queensland. 1913, May 1 | 16 20 17 | 27 152-5 c + From Riv. and local reports. Dec. 18 | 13 54-0 20 147 b 4 Epicentre by Gutenberg. 1918, June 16 / 18 14 15 | 24 154 ce 6 Epicentre by P2zgot. 1935, Apr. 12 | O1 32 24 | 26-0 151-1 Cc 5 Epicentre by Bryan and | Whitehouse. 1947, June 11 | 10 03 13 | 25-5 152-5 c Maryborough. V. Epicentre by Jones. Western Australia, Northern Territory, Central Australia. 1929, Aug. 16 | 21 28 25 | 16-2 121-7 b 7 Epicentre from I.8.8. 1941, Apr. 29 | 01 36 00 | 27-0 117-0 b 64 | From Bris., Perth, Riv. May 4 | 22 07 28 | 26-0 137-0 b 54 | From Adel., Bris., Riv. May 4 | 22 31 50 | 26-0 137-0 c 5 | Aftershock. May 4 | 23 24 10 | 26-0 137-0 Cc Aftershock. June 27 | 07 55 49 | 26-0 137-5 a 64 | Epicentre by Gutenberg. June 27 | 08 40 36 | 26:0 137-5 c Aftershock. June 27 | 12 40 30 | 26-0 137-5 Cc Aftershock. June 27 | 14 40 31 | 26:0 137-5 Cc Aftershock. 50 T. N. BURKE-GAFFNEY. gave clear P and S phases, making possible a reliable calculation of the epicentral distance, and when press reports were confirmatory. For the few epicentres for which overseas reports were available, the graphical method of Gutenberg and Richter (1937) was used as a check. It has happened occasionally that the origin times obtained from the individual bulletins did not agree very well. This necessitated a reinterpretation of the phases reported and the adoption of an origin time which fitted best with every report. In one particular case, that of the Gayndah (Q.) tremor of April 12, 1935, the individual origin times were quite irreconcilable. This tremor has been the subject of a paper by W. H. Bryan and F. W. Whitehouse (1938), —ModD.MERCALL/ INTE N. MAGNITUDE Fig. 1—Australian Epicentres in which the epicentre was determined after an investigation on the spot. In the light of the information there provided, the Riverview seismograms were reexamined and it was found possible so to interpret them that an origin time was obtained not noticeably different from that of the authors. By interpreting the phases reported by other stations with reference to this origin time it was possible to obtain their epicentral distances and thence, by stereographic projection, the epicentre. Not unnaturally, this agreed closely with that of Bryan and Whitehouse. | Epicentres already determined and published have been included in this list, confirmed, where data made such confirmation possible, by the graphic method of Gutenberg and Richter (1937), or by stereographic projection. These SEISMICITY OF AUSTRALIA. 51 epicentres are: that of the Tasmanian series of 1883-86, by Hogben ; of 1897, May 10, by Hogben and Dodwell (independently); of 1902, September 19 (Warooka), by Dodwell; of 1903, April 6 (Warrnambool), by Gregory and Baracchi; of 1912, January 17 (Bega) and of 1918, June 6 (S. Queensland), by Pigot; of 1929, August 16, in the International Seismological Summary ; _ of 1932, September 2 (Mornington), by Holmes; of 1935, April 12 (Gayndah), by Bryan and Whitehouse ; of 1941, June 27 (Finke), by Gutenberg ; of 1944, November 2, by Gaskin ; of 1947, June 11 (Maryborough), by Jones. The quality of the epicentres is indicated by the letters a, 6, c. Those classified as a are very good; bis good; ¢ is only fair. . The intensities of the earlier tremors are given in terms of the Modified Mercalli Scale, that plotted being the greatest reported for each tremor. For later tremors magnitudes are given, determined from Richter’s tables (1935), where the epicentral distance is less than 500 Km., otherwise by the method of Gutenberg (1945a, 19455), from M or P as was most convenient. As magnitudes depend upon ground motion, only those stations—Riverview and some overseas stations—which give earth amplitudes in the Bulletins could be used for this determination. According to most recent theory (Gutenberg and Richter, 1949), the energy released by an earthquake is related to the magnitude as shown by the equation : log K=12+1-8M where E is the energy, in ergs, and M is the magnitude. On the accompanying map, epicentres are represented by circles graded according to intensity, or magnitude, open circles for Modified Mercalli Intensities, closed circles for absolute magnitudes. It is probable that the whole area considered is covered down to magnitude 6; for smaller magnitudes, those areas around the recording stations are best covered—within 10° of them for magnitudes of about 5. New South Wales is probably covered for magnitudes, of little more than 4. Smaller tremors at distances greater than 10° from any station are not likely to have been recorded at all. As an indication of the area covered by any one station, it may be noted that the number of tremors in the Australian region recorded by Riverview, between 1909 and 1950, is: from New South Wales, 85 ; from Central Australia, 9; from Queensland, 6; from South Australia, 6; from Victoria, 5; from Western Australia, 4; from Tasmania, 2. For purposes of comparison the total number of shocks of all magnitudes reported from Australia generally and from N.S.W. in particular is set against the average annual numbers through- out the world in the following table. World, Magnitude. | Number per Australia, N.S.W., | Year. 41 Years. 41 Years. 7-8 13 1 = 6-6-9 108 6 eu 5-5-9 800 8 3 4-4-9 6,200 18 12 3-3:9 49,000 1] 11 This table includes only those for which epicentres have been determined ; a great many lesser tremors occur, as may be seen from those recorded at River- view alone. Nevertheless, it is evident that Australia is one of the stable regions A2- -T. N. BURKE-GAFFNEY. of the earth ; even the seismic activity of the Great Rift Valley, from Spencer Gulf to Lake Eyre, which is the region most subject to disturbance in Australia, is negligible compared with the activity of the minor seismic zones of the earth. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT. The writer is greatly indebted to Father O’Connell, Director of Riverview Observatory, for advice and encouragement in this investigation. SUMMARY. Epicentres are given for all Australian earth tremors for which sufficient. observations are available. Where possible, magnitudes are given on the Gutenberg-Richter Scale, or intensities on the Modified Mercalli Scale. Australian seismicity is compared with that of the world as a whole. REFERENCES. . Australasian Association for the Advancement of Science, Reports 1892-1913, Vols. [V-XIV. Bryan, W. H., and Whitehouse, F. W., 1938. The Gayndah Earthquake of 1935. University of Queensland, Geol. Dept., Papers 1.6. Gaskin, A. J., 1945. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vic., 58, n.s., Pt. II, 65. Gutenberg, B., 1945a. Amplitudes of Surface Waves and Magnitudes of Earthquakes. Bull. Seism. Soc. Am., 35, 3. —-——————-- 1945b. Amplitudes of P, PP, and S and Magnitudes of Earthquakes. Bull. Seism. Soc. Am., 35, 57. Gutenberg, B., and Richter, C. F., 1937. Materials for the Study of Deep Focus Earthquakes. Bull. Seism. Soc. Am., 27, 157. —-—________________—._ 1949. Seismicity of the Earth. Holmes, W. M., 1933. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vic., 45, n.s., Pt. IT, 150. Jones, O. A., 1948. The Maryborough Earthquake of 1947. University of Queensland, Geol. Dept. Papers III.6. Richter, C. F., 1935. An Instrumental Magnitude Scale. Bull. Seism. Soc. Am., 25, 1. CONTOUR TRENCH FORMATIONS IN UPLAND PLAINS OF NEW SOUTH WALES. By C. T. MCELROY, B.Sc. With Plate V and two text-figures. Manuscript received, June 29, 1951. Read, August 1, 1951, I. INTRODUCTION. (a) General. The features to be described consist of trench-like depressions in the general land surface, in areas of gentle slope, in saddles or on flat ridges. The trenches were first observed by the writer in the north-east section of Happy Jack’s Plain, 33 miles north of Mt. Kosciusko. Viewed from a distance, they stand out with remarkable clarity on an otherwise uniformly grassed slope, the strong degree of orientation here emphasizing the extraordinary nature of the phenomenon, as shown in Plate V, Fig. 1. In Plate V, Fig. 2, is shown a close-up of the trenches in Fig. 1. The following account is based on seventeen field trips, and laboratory ‘ studies carried out between January, 1949, and May, 1950. The accompanying locality map indicates the known distribution of the trenches, viz. Hernani, Madden’s Plains, Little Forest and Kiandra to Mt. Kosciusko. (b) Previous References. Andrews (1901) has briefly referred to an occurrence in the Kiandra district. Davis (1936) records the trenches at Madden’s Plains. Costin (1948) has also recorded an occurrence near Mt. Kosciusko below Seaman’s Hut, which may be identical with these features. II. NATURE OF THE FORMATION. (a) General Properties of all Occurrences. (i) Topography. In all cases the formations occur in naturally grassed, treeless plains, which are usually the gathering grounds of swamps or streams, or, as in the Main Range occurrences in the Monaro, on well grassed ridges and saddles. The areas are elevated, considered on a regional basis with respect to the adjoining country, altitudes ranging from 1,200 feet to nearly 7,000 feet above sea level. Where the slope of these lands is less than 44 degrees, the trenches may occur. The trenches may be considered as being of two main types, which grade into each other, these being (i) long and narrow, disposed along the contour on gentle slopes with typical dimensions 20 feet long, 1 foot wide and 9 inches deep; and (ii) broad and irregular in outline, occurring on more level surfaces, as in saddles, or minor horizontal portions of long slopes, with typical dimensions 6 feet long, 4 feet wide and 6 inches deep. The trenches occur in groups, individual trenches being from a few inches to a few feet apart. 54 Cc. T. MCELROY. In general, it may be stated that, with increasing slope up to this maximum of 44 degrees, at which trenches no longer form, the depressions are (a) more strongly oriented along the contour ; (b) shallower and narrower. Further, as a uniform slope is descended and the moisture content of the soil increases, the depressions merge into normal minor surface irregularities and lose their identity. At the top of the slopes in the most thoroughly drained areas, the maximum depth of development is attained. 145° aoe eee Little Fore Kiandra VICTORIA M™ Kosuusko Fig. 1.—Locality map of New South Wales showing distribution of Contour Trench Formations. The orientation with respect to contour is simply demonstrated by the fact that after moderate falls of rain there is no overflow from the completely filled trenches of uniform depth, these observations having been made on trenches 40 yards long. On level surfaces, where ideally there are no contours, the trenches become broad and irregular in outline, or if elongate, are sinuous. These may be considered to coincide with the closed contours of actual minor surface irregularities. Thus the name ‘ Contour Trench Formation ” is valid for the different modes of occurrence of the feature. (ii) Ecology. The very existence of the natural plains is an interesting study, though beyond the scope of the present writing. The relationships of tree line, grasses and bog vegetation is basically due to the balance between soil moisture and aeration. The following is an indication of the relation of botanical types to topography, taking the Little Forest plant assemblage as an example. CONTOUR TRENCH FORMATIONS IN UPLAND PLAINS OF N.S.W. 55 The dominant plant species in this area are: (a) On normal surface level : (1) Various species of Banksia, Hakea, Sprengelia and other small shrubs over whole area of slope. (2) At top of slope and on crests of low ridges. Hucalyptus gummifera (Bloodwood) in both mature and stunted forms. (3) On higher parts of slope the sedges Tricostularia paludosa and Leptocarpus tenac. (4) On lower part, Blandfordia nobilis. (5) In swampy areas, Charizandra spherocephala. (6) On the floor of the depressions : (1) Up slope: Goodenia paniculata, Selaginella uligmosa and water lily types. (2) Down slope: Charizandra spherocephala, Lepidosperma concavum, Schoenus brevifolius, with the upslope types above subordinate. This relationship is as expected, the more lowly forms being in their natural habitat of more poorly aerated soil. Davis (1936) lists detailed assemblages in the Madden’s Plains area. (iii) Climate. The Hastern Highlands come under the Koppen Classification Cfa and Cfb. Average annual rainfalls of the areas studied vary from 35 inches to 80 inches. In winter all areas are subject to very heavy frosts and strong winds, with moderate temperatures in summer. The Monaro and Northern Tablelands Groups are also subject to winter snows. The effective rainfall is high, the thickly grassed gentle slopes reducing run-off and surface evaporation. The resultant impeded drainage tends to develop a meadow soil profile. (iv) The Indwidual Formation. It is convenient to divide the type of individual formation into three classes, termed «, 8 and y. a-types may be considered as the elongated trenches following the contours on slopes varying from 4 to 44 degrees. These range in size from 2 feet long, 6 inches wide and 2 inches deep to as much as 250 feet long, 6 feet wide and 8 inches deep or 150 feet long, 2 feet wide and 18 inches deep. B-types are trenches showing no orientation, usually fairly short, perhaps up to 30 feet in length. These types may be arcuate, U-shaped or sigmoid and occur on level surfaces or slopes up to 4 degree. y-types occur more typically on level areas than 6-types. They are relatively broad and may be almost equidimensional in plan, with width of up to 30 feet. Outline may be square, rectangular, subcircular or quite irregular, some being racquet-shaped as in Plate V, Fig. 3, or even cruciform. Both 68 and y-types have depths ranging up to 18 inches, generally deeper than associated «-types. When a small patch of B- or y-types occurs in an «-area, it is found that it is always associated with a local decrease in gradient to 4 degree or less. The walls of the trenches are generally vertical, although some have been observed at angles up to 10 degrees from the vertical. The up-slope wall is sometimes less nearly vertical than the down-slope wall, probably due to a certain amount of overwash of silty material in very wet conditions. (v) Soil Profile. All occurrences lie within the Eastern Podsol Belt (Prescott, 1944). Some of the Monaro Group are classified as High Moor Soils. This, however, is a regional classification, from which there are local variations. Textures of surface soils range from medium clay to coarse sand, being locally somewhat heavier in trench than on immediately adjacent surface. 56 Cc. T. MCELROY. TABLE 1A. Details of Individual Occurrences. ——_ eS Regional Physiographic Significa Group. Situation. Climate. Vegetation. Location. Trenek Type. Monaro. In a 50 mile long belt from | Precipitation 62 in. at | Eucalyptus pauciflora | (1) 3 to 5 miles north od | Kiandra, south to near Kiandra to 80 in. (Snow Gum) on of Kiandra between Kosciusko. See Snow Lease at Kosciusko. Snow ridges, but sup- main road and Map for general locations. cover 4 to 6 months. pressed at 6,000 feet. Eucumbene River. Altitudes from 4,500 feet Heavy frosts may Poa cespitosa (Snow 5 near Kiandra to 7,000 ft. at occur through whole Grass) is dominant = |—————W———__ Mt. Twynam. year. Winds ex- grass, with Celmisia | (2) % mile south of ¥ treme. longifolia (Snow- Tabletop Hut. daisy) abundant. Heaths and Sphag- |——@— num bogs at lower | (3) Happy Jack’s Plain, (od parts of slope. 9 miles west of Adaminaby, near Grey Mare track. (4)Farm Ridge, ¥ northern end. (5)High Peaks, Y Jagungal to Twynam. (6) Johnnie’s Plain, a 2 mile north-east of Chalet. Far South Coast | On Tabletop Plateau, area 6 | Estimated rainfall | Hucalyptus gummifera | (1) 4 mile north-west 6B (Little Forest). square miles, 8 miles north- 60 in. . Prevailing (Bloodwood), both of Little Forest west of Milton. Altitude strong westerly normal and mallee Trig. 1,800 ft.; plateau bounded winds. Heavy growth, on ridges. by cliffs 500 ft. high. frosts uncommon. Sedges, Tricostu-—}———_____- No snow recorded. laria, Leptocarpus, | (2) 100 yds. south from a etc., on higher (1) above. slopes ; Blandfordia, Charizandra, ete.,_ |_—-———————__——_ on lower slopes. See | (3) 4 mile south of (1) On Section II(a) (Ecol- above, on opposite ogy) (ii) for details. side of swamp. (4) 14 miles south from (04 Little Forest Trig. (5) 14 miles east-south- a and * east from Little Forest Trig. Near South Coast | On Illawarra Plateau. Natural | Rainfall 59 in. Dense | As at Little Forest. (1) 400 yds. west of of (Madden’s Plains). plains, extending 2 mls. along mists drift across road, 38? mls. south west side of Prince’s High- from seaward in all from Sydney. way, from 37 mls. south of seasons. Sydney to 4 ml. north of Sublime Point. Altitude 1,200 ft. Cliffs and steep slopes drop to sea 4 ml. to east. Northern Table- | On Dorrigo Tableland, altitude | Rainfall 35 in. Five | Trenched areas tree- | (1) Hernani, near “The a R lands. 00 ft. months’ heavy frosts.. less. Dense natural Glen ’? homestead. ik Often snow in winter grass cover. % months. s 2 5 eee a aS CONTOUR TRENCH FORMATIONS IN UPLAND PLAINS OF N.S.W. TABLE 1B. Details of Individual Occurrences. Local Topographic Situation. Across small flat ridge sloping at 1°, terminated by a gentle rise, as in Text-fig. 2 (a). ees Flat open areas. On small ‘‘ terrace ’’ below 4° slope, as in Text-fig. 2 (b). On rocky flat area. —a——= Exposed ridges and saddles. ** Terrace ’’, 25 yds. wide, as in Text-fig. 2 (c). mifera. 3° slope. ee Flat ridge, sloping axially at 2°. —s—s= On ‘“‘ terraces ”’ Text-fig. 2 (d). on slope as in On slope as in Text-fig. 2 (e). Uniform slopes up to 33°. Semi-saucer shaped area, 100 yards wide, slopes of 3°. Parent Material. Basalt, Tertiary and Recent al- luvial deposits, and Ordovician slate. | Very acid granite. Granite. Basalt. Amphibolite and granite. Granite. Upper Marine sandstone and grit. Do. Hawkesbury sand- stone. Tertiary basalt and (?) Silurian slate. 57 Surface Soil. Colour. Dark grey. Dark grey. Medium brown. Dark grey. Do. Light brown- grey. Texture. Peaty loam. Peaty loam. Gritty loam. Sandy loam. Do. Loamy clay. pH. 5:50 5°55 5:9 5:50 Comments. Terminal rise of ridge casts doubf on possibility of appreciable — soli- fluction. Depths of trenches vary from 4 in. to 8 in.; up to 30 ft. square. yi Considered ‘“‘ type area’’. Excellent development. Ten yards up-slope from trenches are granite boulders 3 in. below surface. Soil profile te depth 24 in., is identical 75 yds. along contour from trenched area, in identical topography, but no suggestion of trenches. Trenches in soil surrounding and covering blocks of detrital basalt, solid rock being exposed in bottoms of some trenches 8 in. deep. Often dry ; sun-cracked and flaked ; observed scouring action of high velocity winds. Not typical of Monaro Group ; relief of trenches subdued by thick grass cover. Only record of trenches occurring among trees. Trenches probably preceded tree growth. A 4 ft. deep cut was made across & trench; no depression of lower soil horizons observed. Complete laboratory analyses carried out of soil profiles (a) in and (6) adjacent to trenches, and (c) among trees 120 yds. distant. Some typical results given in Table 2. Exemplifies successive relationships between angle of slope and occur- rence of trenches. Trenches up to 50 yds. long, 12 ft. wide, 9 in. deep, formed on shallow soil on sandstone. Trenches up to 85 yds. long, then a short ‘“‘ cross-tie’’, and then a further trench along same contour. Large pit dug, 6 ft. 6 in. deep; soil horizons straight. Specific gravity determinations show no compaction vertically or hoti- zontally. Some trenches ploughed under 15 years ago; sown with cocksfoot and paspalum ; no recurrence. 56 Cc. T. MCELROY. CONTOUR TRENCH FORMATIONS IN UPLAND PLAINS OF N.S.w. 57 TABLE 1A. TABLE 1B. Details of Individual Occurrences. Details of Individual Occurrences. | F p é | Surface Soil. Regional Physiographic Signi 1 Topographic c Group. Situation. Climate. Vegetation. Location. Te ovals Lan oete i poe eteeracr,, Typ, Colour. Texture. pH. ae Ganda south a noe eet 80 in, ges pane a aah H He ules fe iin a Across small flat ridge sloping at | Basalt, Tertiary | Dark grey. Peaty loam. == Terminal rise of ridge casts doubt on Kosciusko. “See Snow Lease at Kosciusko. Snow tidges, but sup- sat Toad. Parti 3 enna 2 Xa) sou Heaee: ie laeee its Hos pulty Zofeanoreoieple See Map for general locations. cover 4 to 6 months. pressed at 6,000 feet. Eucumbene River. Ce agen : | ade Onion teing Hirction: Altitudes from 4,500 feet Heavy frosts may Poa cespitosa (Snow 3 | slate. per an to 7,000 ft. at occur Worouehin Hele Grass) de cominen’ | . Twynam. year. inds ex- grass, wi misia | (2)% mile south of Y Flat open areas. Very acid granite. Depths of trenches vary from 4 in. treme. patrols acon. Tabletop Hut. to 8 in.; up to 30 ft. square. Heaths and Sphag- = num bogs at lower | (3) Happy Jack’s Plain, a (Qn small “ terrace ”’ below 4° slope, | Granite. Dark grey. Peaty loam. 5-50 Considered ‘‘type area”. Excellent parts of slope. 9 miles west of as in Text-fig. 2 (5). development. Ten yards up-slope Adaminaby, near from trenches are granite boulders Grey Mare track. 3 in. below surface. Soil profile te depth 24 in., is identical 75 yds. along contour from trenched area, in identical topography, buf 10 suggestion of trenches. (4)Farm Ridge, if Qn rocky flat area. Basalt. Trenches in soil surrounding and northern end. covering blocks of detrital Basalt, solid rock being exposed in bottoms of some trenches 8 in. deep. (5)High Peaks, i Exposed ridges and saddles. Amphibolite and Often dry ; sun-cracked and flaked ; Jagungal to granite. observed scouring action of high Twynam. velocity winds. (6) Johnnie’s Plain, a “Terrace”, 25 yds. wide, as in | Granite. Medium brown. | Gritty loam. 5-55 Not typical of Monaro Group ; relief }% mile north-east Text-fig. 2 (c). of trenches subdued by thick grass of Chalet. cover. Far South Coast | On Tabletop Plateau, area 6 | Estimated Tainfall | Hucalyptus gummifera | (1) 4+ mile north-west f At top of flat ridge. Trenches | Upper Marine | Dark = i * I us i Al : grey. Sandy loam. Only record of trenches occurring ee ine ins | tetepeyatan || Suen Teed aati | ote, aad GR ora Seen ast oo 1,800 ft.; plateau bounded winds. Heavy rowth, on_ ridges. es ie orlt. u fs s by cliffs 500 ft. high. frosts uncommon. edges, Tricostu- No snow recorded. laria, Leptocarpus, | (2) 100 yds. south from a ** slope. Do. Do. Do. — A 4 ft. deep cut was made across & etc., on higher (1) above. trench; no depression of lower plovEs i ERE soil horizons observed. arizandra, _ete., s La Be (3) Gazi south or) a Tht ridge, sloping axially at 2°. Do. Do. Do. 5-9 Coss ee Tahoratory, analyses ay col- above, on 0) ogy) (ii) for details. side of swamp. adjacent to trenches, and (c) among trees 120 yds. distant. Some typical results given in Table 2. 4) 14 miles south from % On “te By i Do. Do. _— Exemplifies successive relationships @ rite Forest Trig. Textfig. 2 (2), STi 3 between angle of slope and occur- tence of trenches. —. : ~ 4 5 ill ith- On slo i 3 ), Do. — Trenches up to 50 yds. long, 12 ft. s) oe Seat ttle pass HALAS (OY HSE Oe wide, 9 in. deep, formed on ‘shallow Forest Trig. soil on sandstone. a — — a — een eae | y Na Renee Sn Tawar inteen. Natural ante por ae WED As at Little Forest. (1) pou ee Us Uniform slopes up to 34°. Berean sand- | Do. Do. 5-30 arene] toe One a i west side of Prince’s High- | from seaward in all from Sydney. suas further trench along same contour. way, from 37 mls. south of | seasons. Large pit dug, 6 ft. 6 in. deep; Sydney to 4 ml. north of soil horizons straight. Speci Sublime Point. Altitude gravity determinations show 0 1,200 ft. Cliffs and steep compaction ‘vertically or fori planes drop to sea 4 ml. to zontally. east. = _—————— ee. =| — |__| ees Northern § Table- | On Dorrigo Tableland, altitude | Rainfall 35 in. Five | Trenched areas tree- | (1) Hernani, near “The u “l-saucer shaped 100 yards | Tertiar basalt | Light brown- | Loamy clay. 5-50 Some trenches ploughed under 16 lands. 3,700 ft. , r me id RECvaTea ya Shy, ; years ago; sown with cocksfoot F THLE hes Vos dese, per natural Glen ”” homestead. fe, slopes of $°. ae i) Silurian grey. and paspalum; no recurrence. months. —— 58 C. T. MCELROY. There is an increase in clay content down the profile, with marked textural change and strong mottling or ortstein development at about 20 inches, which is the normal height of the water table. Vegetation between trenches, principally grasses and sedges, is very dense, roots being abundant to a depth of several inches and offering considerable resistance to digging. The trench is relatively poorly grassed with little vegetative binding, the proportion of roots being approximately equal to that in the same horizon of the immediately adjacent profile. Structure of surface soil ranges from very poor to excellent crumb- structure. Organic matter determinations of the Little Forest soils were all less than 7%. Organic matter diminishes down the profile and is slightly higher in the trench. To depths ranging up to 6 feet 6 inches it has been proved that the glei, ortstein and other identifiable horizons are quite level, reflecting nothing of the surface irregularity. Parent material varies greatly, including sandstone, slate, granite and basalt. pH of over seventy samples, determined by electronic pH meter, shows the pH range of all horizons in all occurrences as between 5-0 and 6-3. There is usually a slight increase in pH down the profile, with either slightly higher or lower values in trench than adjacent. Colours of the soils range from dark grey and dark brown to light grey at the surface, and to orange-red and light grey at depths of a few feet. Free carbonate is absent from all profiles. The catenary development of the profile has not been investigated quanti- tatively, but it may be stated that texture becomes heavier and colouring deeper in a given horizon as the slope is descended. When the trenches do not occur at the top of gentle slopes, the B horizon up-slope is not clearly defined. However, on entering the trenched areas this horizon becomes markedly developed. The same general rule holds for ortstein layer development when present. (b) Distribution and Description of Individual Occurrences. In Tables 14 and 1B are shown brief details of some of the known occurrences of contour trench formations. (See p.p. 56-57). Table 2 shows results of analyses carried out on a typical soil profile from Little Forest, Location (3). TABLE 2. Analysis of a Tunical Soil Profile from Little Forest, Location (3). Mechanical Analysis. % | Exch. | Total % % % Sol. .| Cap. | Exch. Depth. Col. | Text.| pH. | O.M. N. Cl. | Salts. | M.E. | Bases Clay % M.E. | CS. FS. Si. + | R.Os. OA O.M. 0’- 3 M-Gr | SL 5:9 | 4-5 11 | 0-006 6-9 Be Th 9-2 | 17:6 0:6 3”- 6 Gr L 6-2 | 3-60 | 0-10 | 0-005] 0-05 2-5 | 0-37 | 33-5 | 34-9 | 10-1 | 14-8 1°4 6”-12 1-Gr SL 6-2 | 1-74 | 0-10 | 0-008} 0-04 4-3 | 0:39 | 33-9 | 35-1 | 10-1 | 16:8 1-7 20’-24” Y-Bn| SL Fed 3 4 | 0:004 5-6 | 38°3 5-2 | 18°2 1:3 Although in Table 2 mechanical analyses classify all samples as sandy loam, simple qualitative tests indicate an appreciable increase in apparent clay content descending the profile. At a depth of 21 inches is a well-developed ortstein layer 2 inches thick, consisting of limonite nodules ranging in size from 3 inch to 1 inch, forming, with associated quartz grit, 30 per cent. of the sample 21”—24”. However, only the fine earth fractions were analysed. No free carbonate is present. CONTOUR TRENCH FORMATIONS IN UPLAND PLAINS OF N.S.W. 59 C:N ratio for all samples in the area ranges from 10-1 to 34-1. Total phos- phorus, determined as such, is very low; e.g. sample 0-3" contains only 0:012% P. In addition to those shown organic matter content of several other surface samples were determined, none of which exceeded 7% O.M. Land Surface ~ Trenches Shallow soil cover Horizontal Scale : ea eS eS | SS. sity ~~~ 4 O 25 50 75 100 Yards Trenches S} Fig. 2.—Sections across contour trench formations. (See Table 1.) IIT. POSSIBLE ORIGINS OF THE FORMATIONS. The origin is considered from the viewpoint of initial development and subsequent enlargement. (a) Initial Development. (i) Man Made. This explanation is unacceptable because of the lack of purpose in the digging of trenches over such a wide area, varying from 0 to 18 inches in depth, and the gradation from «- to y-types. (ii) Animal Activity. Animal tracks could not have been responsible for @- or y-types, or for the great number of «-types often found adjacent. Initiation by eating out of grass roots by animals would require an improbable degree of selectivity in grazing. The tentative suggestion of Davis (1936), that crayfish may have initiated trenches by their burrowings, was later virtually abandoned by that writer (Davis, 1941). (iii) Water Erosion. Orientation along the contour of «-types, and irregular shapes of y-types is inconsistent with erosion due to water run-off. (iv) Fire-formed. The suggestion that, in grass fires, prevailing winds have caused to be burnt out groups of grass roots, ignores the strict relation to contour and degree of slope. 60 . C. T. MCELROY. (v) Jointing. Subsidence in pronounced parallel joints is not possible as soil horizons show no downward displacement, and the direction and spacing of joints of rocks in the area are unrelated to direction and spacing of trenches. (vi) Gilgar Formation. Gilgais are normally characterized by free carbonate in the B-horizon, relative vertical displacement of puff and shelf, and the sequence in formation of deep-cracking—infilling—wetting and expansion—wedging-up to leave depression. These factors are contrary to characteristics of Contour Trench Formations. | (vii) Sun Cracks. The formation of deep regular cracks due to contraction in drying out implies a very heavy texture, or high organic content as in peat bogs ; neither of these characteristics is typical of the Contour Trench Formation. (vill) Salt Pan Formation. Salt accumulation in trench sites with suppression of vegetation might be an initiating factor. However, analysis of Little Forest soils showed that content of chloride, carbonate, phosphate and exchangeable cations Ca, Mg, K and Na was small or very low. (ix) Seed Deposition. The suggestion has been put forward that, in the Kosciusko area, if a body of snow were ‘‘ sown” with wind-blown seeds, a rhythmic deposition (analogous to lines of litter left by the ebbing tide) might be set up by the daily recurrence of thawing as the snow line retreats up-slope. The lines of deposited seeds, which would tend to be along the contour, would initiate differential development of the vegetation, which might tend towards the development of depressions between the lines. If acceptable, this theory is nevertheless of limited application, as suitable masses of snow do not occur in other localities. (x) Solifluction. The theory that the Contour Trench Formation is due to some form of solifluction is a fairly obvious line of reasoning which merits serious consideration. Although, in general, slopes of 10 to 20 degrees and greater are associated with the phenomena of creep and mass wasting, it must be appreciated that, if the medium is in a sufficiently fluid condition, as may be the case when saturated from prolonged precipitation, gravitational movement may be initiated at very low angles. Initiation of movement by seismic activity might also be borne in mind as a possibility. Gravitational slumping was studied in many South Coast localities, on slopes of the order of 20 degrees. Strong parallelism along the contour is common. In many cases grass roots have been torn away and ‘“ terraces ”’ about one foot wide formed. In the Kosciusko area this feature frequently occurs on the steeper slopes. Frost-heave in such areas would doubtless be a very significant factor in this mechanism. The ‘‘ Parallel Ledge ”’ formation of Van der Merwe (1941) may have thus originated. Referring to slumping of soil on steep hillsides, Flint (1932) states: ‘‘ This process is responsible for some of the ‘sheep paths’ that so commonly contour the slopes in hilly pasture land.”’ It is possible that a tendency for slumping to develop on the gentle slopes where contour trenches form may result in some downslope movement of a given unit of soil, bound by a grass tussock. This unit, essentially a surface element, may move until the resistance to its progress is too great, e.g., it may strike another, more firmly established mags of grass roots. A lineation of such movements would give the parallelism of the «-type trenches. Against this theory we have that, in many localities, the sum of the areas of individual formations exceeds, by a factor of 2 or 3, the sum of the areas between trenches. This calls for considerable compaction. However, specific gravity determinations of Madden’s Plains soils show that all horizons examined of the surface and sub- surface soils among the trenches had a lower S.G. than on the untrenched ridge CONTOUR TRENCH FORMATIONS IN UPLAND PLAINS OF N.S.W. 61 at top of the slope. No compaction could have occurred in this instance. Similarly, no selective vertical compaction could have occurred as the mean S.G. of trench soil is less than adjacent soil, taken to a depth of 18 inches. If it be accepted that there is no compaction, it might be contended that there is large-scale successive migration down the slope of the upper root-bound part of the A horizon, the lower edge of the main migrating sheet being carried away in the central drainage system. Although possible for «-type trenches, this theory must break down when applied to 6-types and y-types, especially when groups of the latter may consist of trenches 30 feet wide separated by only 2 to 3 feet, on a horizontal surface and up to 50 yards away from the slightest slope. Further- more, although a perceptible steepening of slope often occurs below trenched terraces, which would assist solifluction, sometimes, as in Monaro Locality 1, there occurs at the end of the slope a rise, so that migrating soil could not in this case be transported away by the drainage system. (b) Subsequent Enlargement. All the foregoing theories have dealt only with the initiation of depressions, no matter how slight this may be. Assuming initiation, we now consider later stages. (i) Ecological Adjustment. In any depression formed, water will tend to lie, saturating the soil. Ultimately the depressions will be bordered by tussocks of the normal grasses, which are suppressed in the depressions where more lowly mossy types can flourish in the relatively anaerobic condition of the soil. Thus, for a-type trenches, the explanation of which is the real problem, differential growth of vegetation will be set up along the contour. Consider now the 8- and y-types. On a fairly level surface, water will lie in the minor surface irregularities always present. Ecological adjustments then occur as above. Indeed, y-type trenches are common to marsh soils in many parts of the world. It is their extreme development, their ability to dry out so as to appear as trenches, and the associated «-types that have made them worthy of note in the present discussion. (ii) Raindrop Action. The effects of impact of raindrops are expressed in vertical walls, the adjacent grass acting as a protective capping, and a general levelling of the relatively bare floor of the trench. (iii) Flooding Effects. In periods of excessive rain when all trenches are completely filled and there is a surface sheet of water moving downslope, any particles of soil stirred up by turbulence from the poorly grassed floor of the trench will be transferred either to the adjacent grassed strip or ultimately to the central drainage system. (iv) Hluviation. The possibility was considered of removal of the clay fraction from the trenches by a downward eluviating process, which would act most effectively in the poorly bound trench floor, and its downslope migration on meeting the plane of the mobile water table just above the heavier textured horizon. The results of mechanical analyses, however, indicate that this has not occurred, as the proportions of all fractions of the trench and adjacent profile are comparable. (v) Wind Action. The study of physics of particle movement in air stresses the importance of the part played by wind as an abrasive and transporting medium. The effect of wind in trench formation was directly observed in the High Peaks area north of Kosciusko. Here gale force winds were observed to remove fine particles from the cracked and flaking bare floors of trenches. Fine quartz grains from decomposing gneissic granite of the area are whipped into the trenches by the winds, where the effects of saltation and turbulent flow remove the loosened particles. The slightly undercut appearance of the sides of some of 62 C. T. MCELROY. the Monaro trenches is strongly suggestive of wind scouring. Some loosened particles are driven into the adjacent grass and consolidated, others are trans- ported out of the area. The flaking and curling of clayey soils, and the powdering of sandy soils in dry conditions, greatly assists the scouring action. The existence of deeper trenches on the crests of ridges or in the more exposed positions, in many localities, is consistent with there being greater susceptibility to scouring action in such positions. (c) Conclusions as to Origin. Of the theories advanced, those depending on human or animal activity, normal water erosion, jointing systems, gilgais, sun cracks, salt pans and eluviation are rejected. The theories of fire formation and seed deposition cannot be wholly discounted. For «-types, it is considered that solifluction is the principle initiating factor. 6- and y-types are considered to have their origin in minor surface irregularities. Secondly, all types are then enlarged by ecological adjustment, this being the most important single factor in the develop- ment. Raindrop action, flooding and wind action are considered effective as tertiary factors. : IV. SUMMARY. An account is given of observations made on naturally-occurring, trench-like depressions in the general land surface, conforming to the contour, in upland plains of New South Wales. Soil profiles and relation to topography are dealt with in some detail. The modes of origin favoured are solifluction and adaptation of the root systems of plants to a specialized soil-moisture environment, with further development by wind and rain action. V. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS. Sincere thanks are due to the Hill family of Little Forest and the Goddard family of Hernani for making available accommodation ; to Dr. E. G. Halls- worth of the University of Sydney for encouragement and helpful discussions ; to many fellow students for assistance in field trips and laboratory work; and in particular to Mr. F. R. Gibbons, B.Sc., University of Sydney. for sustained advice and assistance in all phases of the work. VI. REFERENCES. Andrews, E. C., 1901. Report on the Kiandra Lead, Min. Res. No. 10, N.S.W.G.S. Govt. Printer, Sydney. ‘Costin, A., 1948. Ecosystems of the Snowy Mountains and Monaro Plain. Honours Thesis, University of Sydney. Unpublished. Davis, Consett, 1936. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 61, 285. 1941. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 66, 1. Longwell, Knopf and Flint, 1939. Textbook of Geology. John Wiley, New York. Prescott, J. A., 1944. A Soil Map of Australia. C.S.I.R. Bull. 177. Govt. Printer, Melbourne. Van der Merwe, C. R., 1941. Soil Groups and Sub-groups of South Africa. D.Sc. Thesis. University of Stellenbosch. Govt. Printer, Pretoria. EXPLANATION OF PLATE V. Fig. 1.—Occurrence of Contour Trench Formation at Monaro, Location (3), Happy Jack’s Plains, showing relation to topography, viewed from a distance of 4 mile. Fig. 2.—Close-up of «-type trenches shown in Fig. 1. Photograph by courtesy of Mr. C. L. Adamson. Fig. 3.—«-type trenches at Little Forest, near Location (1). Fig. 4.—Racquet-shaped y-type trenches at Monaro, Location (1), Kiandra. Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. LXXXV, 1952, Plate V SS SS SS THE GEOLOGY OF THE NANIMA-BEDULLUCK DISTRICT, NEAR YASS, NEW SOUTH WALES. By KATHLEEN SHERRARD, M.Sc. With Plate VI and five text-figures. Manuscript received July 11, 1951. Read, August 1 1951. I. INTRODUCTION. The geology of the Nanima—Bedulluck district has not been described previously, though it has been referred to in mineral reports (Watt, 1897 ; Carne and Jones, 1919) and is bounded on three sides by areas whose geology Jerrawa Fig. 1.—Sketch-map to show position of area described in relation to Yass, Australian Capital Territory and Burrinjuck Dam has been studied, namely the Yass—Jerrawa district to the north, the area of the Burrinjuck Dam on the Murrumbidgee River to the west, and the Australian Capital Territory to the south (Fig 1). The district studied includes the parishes of Nanima and Bedulluck as well as adjoining portions of several other parishes. H 64 KATHLEEN SHERRARD. | Its geology has been studied to gain information on the relations between Ordovician and Silurian sedimentary rocks ; and between those rocks and the igneous rocks occurring near them; and to correlate the sedimentary rocks with those elsewhere. The discovery of both Upper Ordovician and Silurian graptolites, including species not previously recorded from Australia, has made possible the assignment & S x ON - \ fan) ‘ Hse SAGAN r XS in ok a ORES A ER af a \ 4 \Ni\t huts > \' Ser < Leet .\ \S WZ r PH x yh Nis: a Lf = YH “\} To Gunnaroo AG GEOLOGICAL are eee SKETCH MAP A eye of the RE cae net NANIMA -BEDULLUCK DISTRICT Scale 2 yee mile 7 etal. Recent {Ar ~)|\Devenian,? Alluvium eat © o o|? tertiary {- « alFlow ieee - Breccia AKA §Silurian I) Limestone N . ae NINDERRA , i Nel ‘ gh o wheal AT) «4 Shales h = a i ‘ / sb 5 5! Graptolite localities . . : 7 Z 1d Slate etc Lx_~_x/Porphyry Caen Fig. 2.—Geological Sketch-map of the Nanima-Bedulluck District. of the beds in which they occur to particular zones of those systems. In the case of the Silurian, beds with shelly fossils occurring in conformable relation with graptolite-bearing slates can also be dated. Information regarding the origin of the confusing textural features in the igneous rocks has. been gained in the field, in thin section and by chemical analysis, and has helped in the understanding of these rock types and of those similar in adjacent areas. GEOLOGY OF THE NANIMA-BEDULLUCK DISTRICT. 65 Gold and bismuth were mined in this district, but now the chief products are fine merino wool and cattle. Earthquake tremors have been recorded near Morumbateman, the only village in the area of 250 square miles examined (Cotton, 1925). Two spellings, ‘‘ Morumbateman ”’ and ‘‘ Murrumbateman ”’, are in use. For uniformity, the first only will be used in this paper. II. PHYSIOGRAPHY. The area is divided geologically into two nearly equal portions. There is a western largely igneous and metamorphosed part and an eastern sedimentary part. The main stream, Nanima Creek, flows north, almost entirely within the sedimentary section, which is timbered and rough. The igneous and metamorphosed area is a tableland with isolated hills and is largely cleared. It has a slight slope to the south-west and is drained by Jeir, Gooda and Big Hill Creeks and Gooramon Ponds. These are subject to flooding and must have been held back for some time, because much alluvium has accumulated near their heads. Later rejuvenation enabled them to cut through 10-15 feet of alluvium and make their way south-west to the Murrumbidgee River. Ill. UPPER ORDOVICIAN. Graptolites have been collected from Upper Ordovician slate in four localities on a dissected anticline. Phyllites and schists, also probably of Ordovician age, occur in anticlines outcropping on either side of that in which graptolites were found. Unfossiliferous sandstone conformably overlies the graptolite- bearing slate. (A) Zone Represented. (Locality numbers continue the series from Sherrard, 1943.) Graptolites have been obtained from : (a) Locality 61. Piccaree Trig., Portion 34, Par. Toual. Dicellograptus caduceus Lapw. Climacograptus sp. Diplograptus (Orthograptus) apiculatus (EK. & W.). Cryptograptus tricornis (Carr.). (b) Locality 62. One mile south-west of Piccaree Trig., Portions 224 and 134, Par. Toual. Dicellograptus morrist Hopk. Dicranograptus ramosus (Hall). Climacograptus bicornis (Hall). C. caudatus Lapw. C. minimus (Carr.). Diplograptus (Orthograptus) calearatus var. basilicus Lapw. D. (O.) apiculatus (EB. & W.). Cryptograptus tricornis (Carr.). Glossograptus hincksw (Hopk.). Lastograptus harknessi (Nich.). (c) Locality 63. Portion 283, Par. Bedulluck. Climacograptus bicornis (Hall). (d) Locality 64. Portion 229, Par. Bedulluck. Climacograptus bicornis (Hall). C. caudatus Lapw. These graptolites indicate Zone 12 (Dicranograptus clingani) of the British Upper Ordovician. This is the upper horizon of the two recognized in the slates east of Yass (Sherrard, 1943) and is equivalent to the upper part of the Eastonian as recognized in Victoria. HH 66 KATHLEEN SHERRARD. (B) Ordovician—Silurian Relations. The Ordovician-—Silurian junction has not been found, although an almost continuous section is exposed on the Morumbateman-Gundaroo Road between fossiliferous Upper Ordovician at graptolite locality 63 and fossiliferous Silurian near Nanima Trig. (Text-fig. 3, Section A-B). There is, however, a big time-gap between these two fossiliferous outcrops. The older contains graptolites from Zone 12 of the Upper Ordovician, that is, from three zones below the top of the Ordovician, while the fossils near Nanima Trig. characterize a Ludlow horizon, unless they occur there on a lower horizon than elsewhere in the world. They, therefore, belong near the top of the Silurian and above the horizons in the Silurian exposed in other parts of the area. It is unlikely that the unfossiliferous rocks exposed in the road section entirely bridge this gap. ~ In any case a reversed fault must be pictured as bringing the westerly dipping Ludlow shales near to Nanima Trig., because they dip beneath the nearest fossiliferous sedimentary rock to the west, which is a quartzite with Halysites cf. pycnoblastoides found near Big Hill, about four miles west. This will be shown to belong to a lower horizon than the shale near Nanima Trig. = 5 is 2 a or. Scale _ Nee 3 iE Oc mma! mile WNW 33 3 5 ESE R bar: Pers] Porphyry Morumbateman —Gundaroo Road Ws Loc) Ez Asj lurian ie Le oraoncien Spring Range Road Fig. 3.—Geological sketch sections along lines AB and CD, which are indicated on map, Fig. 2. The shale lies not more than 200 feet higher above sea-level than the quartzite. The reversed fault is not taken as the Ordovician-Silurian junction, because the shales and sandstones of the Gundaroo road east of it are lithologically similar to fossiliferous Silurian elsewhere. The boundary between Ordovician and Silurian has been tentatively shown on the map as coinciding with a wide quartz vein traceable across country for some distance. To its east, a coarse sandstone, dipping west, is the sole outcrop for nearly a mile, though its outerop is not continuous. A syncline of sandy shale a mile east of the quartz may be a reappearance of Silurian. Half a mile further east, westerly-dipping sandstone conformably overlying graptolite-bearing slate is fractured and crumpled against the slate, because of folding against a more competent bed, not because of faulting. East of the anticline in the eraptolite-bearing slate and west of Nanima Creek, the slate is conformably overlain by a Silicified sandstone dipping east. Sedimentary rocks, almost certainly of Silurian age, outcrop to the east of Nanima Creek, but no fossils have been found in them. To the west of the tentative Ordovician—Silurian boundary the shales and sandstones are regularly folded. It cannot be said there is any evidence of angular unconformity. GEOLOGY OF THE NANIMA-BEDULLUCK DISTRICT. 67 ITV. SILURIAN. Sandstones, quartzites, limestones and mudstones containing fossils from the Ludlow and Wenlock horizons of the Silurian occur. Some of these fossils have been found previously in the Yass, Hume and Bango Series of the Silurian as recognized at Yass (Brown, 1941), as well as at Canberra (Woolnough, 1939) and at Boambolo, near Burrinjuck Dam (Harper, 1909). Outcrops in the Nanima-Bedulluck district are discontinuous because the sedimentary rocks have been intruded and metamorphosed by igneous rocks, while wide areas are covered by alluvium. The Silurian rocks dip to the south-west in the west of the area and generally to the east-south-east and south-east in the east of the area making a plunging anticline whose eastern limb shows minor folding also. The north and south prolongation of the igneous mass practically coincides with the main axis of the plunging anticline and it may be that the intrusion of the igneous mass was connected with the folding. (A) Silurian Sections. Silurian sedimentary rocks are exposed in the following sections. They have been intruded by igneous sills and dykes which may be younger than Silurian. (The arabic numbers refer to the relative positions of the beds as shown in Table 1.) (i) Spring Range road Section from Portion 176 to Portion 47, Par. Ginninderra. (Text-fig. 3, Section C—D.) Porphyry dyke, highly devitrified. 12. Slate with Monograptus flemingw vars. elegans and compactus, M. vomerinus, M. testis var. inornatus (Loc. 71). (See Plate VI.) 11. Shale with Plumulites mitchelli, Hyolithes sp., Encrinurus sp., Gastropod. 10. Slate with ?? Climacograptus, trilobite fragments. 9. Cherty quartzite and ferruginous sandstone. 8. Felspar porphyrite sill. 7. Mudstone with Lingula cf. lewis, Eoplectodonta sp., Pterinea sp., Plumulites mitchell, gastropod and trilobite fragments. (See Plate VI.) 6. Psammo-pelite. 5. Limestone with Halysites sp., other corals and brachiopods. Porphyry. The sedimentary rocks dip W.N.W. and E.S.E. at angles between 20 and 35 degrees. The section extends for four miles from the side of One Tree Hill along the Spring Range road, where the rocks are poorly exposed in low cuttings. (ii) Gooda Creek Section from Portion 40 to Portion 185, Par. Jeir. Fragmented porphyry. 5. Limestone with Heliolites daintreet, Hercophyllum shearsbyi, Favosites sp., Howellella cf. elegans, cf. Homeospira evax. (See Plate VI.) 4. Shale, sandstone and quartzite. 3. Pelite. 2. Psammite. Fragmented porphyry. The sedimentary rocks dip W.S.W. and W.N.W. at 30 to 50 degrees and are exposed along the banks of Gooda Creek and in a borrow-pit on the eastern side of the Yass-Canberra road. The pelite and psammite in this pit have been metamorphosed by the fragmented porphyry on which they rest. 68 KATHLEEN SHERRARD. (iii) Big Hill Section, Portion 235, Par. Nanima to Portion 255, Par. Jeir. Flow breccia. 11. Ferruginous sandstone with Parmorthis cf. elegantula, Howellella cf. elegans, ‘‘ Orthotetes’’ shearsbyi, Leptena rhomboidalis, trilobite fragments. 5. Quartzite with Halysites cf. pycnoblastoides. 3. Pelite. 2. Psammite. Fragmented porphyry. Bed 11, which is not metamorphosed, occurs in poor outcrops in Portion 246, Par. Nanima, a short distance east of Big Hill. Quartzite with Halysites cf. pycnoblastoides is found in Portion 86, Par. Nanima, and Halysites sp. also occurs in quartzite in Portion 31, Par. Nanima. Fragmented porphyry in Portion 255, Par. Jeir, has metamorphosed beds 5, 3 and 2. (iv) Nanima Trig. Section from Portion 144, Par. Nanima, to Portion 142, Par. Bedulluck. Porphyry. 17. Sandstone. 16. Shale with Cosmogoniophora n.sp., Hormotoma cf. articulata, Temnospira cf. monilis, Ostracod. (See Plate VI.) 14. Psammite. Porphyry. Quartzite. Vallance’s Hill Section, Portion 177, Par. Nanima. Porphyry. 17. Quartzite, pelite. 16. Sandstone with Huomphalopterus cf. alatus var. subundulatus, Hormotoma cf. articulata, Cosmogoniophora nu.sp., Pterinea cf. retroflexa, Howellella cf. elegans, Echinoid. (See Plate VI.) 15. Shale. 14. Psammite. Fragmented porphyry. a (B) Zones Represented. The graptclites at the top of the Spring Range section indicate Zone 31 of the British Silurian, that is the top of the Wenlock. The beds, conformably underlying the graptolite-bearing slates, must therefore be Wenlock or older in age. These include limestone with Halysites sp. near the centre of the Silurian anticline. Limestone (now replaced by quartzite) containing Halysites cf. pycnoblastoides in Portion 86, Par. Nanima, in the Big Hill section is almost certainly an outcrop, on the western limb of the anticline, of the same bed and can be dated as Wenlock or older, also. The same limestone outcrops in the Gooda Creek section, but Halysites has not been found in it. The sedimentary rocks in the Spring Range, Big Hill and Gooda Creek sections contain fossils also recorded from all three horizons of the Silurian recognized at Yass, that is the Bango, Yass and Hume beds, but cannot be said. to correspond precisely with any one of them. Apart from the graptolite-bearing slate, the best correlation of these sections with other parts of the world can be made by means of the fossils occurring near Nanima Trig., particularly Cosmogoniophora n.sp., which shows radial striz both above and below its carinated ridge. This is characteristic of this sub-genus GEOLOGY OF THE NANIMA-BEDULLUCK DISTRICT. 69 when found in beds of Ludlow age in Canada (McLearn, 1924) and England (Reed, 1927). Goniophora in beds of Devonian age has radial strive only below the ridge. Cosmogoniophora n.sp. resembles closely Goniophora aff. cymbeformis from the Upper Ludlow of Malvern, England. (Geol. Surv. Gt. Britain, No. 21987.) Hormotoma cf. articulata from the same bed compares closely with H. articulata from Ledbury, England (Geol. Surv. Gt. Britain, No. 6707) from the Upper Ludlow. The high Ludlow age of this bed is confirmed when it is traced to Vallance’s Hill, where Huomphalopterus cf. alatus var. subundulatus occurs. It is close to E. alatus var. subundulatus from the Aymestry near Caradoc (No. 36779, Geol. Surv. Gt. Britain). The assemblage of fossils therefore supports a Ludlow age for the beds in this part of the area. TABLE 1. CORRELATION OF SILURIAN BEDS IN NANIMA-BEDULLUCK DISTRICT. (Igneous sills and dykes may be younger than Silurian.) Spring Range. Gooda Creek. Big Hill. Nanima Trig. Vallance’s Hill. (i) (ii) (ili) (iv) (v) Porphyry. Porphyry. 17. Sandstone. 17. Quartzite. 16. Shale with | 16. Sandstone with Cosmogonio- Euomphalop- phora, Hor- terus, Cosmo- motoma, etc. goniophora, Howellella, LUDLOW. echinoid. 15. Shale 14. Psammite. 14. Psammite. FAU|LT. Porphyry. Fragmented por- | Flow breccia. Porphyry. Porphyry. phyry. 12. Slate with Monograptus. 11. Shale with 11. Sandstone with Hyolithes, En- Howellella, CTINUTUS, “Orthotetes’’, Plumulites. Parmorthis, Leptena. 10. Slate with 22?Climaco- graptus, tri- lobite. WENLOCK. 9. Quartzite. 8. Porphyrite. 7. Mudstone with Eoplectodonta, Lingula. 6.Psammo- pelite. 5. Limestone 5. Limestone 5. Limestone with Halysites. with Helio- with Halysites. lites, | Herco- phyllum. 4. Shale, sand- stone. | 3. Pelite. 3. Psammite. | 2. Psammite. 2. Pelite. Porphyry. Porphyry. | Porphyry. V. (2) TERTIARY. Isolated patches of a coarse, iron-stained cemented conglomerate are found some feet (10-50) above Nanima Creek in a few places. This conglomerate was also found along the Yass River (Sherrard, 1939) and was tentatively correlated with Tertiary leaf-bearing conglomerate at Dalton. In Portion 189, Par. Bedulluck, a tributary to Nanima Creek has cut a cliff showing 10 feet of alluvium overlying two feet thickness of conglomerate, which in turn rests on kaolinized white porphyry. The conglomerate was apparently the load of an earlier swiftly flowing stream, which later slowed down until it could only carry finer alluvium. 70 KATHLEEN SHERRARD. VI. IGNEOUS AND METAMORPHIC ROCKS. (A) Mode of Occurrence of Igneous and Metamorphic Rocks. Much of the west of the area is covered by igneous rocks which surround enclaves of sedimentary rocks including most of the Silurian sections which have been described. No contact has been found between igneous rocks and rocks with Ordovician fossils, though the psammo-pelite of Portion 18, Par. Bedulluck, has formed from slate which is probably Ordovician in age. | The sedimentary rocks have been altered along their contact with igneous rocks, but it can be shown that the sedimentary rocks have also affected some of the igneous rocks. They have been partly the cause of the fragmentation of some igneous rocks and they have contaminated others. In hand-specimens, the igneous rocks are indistinguishable. All are coarse- grained and greenish in colour, but thin sections show textural differences and four types can be recognized, which outcrop in positions which can be defined within broad limits. (a) The fundamental type of igneous rock is a quartz porphyry which outcrops along the eastern margin of the igneous mass and extends for about two miles west of that margin. It contains porphyritic crystals of corroded quartz, sericitized plagioclase (mainly Ab,,, but some Ab;,;) and chlorite set in a devitrified ground-mass and is typically developed at Nanima Trig. - To the south, the ground-mass of the porphyry is more highly devitrified as seen in the rock of Spring and One Tree Hills. In Portion 313, Par. Jeir, chemical analysis Shows the porphyritic rock is more siliceous and has graded into a rhyolite. Minor intrusions belong to this type. This rock on the eastern margin of the Nanima-Bedulluck igneous mass is the southern continuation of the Hawkins porphyry (Brown, 1941), or most easterly of the igneous rocks of the Yass district. (b) The western section of the area, to the west of the enclave of sedimentary rocks, is occupied by dacitic flow breccia typically developed at Big Hill. In thin section, this rock shows, aS well as hypidiomorphic crystals of quartz and plagioclase (Ab,, and Ab;;) and chlorite, numerous small chips of quartz and felspar and frequent flow banding in the ground-mass. These two latter characteristics differentiate this rock from porphyry and rhyolite. The outcrop of dacitic flow breccia in the west of the area is a southern continuation of part of the Laidlaw porphyry of Yass (Brown, 1941). (c) Between porphyry in the east and Silurian sedimentary rock on the west lies a third type of igneous rock which shows a much greater concentration of broken chips of minerals than is seen in the dacitic flow breccia. It is almost entirely made up of angular fragments of quartz, felspar and chlorite almost in contact, only being separated by thin partitions of devitrified material which forms the binding. Fossils are very occasionally present among the fragmented minerals. Field work in the Nanima-Bedulluck area, chemical analysis and examination of thin sections of rocks from the area indicate that the name fragmented porphyry best describes this rock. It was formerly called ‘ coarse crystal tuff’? (Sherrard, 1936, 1939) because it conformed to the definition of that rock type, that is, it was made up of more than 75% by volume of closely interlocking fractured crystals originating from a magma (Pirsson, 1915; Williams, 1926). Fragmented porphyry occurs : (i) in a north and south band 14 miles long and one mile wide in this area, extending from Cockatoo Trig. to Portion 122, Par. Ginninderra, with sedimentary rock on one side and quartz porphyry on the other ; GEOLOGY OF THE NANIMA-BEDULLUCK DISTRICT. (al (ii) between flow breccia and sedimentary rock in Portions 12 and 40, Par. Jeir, epidote sometimes forming the cement between the fragments of minerals (Text-fig. 4B) ; (iii) with limestone inclusions in Portion 182, Par. Nanima ; (iv) in the Yass area, between Laidlaw porphyry and Silurian sedimentary rocks near Laidlaw Trig.; and between Laidlaw porphyry and the sedimentary rocks underlying the elliptical outcrop of the Hume Series (Sherrard, 1936). These examples show that fragmented porphyry occurs between sedimentary rock and unfragmented igneous rock. Evidence will be offered to show that its fragmental texture is due, in part at least, to interaction between porphyry and sedimentary rock at the time of intrusion. (d) The fourth type of igneous rock in this area is dacite. It is found in isolated patches and does not form conspicuous hills as do the other igneous rocks. It may have been intruded later than they, because its felspars (Ab, and Ab;,) are freer from sericitization and its brown biotite from chlorite. Granulitized foreign inclusions can be seen in the field, in dacite in Portion 91, Par. Bedulluck, and in a thin section from Portion 182, Par. Nanima. Psammites and pelites have formed near the contact of igneous and sedi- mentary rocks. Metamorphism has occurred to the same degree where sedimentary rocks rest upon igneous (e.g. Portion 185, Par. Jeir), as where they appear to dip beneath igneous rocks as in Portion 18, Par. Bedulluck. This proves the igneous rocks must have been intruded and not extruded as a lava or tuff. (e) Psammites are dark coloured, gritty to the touch and medium in grain size aS at Portion 185, Par. Jeir. Under the microscope well separated chips of quartz and felspar (0-25-1 mm. across) and chlorite and ilmenite are seen. They are set, with some parallelism of their long axes, in an isotropic base. Rocks previously called ‘‘ medium crystal tuffs ’’ (Sherrard, 1936, pl. vi, fig. 7) are probably psammites. Coarser grained psammites (Tyrrell, 1921) or quartzites also occur. (f) Pelites are dense, resinous rocks generally spotted by concretions and have a conchoidal fracture. In thin seetion, the pelite of Portion 185, Par. Jeir, shows concretions nearly 4 mm. across, which almost coalesce. They are formed by a denser packing of limonite and sericite flakes around angular quartz grains than is seen in the remainder of the rock. Threads of sericite mark the bedding. This rock is practically identical with those from Yass, doubtfully named “ fine tuffs ’’ (Sherrard, 1936, pl. vi, fig. 10). The pelite occurring within porphyry in Portion 97, Par. Yass, has been chemically analysed. In it the concretions are smaller and further apart than in the pelite of Portion 185, Par. Jeir, but in other respects the rocks are similar. Their excessively fine-grained bases are made up of mineral grains less than one-fiftieth millimetre across. The chemical analysis (Table 2, [X) proves the rock from Por. 97 must be a Silicified shale or pelite (Tyrrell, 1921). It seems certain that the other extremely fine-grained sedimentary rocks in the Yass and Nanima-Bedulluck districts are pelites. Before they were baked and silicified they may or may not have originated as fine tuff, but they contain none of the cusps and shards characteristic of tuffs, such as are seen in thin sections of tuffs from the Devonian rocks near Taemas Bridge. In any case, Williams (1926) has pointed out that a rock with such a high percentage of silica if ejected as tuff would solidify as a completely glassy rock (italics mine). (2 KATHLEEN SHERRARD. (B) Previous Views of Origin of Igneous Rocks. Igneous rocks with textures similar to those described as occurring in the Nanima—Bedulluck area are also found in the Yass, Canberra and Burrinjuck districts. Published opinions of their origin have varied between the views that they were intruded, and that they were extruded as lavas and tuffs. Professor Cotton (1923) wrote regarding the eastern igneous rock at Yass (Hawkins porphyry): ‘ Its fragmentary structure may be due to shattering and engulfing of the marginal sediments during intrusion of the porphyry ”’, while Dr. Woolnough (1939) was not satisfied to regard as tuffs all the igneous rocks of the Australian Capital Territory which show fragmentation. (C) Necessary Scope of Explanation. A satisfactory explanation of the causes of the development of the different rock types must account for: (a) the undoubted intrusive relations seen in railway cuttings near Coolalie and Jerrawa, and at places described below ; (b) the texture of fragmented porphyry and the flow banding in dacitic flow breccia ; (c) contact metamorphism caused in sedimentary rocks lying on top of fragmented porphyry ; (d) the presence of fossils in some fragmented porphyry. (D) Explanation of Origin of Different Rock Types. Evidence from field relations, chemical analyses and thin sections of igneous rocks of the district points to the following conclusion : All igneous rocks in the Yass-Nanima—Bedulluck district are considered to have been intruded more or less simultaneously in the form of a rhyolite- quartz porphyry magma into fissures which developed in overlying sedi- mentary rocks. Some sedimentary rocks, with any fossils they contained, were engulfed, contaminating some of the intruding material. Other sedimentary rocks were thrust to new positions. Pelites and psammites were formed. Interaction between sedimentary and igneous rocks caused fragmentation of some of the porphyry, while further fragmentation and flow banding occurred through the action of volatile bodies from the under- lying unconsolidated magma acting on the crust which had formed above it. Dacite may represent the last phase of the intrusion. (EZ) Evidence Supporting Explanation. Evidence obtained from : (a) Field of (1) intrusive relations; (2) fracturing and thrusting of sedi- mentary rocks; (3) contact metamorphism of lower surfaces of sedimentary rocks; (4) presence of volatile bodies. (1) Intrusive relations seen : (i) porphyry invading shale in creeks, Portions 24 and 101, Par. Nanima ; (ii) porphyry surrounding quartzite in quarry, Portion 8, Par. Nanima ; (iii) porphyry surrounding pelite, Portion 97, Par. Yass ; (iv) porphyry invading sedimentary rocks, Portion 106, Par. Bango; Portion 233, Par. Jerrawa (pl. xii, Sherrard, 1939) GEOLOGY OF THE NANIMA-BEDULLUCK DISTRICT. __ 73 (2) Fracturing and thrust faulting of sedimentary rocks seen : (i) Vallance’s Hill ; (ii) near Nanima Trig. ; (iii) Portion 182, Par. Nanima ; which has caused them to be surrounded by porphyry aiter having been thrust from previous positions. (3) Contact metamorphism of lower surfaces of sedimentary rocks by igneous rocks beneath them, forming : (i) quartzite, Portion 55, Par. Ginninderra ; (ii) quartzite, Portions 17, 34 and 68, Par. Jeir; (iii) psammite and pelite, Portion 185, Par. Jeir ; (iv) psammite, Portion 84, Par. Nanima. Such metamorphism can only be explained as due to the intrusion of igneous rock after the deposition of sedimentary rock. Fig. 4.—A. Porphyry partly fragmented, Portion 258, Par. Nanima. X13. B. Fragmented porphyry cemented by epidote, Portion 12, Par. Jeir. x13. C. Porphyry partly fragmented, Portion 118, Par. Bedulluck. x 20. (4) Volatile bodies present, because of: (i) pyrite and chalcopyrite veins in porphyry, Portion 21, Par. Nanima, and Portion 313, Par. Jeir ; (ii) iron-bearing solutions which have reddened and decomposed porphyry, in road cuttings, Portion 21, Par. Nanima ; Portion 45, Par. Jeir; surrounding quartzite, Portion 8, Par. Nanima. Similar action in Alderney (Nockolds, 1932) ; (ii) gold in Portion 281, Par. Nanima; Portion 180, Par. Jeir ; Portion 13, Par. Bedulluck ; (iv) bismuth in Portion 32, Par. Bedulluck ; 74 (v) (v1) KATHLEEN SHERRARD. silica replacing limestone by quartz, Portion 31, Par. Nanima ; boron forming tourmaline, Portion 70, Par. Bedulluck. Such bodies, liquid while under magmatic pressure, would be vapourized with lowering of pressure on nearing the surface, and could then powerfully aid in fragmentation of the already solidified crust of the magma. TABLE 2. I II. TEE IV. V. VI. VIL. VIII. IX. 713-52 72-11 71°68 69-24 69-23 66-54 64-29 63°94 83-25 11-94 13-89 13-57 12-88 15-35 16-05 17°83 16-77 7:63 3°39 1-28 1-28 0-20 Veq7 0:64 1-55 1-80 } 1-48 1-46 2-00 1-94 4-05 2-11 5-29 3°33 1-98 0:61 1-30 1-37 2-21 1-59 1:04 2°25 1-61 0:23 2:07 4-47 1-88 3:10 2-98 0:74 1-09 0:92 2-24 3°49 2-66 2 22 2-94 2-01 3°75 4-20 5-34 1-21 2-24 0:16 3°87 3:66 3:10 4°13 3°74 4°97 1°58 0:95 1-12 1-24 0-80 1:64 1:26 2-06 1-79 2:48 0-14 0:12 | 0-29 0:06 0-06 0:08 0:04 0:41 0:49 0:12 0:05 0:03 0:23 0-11 0-14 0-13 0:27 = 0: 66 0:43 0-33 0:55 0:12 0:19 0:15 0:15 — tr tr 0-08 0:04 abs. abs. abs. 0:02 ee — — 0:13 0-10 — —_ — 0:16 — 100-59 99-59 99-91 | 100:06 | 100-07 99-85 | 100-66 | 100-13 | 100-59 I. Rhyolite, Portion 313, Par. Jeir.—Anal. K. Sherrard. II. Granite, Tharwa, A.C.T.—Anal. A. G. Hall (Taylor and Mahony, 1913). VIII. . Quartz porphyry tuff, Mt. Stromlo, A.C.T.—Anal. A. G. Hall (cbid.). . Hypersthene dacite, Good Hope Public School site.—Anal. J. C. H. Mingaye (A.R. Dept. Mines, N.S.W., 1907). V. Dacitic flow breccia, Portion 38, Par. Nanima.—Anal. K. Sherrard. . Fragmented porphyry, Portion 21, Par. Nanima.—Anal. K. Sherrard. . Quartz porphyry, Nanima Trig.—Anal. K. Sherrard. Felspar porphyry, Portion 60, Par. Boambolo.—Anal. H. P. White (Harper, 1909). IX. Pelite, Portion 97, Par. Yass.—Anal. K. Sherrard. (b) Thin sections showing (1) fragmentation of porphyry caused by its intrusion into sedimentary rocks ; (2) fragmentation of minerals and development of flow banding in porphyry. (1) Fragmented porphyry can be seen: (i) At Mt. Avon, Portion 258, Par. Nanima, at the junction of shale and porphyry. A thin section (Fig. 4A) shows quartz grains and felspar prisms from porphyry, nearly in contact in an argillaceous matrix. A band of unaltered shale passes across the thin section. Threads of chlorite wind around the minerals. If quartz grains and felspar relics, which form about 60 per cent. of the rock, were packed more closely, it would be indistinguishable from fragmented porphyry, which has about 80 per cent. crystal fragments ; on Nanima Creek road, one and a half miles east of Morumbateman, at the junction of psammite and porphyry. A thin section shows large grains of quartz and felspar from the porphyry forced into contact with each other and against pieces of psammite ; GEOLOGY OF THE NANIMA-BEDULLUCK DISTRICT. 15 (iii) in Portion 118, Par. Bedulluck, at the junction of shale with quartz porphyry of Spring Hill. In thin section (Fig. 4C) can be seen cracked fragments of quartz, ‘‘ moth- eaten ”’ felspar and chlorite set in an argillaceous matrix. (2) Fragmentation of minerals and development of flow banding, through the disruptive effect of a volatile body, such as water, on the porphyry causing : (i) devitrification of ground-mass ; (ii) sericitization of felspar ; (iii) chloritization and epidotization of biotite ; which are seen in different degree in nearly every thin section of an igneous rock from the district, particularly from Portions 16 and 38, Par. Nanima. Sericite forms along felspar cleavages, causing them to broaden. Chlorite and epidote, or part of the devitrified ground-mass, flow with a swirling motion from the ground-mass into the widened cleavage, forcing pieces of the felspar to flow away with the same swirling motion making the flow banding seen in dacitic flow breccia. S5IGS 6768 BOLTON Ta 73 74.075 Silica Fig. 5.—Variation diagram. (c) Chemical analyses of rocks from the Nanima-Bedulluck and surrounding districts are given in Table 2. A variation diagram (Text-fig. 5) has been prepared from the analyses, recalculated to 100 per cent., without water. Apart from CaO and total iron calculated as FeO, the variation of the oxides is regular and such as to be expected in rocks from the Same igneous reservoir. With rise in SiOQ,, there is a fall in AI,QO,, MgO, K,O and Na,O. The alumina curve is perhaps high, while the curve for CaO is distinctly anomalous, showing more discrepancies than can be attributed to errors in analysis. Its rise with rise in SiQ,, can only be accounted for by contamination with limestone, which in any case has been proved in the field to have taken place in Portion 31, Par. Nanima, and elsewhere. The irregularity in the curve for total iron can be accounted for by enrichment with iron-bearing solutions such as are known to have affected the rhyolite of Portion 313, Par. Jeir. 76 KATHLEEN SHERRARD. Analysis VI of fragmented porphyry supports field evidence of this rock’s intrusive origin. Had it been extruded as a tuff, as previously suggested, its high silica content would have given it a vitric texture instead of the coarse- grained porphyritic texture everywhere seen in this rock in the Yass—Nanima— Bedulluck area. (f) Summing Up of Evidence. Evidence has been presented to prove the intrusion in the Yass—Nanima— Bedulluck district of quartz-porphyry-rhyolite which has fractured and metamorphosed sedimentary rocks. The combined effect of the mingling of sedimentary rocks with porphyry and the attack on both of volatile bodies has fragmented some of the porphyry and produced flow banding and fluxional arrangement of shattered crystals in other parts of it, forming dacitic flow breccia. Dacite may represent the last phase of intrusion. (G) Presence of Fossils. Fossils in fragmented porphyry were derived from sedimentary rocks which were engulfed by porphyry. They are usually unidentifiable, unless they have been silicified or a large section of sedimentary rock remains as a screen, as near Nanima Trig. In other places, as Portion 12, Par. Jeir, Portion 182, Par. Nanima, and Portion 28, Par. Bango (Sherrard, 1939, p. 592), calcareous patches in fragmented porphyry cannot be identified. 3 (H) Analogies from Other Areas. (a) The explanation given by Professor Benson (1915) of the formation of rocks near Tamworth which he called ‘‘ intrusive tuffs ’’ is close to that given here for the development of fragmented porphyry and dacitic flow breccia. He pictured the intrusion of a magma with a large quantity of water which acts as a mineralizer ; the crust formed on it is constantly shattered and intrusion proceeds of shattered material into damp sediments. (b) Great Britain. Through the courtesy of Mr. P. A. Sabine of the Geological Survey of Great Britain, thin sections of rocks from Ardnamurchan, Scotland, have been examined. These are described as having undergone ‘‘intense shattering’’ due to explosive gases (Richey and Thomas, 1930). Epidote and chlorite have penetrated between cleavages of plagioclase (Geol. Surv. Gt. Brit., Section 22322). Minerals in the eucrite and gabbro are shattered into fragments without losing their individual crystalline form and lie in a thoroughly cataclastic matrix consisting of a granulated mass of broken felspars and recrystallized augite. Flow banding and fluxional arrangement of crystals. have developed. The disruption of the Ardnamurchan gabbro (Geol. Surv. Gt. Brit., Section 24447) closely resembles shattered Nanima—Bedulluck rocks, though these show more shattering than those from Ardnamurchan. Tyrrell (1928) states breccia in Arran has been formed by shattering of the cover of the magma and epidotization has followed. In Ireland (Richey and Thomas, 1930) gases evolved from an acid magma are held responsible for the brecciation of the Newry granite. Nockolds (1933) records mechanical disintegration of invaded rock by intruding magma. (I) Age of Intrusion. Rhyolite-quartz porphyry must have been intruded in late or post-Silurian time, since by its intrusion shale with fossils of Ludlow age has been fractured and thrust-faulted to the east near Nanima Trig. Dacite may have been intruded later. GEOLOGY OF THE NANIMA-BEDULLUCK DISTRICT. UV VII. DESCRIPTIONS OF FOSSILS. GRAPTOLITHINA. Family Dicranograptidz Lapworth. Genus Dicranograptus Hall. Dicranograptus ramosus (Hall) Elles and Wood, 1904, 175; pl. xxiv, figs. 6a, b. Biserial stipes 1 mm. wide, 4 mm. long, but full length not preserved, septum present, 10 thece in 10 mm., apertures introverted, no spines visible. Uniserial stipes 4 cm. long, 1 mm. wide. Thece 10 in 10 mm., each 2 mm. long, overlap a half. Ventral wall curved, apertures introverted. Axial angle up to 110 degrees. Associate: Diplograptus apiculatus. Locality : Portions 224/134, Par. Toual. Family Monograptidz Lapworth. Genus Monograptus Geinitz restricted. Monograptus flemingu var. compactus E. & W., Hlles and Wood, 1913, 426, pl. xl, figs. 7a-d. See Plate VI, photograph 3. Rhabdosome 6 mm. to 1 cm. long, straight, sicula including virgella 2-5 mm. long, width of sicula 0-4 mm. Proximal end of rhabdosome across hook of first theca 0-8 mm. wide. At 10th theca, rhabdosome is 2 mm. wide, of which hooks occupy two-fifths. Seventeen thece in 10 mm., all with pronounced hooks. Thece 1-7 mm. long, overlap two-thirds, 0-7 mm. wide. Two-fifths length of theca is involved in hook. Locality : Portion 55, Par. Ginninderra. Monograptus flemingii var. elegans Elles, Boswell and Double, 1940, 159. See Plate VI, photograph 2. Rhabdosome 2 cm. long, slight dorsal curvature, rather limp. Width 1-8 mm. distally, 1-0 mm. proximally, across hook of first theca. Twelve or 13 hooked thece in 10 mm., 1-7 mm. long, half of which involved in hook. Overlap three-fifths. Width of theca 0:4 mm. Sicula conspicuous, virgella 0-5 mm. long. Associate: M. vomerinus. Locality: As for M. flemingui var. compactus. Monograptus testis var. inornatus Elles, Elles and Wood, 1913, 446, pl. xliv, figs. Ta, b. See Plate VI, photograph 1. Rhabdosome small, fish-hook shaped through strong ventral curvature, thecz on concave side. About 1-5 cm. long, width 0-5 mm. proximally, 1-0 mm. distally, inclusive of hooks, which occupy one-third width. Thece 1:5 mm. long and 0-5 mm. wide with slight ventral curvature, all hooked. Thece 12 in 10 mm., inclined 30 degrees. Locality : Portion 47, Par. Ginninderra. ECHINOIDEA. Fragments (Plate VI, photograph 4) of a crushed echinoid consist of : (1) Cylindrical spines, slightly tapering, some 7-5 mm., most 2 mm. long, longitudinal ridges down full length of spine, expanded bases, about three horizontal bars across spine at intervals. 78 KATHLEEN SHERRARD. (2) Hexagonal plates, apparently interambulacral, 7 mm. across, recessed with moulds for tubercles spaced round periphery and one larger Shallower recess in centre. Some plates sutured. (3) Smaller, petaloid plates, 2 mm. long. (4) Raised circular boss, which may be a separate blastoid, one in contact with a large hexagonal plate, one separate. (5) Portions of jaw, including areas 6 mm. long and 2 mm. wide, formed of long narrow rectangular plates meeting at sharp angle, sometimes with tubercles. These areas raised and long edges adjoining tubercle- bearing plates. _Echinoids are rare in the Silurian. Associate: Howellella cf. elegans. Plate VI, photograph 10. Locality : Portion 177, Par. Nanima. MACHARIDIA. Genus Plumulites Barrande. Plumulites mitchelli (Etheridge fils.) (Plate VI, photograph 8), Turrilepas mitchelli Etheridge fils., 1890, Geol. Mag. (dec. iii), VII, 337, pl. xi, Mes, 2s 4b. Plumulites mitchellt (Etheridge fils.), Withers, 1926, Brit. Mus. Cat., 73. Compressed, keel or heart-shaped plates with strong, eccentric median fold. Short pointed apex. Lower margin with double sigmoidal curve with central ‘‘ stalk’. Transverse growth lines, about 3 permm. Length 7 mm., greatest width 7mm. A muscle scar should be visible, but ornament impressed through thin plate obscures it. Several detached plates in mudstone (bed 7) on Spring Range road. One kite or ‘‘ gum-leaf”’ shaped plate in bed 11, 7 mm. long, 2-5 mm. wide, with strongly marked median fold and faint growth lines crossing at right angles and then curving away to run parallel with edge of plate. Withers considers kite- shaped plates form an outer column and keel-shaped plates form two inner columns. He has removed Plumulites from the phylum, Arthropoda, and suggests it might be placed in the Echinodermata. LAMELLIBRANCHIATA. Genus Goniophora Phillips. Sub-genus Cosmogoniophora McLearn. Cosmogoniophora sinuosa sp. nov. (Plate VI, photograph 7). Holotype. Australian Museum Collection, No. F44214. Shell sub-trapezoidal, equivalve, inequilateral, anterior margin bluntly rounded to junction with ventral margin at point where umbonal ridge projects as canal when observed in cast of shell. Umbonal ridge strongly carinated, making angle of 30 degrees with ventral margin. Ventral margin from outlet of umbonal ridge makes concave curve downward in posterior half and convex downward in anterior half. Convex curve continuous round anterior margin to sharp-angled junction with cardinal margin. Cardinal margin from one-half to two-thirds greatest length of shell, straight, with umbo projecting slightly above it, directed anteriorly. Broad, very shallow sinus anterior to umbonal ridge. Muscle scars not always seen, but posterior, when present is near ventral margin, just posterior of umbonal ridge. Pallial line often strongly marked, almost making angulation. Maximum length, 21 mm.; maximum height, 10-5 mm.; depth of each valve, 0:4 mm. Greatest length, about mid-width. Ornament, strongly GEOLOGY OF THE NANIMA-BEDULLUCK DISTRICT. 79 marked concentric growth lines about 4 per mm., less strongly marked posterior of umbonal ridge. Radial strie on either side of umbonal ridge, but not near anterior margin, not bifurcated. Striz most strongly marked near ventral margin, where pit sometimes seen at crossing with growth lines. Locality : Near Nanima Trig. (common), Vallance’s Hill (rare). Associates : Hormotoma cf. articulata, Temnospira monilis, ostracod. Goniophoras seen in collections in England from the Silurian are more strongly bent on the umbonal ridge than the Nanima specimens, but it is notice- able that the two valves of the same English specimen, even though still attached, vary in shape on account of unequal crushing and deformation. Similar deformations are frequent in Goniophora. (Gosselet et al., 1912, p. 51.) GASTROPODA. Genus Euomphalopterus Roemer. Euomphalopterus cf. alatus var. subundulatus (Salter). (Plate VI, photographs 12, 14.) Low, conical gastropod, 5 whorls, which are quadrate and strongly carinated on upper surface. Each whorl slightly concave on upper surface until it rises to keel, which is crossed by growth lines, leaving crescentic markings. Below keel, whorl face slopes outward until it reaches well-marked suture. Strongly marked keel on periphery forming wing. Lower surface rounded. Wide umbilicus. Lines of growth turn back sharply just below suture, then curve forward to keel, then curve sharply back. Partitioning of whorls by transverse septa. Preserved as casts or moulds. Width between 15 and 25 mm., height up to 12 mm., pleural angle about 130 degrees. Salter (1848) comments on variability in size of wing, rarity of undulations in it and variations in closeness of striz. Associates: Howellella cf. elegans, Pterinea cf. retrofleca, Hormotoma cf. articulata. Locality: Vallance’s Hill. Genus Temnospira Perner. Temnospira monilis Perner, Knight, 1941, 346, pl. 85, figs. 2a, 6. (Plate VI, photograph 13.) Small, low-spired gastropod, whorl profile strongly rounded, four whorls, deep sutures, base phaneromphalous, aperture without slit, but with shallow notch. Whorl expanded to form varices at irregular intervals, 1 mm. to 5 mm. apart, most strongly developed on periphery. Faint growth lines between, transverse without obliquity. Diameter 10 mm., height 5 mm. Associates: As for Cosmogoniophora. Locality: Near Nanima Trig. VIII. SUMMARY. Graptolites from Zone 12 of the Upper Ordovician have been discovered in slates in the Nanima-Bedulluck area. Graptolites and shelly fossils of the Wenlock and Ludlow divisions of the Silurian have also been found. Ordovician and Silurian sedimentary rocks apparently show no angular unconformity. Porphyritic igneous rocks of acid chemical composition have intruded and metamorphosed some sedimentary rocks in post-Ludlow time. A large pro- portion, possibly one-half, of the igneous rocks have a fragmentary texture or show flow banding. It is demonstrated that these effects are due in part to the mechanical disruption of igneous rocks during their intrusion of sedimentary rocks and in part to the action of volatile bodies. Fossils in the fragmented rocks were derived from the invaded sedimentary rocks. 80 KATHLEEN SHERRARD. Chemical analyses prove contamination of some of the igneous rocks and the original sedimentary nature of extremely fine-grained rocks common in this district and near Yass. IX. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS. Professor L. A. Cotton, M.A., D.Sc., and Professor C. E. Marshall, Ph.D., D.Sc., have kindly allowed me to use the library and chemical laboratory of the Geological Department of the University of Sydney while doing this work. I should also like to record the unfailing generosity of Dr. Ida Browne, D.Sc., in giving me much help and advice. Professor W. B. R. King, F.R.S., was good enough to permit me to work in the Sedgwick Museum of the University of Cambridge, and Miss G. L. Elles graciously devoted much time while I was there to assisting me with graptolite determinations. Dr. C. J. Stubblefield, F.R.S., of the Geological Survey of Great Britain, was also most kind in helping me with fossil determinations. I am greatly indebted to Mr. J. E. Strait for photographing fossils for me. X. REFERENCES. Benson, W. N., 1915. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 40, 540. Boswell, P. G. H., and Double, I. S., 1940. Proc. Geol. Assoc., 51, 151. Brown, I. A., 1941. Tuts Journat, 74, 312. Carne, J. E., and Jones, L. J., 1919. Min. Res. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., 25, 260. Cotton, L. A., 1923. Pan-Pac. Sci. Cong. Guide-Book to Yass. ——_-_— 1925. THis JOURNAL, 59, 325. Elles, G. L., and Wood, E. M. R., 1904-1913. Mon. Pal. Soc., 58-65. Gosselet, J., Barrois, C., Leriche, M., and Crepin, A., 1912. Mem. Soc. Geol. Nord., 6. Harper, L. F., 1909. Rec. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., 9, 1. Knight, J. B., 1941. Geol. Soc. Amer., Spec. Pap. 32. McLearn, F. H., 1924. Mem. Geol. Surv. Can., 137. Nockolds, 8. R., 1932. Geol. Mag., 69, 433. —-—______—_——. 1933. _ J. Geol., 41, 562. Pirsson, L. V., 1915. Amer. J. Sci., 40, 191. Reed, F. R. C., 1927. Quart. J. Geol. Soc., 83, 531. Richey, J. E., and Thomas, H. H., 1930. Geology of Ardnamurchan. Mem. Geol. Surv. Scotland. $$ _______—_—_ 1932. Quart. J. Geol. Soc., 88, 776. Salter, J. W., 1848. Mem. Geol. Surv. Gt. Brit., 2, 356. Sherrard, K., 1936. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 61, 131. 1939. Ibid., 64, 577. 1943. THis JouRNAL, 76, 252. Taylor, T. G., and Mahony, D. J., 1913. Geological Reconnaissance of Federal Territory. Govt. Printer. Tyrrell, G. W., 1921. Geol. Mag., 58, 501. —-——_—_—_-——— 1928. Geology of Arran, Mem. Geol. Surv. Scotland. Watt, J. A., 1897. A.R. Dept. Mines N.S.W., 186. Williams, H., 1926. Proc. Liverpool Geol. Soc., 14, 223. Woolnough, W. G., 1939. Aust. N.Z. Ass. Adv. Sci., 24, Handbook, 111. Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. LXXXV, 1952, Plate VI tad GEOLOGY OF THE NANIMA-BEDULLUCK DISTRICT. 81 EXPLANATION OF PLATE VI. . Monograptus testis var. inornatus Elles. Portion 47, Par. Ginninderra. Horizon : Wenlock. ( X33.) . Monograptus flemingii var. elegans Elles. Portion 55, Par. Ginninderra. Horizon: Wenlock. ( X 23.) . Monograptus flemingi var. compactus E. & W. Portion 55, Par. Ginninderra. Horizon : Wenlock. (x6.) 4. Echinoid fragments. Portion 177, Par. Nanima. Horizon: Ludlow. (Natural size.) . Heliolites daintreeci Nich. and Eth. Vertical section. Portion 70, Par. Jeir. Horizon: Wenlock. (About natural size.) 6. Heliolites daintreer Nich. and Eth. ‘Transverse section. Loc. and Hor. as for 5. . Cosmogoniophora sinuosa n.sp. External moulds of right valves. Aust. Mus. Spec. No. F 44214. Portion 84, Par. Nanima. Horizon: Ludlow. (x 2$.) . Plumulites mitchelli (Etheridge fils.). Portion 20, Par. Ginninderra. Horizon: Wenlock. ( X33.) . Lingula cf. lewisi (Sow.). Loc. and Hor. as for 8. (x 23.) . Howellella cf. elegans (Muir Wood). Portion 177, Par. Nanima. Horizon: Ludlow. (x 24.) . Cf. Homeospira evax H. & C. Loc. and Hor. as for 5. (Natural size.) 14. EHuomphalopterus cf. alatus var. subundulatus (Salter). Loc. and Hor. as for 10. . Temnospira monilis Perner. Portion 84, Par. Nanima. Horizon: Ludlow. ( x6.) ye ere on : D See erage ; : Tae roa ny mY ly 1 RR AUSTRALASIAN MEDICAL PUBLISHING CoMPANY LIMITE ; : 4 oS 4 4 . x fz oe At ae el Streets, Glebe, N.S.W. Ne ARE d= Nad Ra Seco Ro Seamer and Arund \ pe ee Sree mm Ys ere eee OF NEW SOUTH WALES | 1951 (INCORPORATED 1881) A a PART III Re eg eee OF SS ee VOL. LXXXV es Containing Papers read September to November, 1951 oe: Po Pp. 82-122 EDITED BY | | IDA A. BROWNE, D.Sc. Real in . RN ee Honorary Editorial Secretary THE AUTHORS OF PAPERS ARE ALONE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE _ STATEMENTS MADE AND THE OPINIONS EXPRESSED THEREIN Bee SYDNEY — PUBLISHED BY THE SOCIETY, SCIENCE HOUSE - GLOUCESTER AND ESSEX STREETS , 1952 ‘CONTENTS Ps ms VOLUME £XXXvV 37 ve | Part III ~ cal Se (Papers read September to November, 1951.) fe aa ie pie Sie ul “Ant. IX.—The Poisson—Kelvin Hypothesis and the Theory of Dielectrics. By W. Be PSM WITS 2, Meas’. SR Re. OE ae eee eee ‘ et ag Arr. X.—The Chemistry of Osmium. Part VIII. The Preparation of Some Hexam- i -mine Osmium III Salts. By F. P. Dwyer and J. W. Hogarth... .. .. .. .. 118 ART, XI. —Palladium Complexes. Part; HL - Bridged Genoa of Palladium. ies containing other Metal Atoms; Complexes of o—Methyl—mercaptobenzoic Acid” pes with other Metals. ned S. E. Livingstone and’ R. A. Plowman .. 2.55. 73, 16 rs 3 Arr. XII.—The Essential Oil of a Physiological Form of Hucalyptus citriodora oe Hook, By A. R. Penfold, F. R. Morrison, J. L. Willis, H.-H. G. McKern and fire. Spies 2.0. l8cs, 3 Bee ee ee ye th ees ee JOURNAL AND PROCEEDINGS OF THE me YAL SOCIETY OF NEW SOUTH WALES FOR 1951 (INCORPORATED 1881) VOLUME LXXXV Part III EDITED BY IDA A. BROWNE, D.Sc. Honorary Editorial Secretary THE AUTHORS OF PAPERS ARE ALONE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE STATEMENTS MADE AND THE OPINIONS EXPRESSED THEREIN SYDNEY PUBLISHED BY THE SOCIETY, SCIENCE HOUSE GLOUCESTER AND ESSEX STREETS THE POISSON-KELVIN HYPOTHESIS AND THE THEORY OF DIELECTRICS. By W. B. SMITH-WHITE. University of Sydney. Manuscript received, August 10, 1951. Read, September 5, 1951. CONTENTS. Page Introduction and Summary .. Me sas si oF a 82 1. The Poisson-Kelvin Aga és se Mer ys ae 84 2. Point Charges .. Be ie te ae son 85 3. Point Dipoles_.. te ahs Bf we 86 4. Discrete Systems of Charges and Dipoles Me aye a we 87 5. The General Work Formula .. Ae din ae ae 89 6. Inductive Systems sid sid Ge ig ae aie mys 90 7. Continuous Distributions a Me fe 2 ae A 91 8. Formal Transformations shia de a3 de Li A 93 9. Discussion of the Literature .. wih We Sie Bs 95 10. Deformation of Continuous Distributions .. ale -"s dv 100 11. The General Work Formula .. i Le A Pi 102 12. The Theory of Dielectrics as ha oe Se me 5 al Mi 13. The Conservation of Energy .. BoE Mid ie ai site 105 14. Electrostatic Stress site ay i ae bs ee je) OS INTRODUCTION AND SUMMARY. Anyone acquainted with the Classical Theory of Electricity as presented in the literature will be aware of certain theoretical difficulties which recur throughout the subject, and which are connected with the mechanical forces acting on the material bodies of an electrical system. These difficulties are of long standing but are of a fundamental kind. In the usual texts they are neglected or passed over lightly. The said difficulties arise in electrostatics as well as in the general electrodynamic theory. Consider the following points : (i) Various views concerning the ‘“ body-force”’ acting in dielectrics cf. Larmor (1887), Abraham-Becker (1932), Smith-White (1949). (ii) Various expressions for the energy in electrostatic systems cf. de Donder (1925), Guggenheim (1936), Smith-White (1950). (ii) The difficulties that have presented themselves in formulating the first law of thermodynamics for systems which involve dielectric bodies in an electric field, or which involve magnetizable bodies in a magnetic field cf. Debye (1925), Abraham-Becker (1932), Stoner (1937), Guggen- heim (1936), Livens (1948), Smith-White (1951a). (iv) Various expressions for and interpretations of the ‘‘ electrostatic stress’? by which Maxwell has represented the mechanical actions between electrified bodies ef. Livens (1926). In this paper I consider electrostatics only; but what is written here indicates that a complete reconstruction of electrodynamic theory is essential. In particular it seems obvious that the general electrodynamics of moving media must be reconsidered. The starting point is the hypothesis by which Poisson THE POISSON-KELVIN HYPOTHESIS. 83 has explained the behaviour of magnetizable bodies, as transferred, by Lord Kelvin, to explain the behaviour of dielectrics. In the literature the whole content of this hypothesis is supposed to be contained in the potential formula o=| p.v(;)av where P is the polarisation of the dielectric which occupies the volume v. This is transformed by Green’s theorem to give Ai Pe div P o= |, a | - dw where f is the boundary of v, and Py is the outward normal component of P on f. Then it is said, quoting, for example, the text book of Abraham-Becker, ‘ this equation, however, simply states that the insulator carries a surface charge density G= Ph; and a space charge of volume density Oi Oly Ee. These distributions are called Poisson’s equivalent distributions ; and by means of them the theory of a distribution of polarisation is supposed to be reduced to that of surface and volume charge distributions. This is a fundamental mistake. It is a misinterpretation of the physical significance of the hypothesis of Poisson and Kelvin. The physically significant statements of electrodynamics are those about the mechanical forces which act on the material substances in the system con- sidered ; all observed phenomena are concerned ultimately with these mechanical forces. A theory which does not account for these forces satisfactorily must be regarded as inadequate from a physical point of view. In electrostatics the primary observations concern the mechanical action of attraction or repulsion between bodies that have been electrified. So the initial object of electrostatic theory is the quantitative study of the mechanical action on a body under electrical influence. The present formulation of the mathematical theory is distinguished by its insistence on the fundamental nature of the formulae which express this mechanical action. Consider a dielectric body occupying a volume v,, bounded by surface f,, under the influence of a charge distribution, with density po, in a volume »,, bounded by surface f,;. The effect observed is a force and couple acting on the dielectric. We must suppose this force and couple to be distributed ; and it suffices to suppose that on a volume element dv of the dielectric there acts the force Fdv, and the couple Gdv, and that on a surface element df of the dielectric there acts the force Tdf. Here F and G, the body-force and body-couple, are vector functions of position in v,, and T, the surface traction, is a vector function of position on f,. The fundamental problem is to state F, G and T in terms which involve the charge distribution in v, and the polarisation of the dielectric in v,. Suitably interpreted, the Poisson-Kelvin hypothesis enables us to do this ; and these analytical statements of force and couple, extensions of Coulomb’s law for point charges, constitute the proper foundation of the theory of dielectrics. Thus, I say that the potential defined by ee ete L Hf.te[,e00) ——— a. 4A eo 84 W. B. SMITH-WHITE. is a mere auxiliary to the fundamental statements required. Then, defining the electric field by E= —V\ 9, these statements are =(P .\V)E G=PxE, and T=4P. (E,—E_)n. Here n is a unit normal drawn outward from f,, and E,, E_ are electric fields just outside and just inside the dielectric. On the basis of the above formulae for the mechanical action we may calculate the work done in any displacement of the parts of the system. We may examine a given system to see whether or not it is mechanically conservative. We find that electrostatic systems are not mechanically conservative in the sense that they are assumed to be by all the writers on electrical theory. The general acceptance of the fundamental misinterpretation of the Poisson- Kelvin hypothesis, by means of the potential formula above, makes it necessary for me to establish a case for my interpretation in terms of the formulae for the mechanical action. It is also desirable to draw attention to current and wide- spread misconceptions concerning the vital notion of energy in electrical systems. These considerations account for the length of this paper. The main results may be summarized in two formulae : 1. Let V denote the function | code —b] P . Edv V1 0, Then, in any infinitesimal deformation of the charge in v, and the dielectric in v,, the work done by the mechanical forces acting on the parts of the system is AW=— AV =| E. Apds, where /Apdv is the increment of the electric moment ee to the element dv as it moves in the deformation. 2. Suppose a dielectric body, held in equilibrium i in an electric field, suffers an infinitesimal deformation. Near a point A in the dielectric let Agq=heat absorbed by the dielectric per unit volume, Ai=inecrement of the internal energy of the dielectric per unit volume, 8 =the symmetric part of the mechanical stress in the dielectric, Avae—=the infinitesimal strain involved in the deformation. Then Ad= At—e8 Avog—E. Ap. At first sight these formulae may appear to contain little thatis new. They differ slightly from formulae which may be supposed to be well known. The second formula expresses the first law of thermodynamics for systems which contain dielectrics in an electric field. The proper formulation of this law, presented here for the first time, has been a subject of controversy in recent years. 1. PoISSON-KELVIN HYPOTHESIS. In 1845 Lord Kelvin wrote: ‘‘ As far as can be gathered from experiments which have yet been made, it seems probable that a dielectric, subjected to electrical influence, becomes excited in such a manner that every portion of it, & A — "| THE POISSON-KELVIN HYPOTHESIS. 85 however small, possesses polarity exactly analogous to the magnetic polarity induced in the substance of a piece of soft iron under the influence of a magnet. By means of a certain hypothesis regarding the nature of magnetic action, Poisson has investigated the mathematical laws of the distribution of magnetism and of magnetic attractions and repulsions. These laws seem to represent in the most general manner the state of a body polarised by influence, and therefore, without adopting any particular mechanical hypothesis, we may make use of them to form a mathematical theory of electrical influence in dielectrics, the truth of which can only be established by a rigorous comparison of its results with experiment ”’ (Kelvin, 1884). According to this statement we suppose that a dielectric under electrical influence becomes polarised so that a volume element dv acquires an electric moment Pdv. The density P of this moment is called the polarisation. The paragraph quoted means that the problem of dielectrics is reduced to, or replaced by, the problem of distributions of electric moment, but it does not say what we should suppose to be the behaviour of such distributions. The following remarks by Swann (1922) indicate very clearly the interpretation which is placed on the Poisson-Kelvin hypothesis in the literature of electrical theory. ‘‘ As regards the role played by dielectric phenomena in electrostatics little is to be said. The fundamental assumption is that the dielectric may be represented as regards its external action by replacing it by a distribution of polarisation P. This turns out to be the mathematical equivalent of a fictitious volume distribution, —div P, and a fictitious surface distribution which at each point of the surface has a density equal to Py, where the subscript n is taken as denoting the component in the direction of the outward normal. Thus in order to include dielectrics, no further extension is needed in the experi- mental law as formulated above.’? The law referred to is Coulomb’s law of inverse squares. This statement reduces the problem of moment distributions to the problem of distributions of electric charge, viz. the equivalent distributions of Poisson. In the next sections we shall have to consider some quite elementary matters which are usually regarded as completely known. There are, however, some important points to emphasize. 2. PoINT CHARGES. The mathematical theory of electricity begins with the assumption of a law of mechanical action between two point charges, viz. Coulomb’s law of inverse squares. In addition, a law of superposition is assumed, so that in the case of a number of point charges the mechanical force which acts on any one charge is the resultant of the several Coulomb forces which would act on it due to each of the other charges. It is then shown that the force which acts on any charge in the system may be expressed in an alternative way, by the construction of auxiliary space functions, the potential o and the electric field E. Thus, suppose we have a system of charges ¢,,...., én at points P,,...., Py. If P be any point in space, PPi=ri, the potential o is defined by n e; 00) 2A et gh I as Pe (1) i=in and the electric field is then E=—Vo. If now a charge e be placed at P, the mechanical force which acts on e is SS CS pre ahs se cae ahaa oder (2) The existence of this second specification of the force is of theoretical importance because it is capable of a wider generalization than is the original specification by means of the elementary law and superposition. 86 _ W. B. SMITH-WHITE. For the charges ¢,,...., €n at P,,...., Pn let oi be the potential at P; due to the charges other than ¢;. Then the energy of the system is found to be This result is usually obtained by one or other of two arguments. In one of these the charges are brought from infinity to their positions P,,...., Pn, one after another, and the total work done in this process, by the forces acting on the charges, is calculated. In the other argument, the charge at each place is accumulated gradually and proportionally, so that when the charge at P; is Ae; the potential at Pj is Api, and the work corresponding to an increment da is n n 2 Apieidr Adi: €i9i- iw i=1 Integrating from A=0 to A=1 the expression (3) is obtained. Now it appears that neither of the arguments outlined above establishes the real significance of the function U in relation to the system. This is that U, considered as a function of the spatial co-ordinates of P,,...., Pn, is a mechanical potential energy function for the system ; for this it would have to be shown that in a differential displacement of the points P,,...., Pn the work done by the forces acting on ¢,,....,é€n is equal to the differential of the function —JU. The usual arguments suggest rather that we should contemplate the physical entity called energy, and that in order to find the amount of this energy in the present case it is sufficient to calculate the work done when the charges are brought into their positions in any particular manner. This appeal to the notion of physical energy and to the physical principle of its conservation is wholly foreign to the mathematical theory of electrostatics as developed from Coulomb’s law. It is more important to note that, when applied to other electrical systems in which we are interested, these notions lead to results which are false. 3. POINT DIPOLES. Alongside the primary notion of point charge, a second fundamental element, in the construction of the mathematical theory, is the derived notion of point dipole. This is a point element specified by a vector p, its electric moment, and is conceived as a limiting case of two equal and opposite charges —e, +e separated by a small vector s; and p=es. The mechanical action of this hypothetical dipole, on a charge or on another dipole, is assigned by referring to its conceptual origin ; and we might specify this mechanical action by suitable formulae. But the alternative specification by means of suitable functions ©, E is much more convenient. We therefore say that the electrical properties of a point dipole are assigned by the following statements, the derivation of which need not be given here. The electrical potential at P, associated with a dipole p at Q, is 0) (ie) —4 1) v(3); ee (4) where r=—QP, and VY operates on the co-ordinates of Y. The corresponding electric field is E= —Vo9. If the dipole p lies near to electric charges or other dipoles, and if E be the electric field produced by the charges and other dipoles, then a mechanical force F acts on p given by Pp VE. vel oso ae (5) THE POISSON-KELVIN HYPOTHESIS. 87 and a mechanical couple G acts on p given by (eo) 0) i OIG A oe se As before the functions 9, E are mere mathematical auxiliaries convenient for the expression of the essential force F and couple G. In the next section we contemplate electrical systems consisting of several point charges and several point dipoles. It is important to recognize an essential difference in the conception of point charge on the one hand and point dipole on the other. Electric charge, like mass in ordinary mechanics, cannot be created or destroyed. The only way to increase the charge at a point is to bring up additional charge to the point. But dipole moment p is creatable and destructible. This arises from its origin as two point charges +e separated by the vector s. By altering s we create or destroy p=es. The recognition of the significance of this non-conservation of electric moment is fundamental for the present reconstruction of electrostatic theory. Thus in the consideration of systems of charges and dipoles we shall admit the possibility of varying the dipoles in situ, so to speak, without any necessity of bringing up to the point considered or of removing from it some amount of electric moment. 4, DISCRETE SYSTEMS OF CHARGE AND DIPOLE. It is usual to develop the mathematical theory of electrostatics on the ideal notions of continuous distributions of electric charge and of continuous distribu- — tions of electric moment. Of course, in view of modern knowledge of the structure of matter and electricity, of the existence of molecules and electrons, we claim no physical reality for such continuous distributions. The object rather is to set up a mathematical model system in which we can recognize a more or less close correspondence with.actual electrical phenomena; and the adequacy of the theory in this respect is to be judged as a whole. An alternative model which, at least in some respects, is not less close to physical reality than the system of continuous distributions, would be a model consisting of discrete point charges and point dipoles. If we consider a number of point charges aggregated together in one region, and a number of point dipoles aggregated together in another region, we have a model representing a dielectric body under the influence of electric charge, which we may expect to exhibit some of the features of the real physical situation. There are, besides, certain purely theoretical advantages in considering these discrete systems. The theory is clear cut ; it is free from certain subtleties of definition, and from certain difficulties of a purely analytical kind which are involved in the theory of continuous distributions. The fundamental error of replacing continuous distributions of electric moment by the equivalent charge distributions of Poisson has no analogue in the theory of discrete systems, for the obvious reason that there are no analogues to Poisson’s distributions. Consider then a system of charges ¢,,...., én at points P,,...., Py and of dipoles p,, ...., Pm at points Q,, ...., Qm, and introduce the following notation. Vector PiPj=qij, vector P;Qj=rij, vector QiQj=sij. Also, oi is the elcetric potential at P; due to all the elements other than e;; and E; is the electric field at Q; due to all the elements other than p;. We use the following formulae, which come from (1), (2) and (4). The potential due to e at position q is é PG? the electric field due to e at position r is Ep. igus? 88 W. B. SMITH-WHITE. the potential due to p at position —r is pit: o> reese? the electric field due to p at position s is p 3(p.s)s Mone || ere For the system of n charges and m dipoles AD iD SEE po be ee ee eb eae ote ee Se 7 ey gage) orgs P ”) ase EU ji , Pj (Dj 2 Sji) Si a rey : 34 eo au. a (8) In the summations 7 runs through 1, ....,”n or 1, ....,m according as the sum is over the charges or the dipoles ; and &’ indicates a summation in which one value, j=1, is omitted. For a second electrical system of charges and dipoles e’,,...., én; P’1, --++, D’m Set at the same points P,, ...., Pn; Qi, .-.-,Qm, let 9; and EB’; be the potentials and electric fields which correspond to g; and KE, in the first system. Then x e105 ee Pi 5 Ej=d C19 i sed Pi. E’;. a 0: aaah hace eae ete (9) i i i i This is Green’s reciprocal theorem extended to systems of charges and dipoles. To prove it we have from (7) and (8) ; ; ese e'spjteip’ Sei pi. => se 3 Sra i i PQ aj GY hae .'s ‘tas 4yP4 Ps _3y (P3 u)(P i it) Ae ties P 8Sji P Sji where & is a Summation in which 7 runs through 1, ...., m and 7 runs through i, j 1, ....,m; and X is a summation in which the pair 7, 7 runs through all permuta- P tions, two at a time, of 1, ....,n orl, ....,m as the case may be. Examining this expression it will be seen that an interchange of the dashed and undashed letters does not alter any one of its four terms. The relation (9) follows. Simplifying the notation and supposing that the charges in the two systems are the same, e’j=¢e;, we have ue(o'—o)=L(p. BE —p'.. Bek. wie (11) We need also the elementary work formulae as follow. If a charge e in an electric field E be given a differential displacement Au, the work done by the mechanical force (2), which acts on it, is BE. Au=—eE Au —ey on Ae —¢ ho ee ee (12) Similarly, if a dipole p in an electric field E be given a differential displacement Au the work done by the mechanical force (5), which acts on it, is F. Au=((p. V)E). Au=(p. V)(E. Au)=—(p. V) Ag = — pe AVY o) =p AWE. iste. sheer (13) In these statements Ao and /E are the differentials of the auxiliary space functions », E corresponding to the independent differentials of the co-ordinates of € or Pp. THE POISSON-KELVIN HYPOTHESIS. 89 5. THE GENERAL WORK FORMULA. Consider now a variation of the electrical system of charges e,, ...., é¢n and dipoles p,, ...., Pm at points P,, ...., Pn and Qj, ...., Qm. This variation consists of an infinitesimal displacement of the charges and dipoles and also, in accordance with the explanation at the end of §3, an infinitesimal change in the dipole moments p;. Thus the independent variables are the 3n cartesian coordinates of the charges e;, the 3m cartesian coordinates of the dipoles p;, and the 3m rectangular components of the vectors pj. The following notation for differentials will be used. A is a total differential with respect to all independent variables ; A’ is a partial differential with respect to the spatial coordinates of the charges and dipoles ; /A\" is a partial differential with respect to the components of the vectors p; ; A is a partial differential with respect to the coordinates of ¢ ;. A?i is a partial differential with respect to the coordinates of pj. Then, symbolically, TINE V8 a ee (14) [em ie Cle Pye tars Sah es (15) Consider the function Via ieok tip Whats a cbs Wott. (16) If we write e’;=¢;, p’i=pi in (10) and divide by 2, we have C40; €ipj - Tij Pi. Pj Y= Gray iG hie ae s3i° —3E eS oe eee (17) where & is a summation in which 7 runs through 1, ...., n and j runs through i,j 1,....,m; and & is a summation in which the pair 7, j runs through all com- Cc binations, two at a time, of 1, ....,n orl, ....,m as the case may be. In (17) the coordinates of ¢; are involved only in the terms pj - Tij = €1{0j. ripe Y Ci Day aeig) >> j Wij Hence AtV=4 Aq. Similarly, in (17), the coordinates of p; are involved only in the terms (Dj - Sji)Sji 8° = —p;. Ej. —pi. 2 ae 1 Pj ' —— i ea ie +Dpi eae Pi ; Hence AMV=—pr. APE. —A'V=—L aH Api +2 pr. APE, 1 1 and then, by (12) and (13), —A’V is the total work done in the displacement by all the mechanical forces acting on the charges and dipoles in the system. In (11) So from (15) p.E’—p’. E=p. (E’—E)—(p’—p). E. 90 W. B. SMITH-WHITE. So, for a differential variation of the dipoles, ue/A*o=X (p. A”"E—E.. /A\"p). Then, differentiating (16) A"V =3% €A"p —32 (p. A"E+E. /\"p) =72 (p. A"E—E. A"p)—32 (p. A”E+E. A\"p) =—DLE. A\"p=— XE. Ap, since A "p= /p. From (14) —NVi= AVE AVS — AV Ee: Thus, if we denote by AW the work done by the mechanical forces acting on the charges and the dipoles, we have AW=—AV—L EAD, 22 ee (18) This is the fundamental work formula. Its importance springs from the generality of the circumstances to which it applies. It gives a means of determining whether certain electrical systems are or are not mechanically conservative. It may be remarked explicitly that we have not included in AW any work which might be done by the mechanical couples which act on the dipoles of the system. It would be possible, with suitable conventions, to modify (18) so as to take account of the work done by the couples, but such a modification is not important in the present connection. In the case of the theory of continuous distributions, the formula which includes the work done by the couples is important, and it will be obtained in that connection later. Introducing the function we find from (18), AW=—AU+ixX(p. AE—E. Ap), ............ (20) which is another form of the fundamental work formula. 6. INDUCTIVE SYSTEMS. We call a system of point charges and point dipoles an inductive system if the dipole moments p; depend upon and are determined by the magnitudes of the charges ¢,,.....,é@n and the configuration of the points P,,....,Pn, Qi, .---,;Qm. Systems in which the dipole moments are all constants, and systems of charges only may be regarded as special cases. For a system of charges only, U=V and the formula (18) gives \W=— AU. Thus a system of point charges is mechanically conservative and U is its mechanical potential energy function. This is the result mentioned in §2. For a system of charges and dipoles in which the dipole moments are fixed we have \W=—AV. So this system, also, is mechanically conservative, and V is its mechanical potential energy function. Next examine the possibilities of a linear inductive system in which the dipole moments p; are determined by the conditions Pi=Ai ki, OR OR OR eC co (21) where the A; are constants, or more generally, depend upon the configuration of the points P,,...., Pn, Q1,----;Qm. The equations (21) in which the Ej; are replaced by the expressions (8), comprise 3m linear equations to determine the 3m components of the vectors p;. In an infinitesimal displacement of the charges and dipoles of this system, we have from (21), p. AE—E. Ap=—E Aj), THE POISSON-KELVIN HYPOTHESIS. 91 and then from (20), the work done by the mechanical forces acting on the elements of the system is NA = UEP a a ew (22) The simplest case is that in which the coefficients A’ are constants. Then AW=—AJU, and the system is mechanically conservative, and the function U is its mechanical potential energy function. When the coefficients A are not constants a new situation arises. Consider a linear inductive system in which these coefficients depend upon the dipole configuration Q,, ...-,Qm, only being independent of the positions of P,, .., Pn. As has been shown in detail for a special case, such a system is mechanically conservative if and only if the coefficients A are all constants (Smith-White, 1952). If the A’ vary with the configuration Q,, ....,Qm, the system is not mechanically conservative. However, for a displacement of the charges only, the configuration of the dipoles remaining fixed, equation (22) gives \W=— AU. Thus, provided the dipoles have a fixed configuration, but in this case only, the system is mechanically conservative, and U is the mechanical potential energy function. oe+d5e, D+D-+8D, this gives 1 dedv = — Es OD@e. eS ee ee 41 | NAR OAD airs | : v (41) Interchange dashed and undashed letters in (38) and subtract the new result from it. So 1 j ’ ee (D’', E—D. Bago ee (42) =| (P’. E

oe+do, P>P-+6P and D+D-+SD this gives | (eBp—pBp\do=y_ | (E.d5D—D.sdE)dv...... (44) =| (E.2P =P 2 8B)de ae (45) If in (42) we take p’=p and write D=KE, D’=K’'E, we have | o(p—9' )do= = (Fe 2B) Bde) (46) THE POISSON-KELVIN HYPOTHESIS. 95 For a differential variation K~K-+6K this gives | pdedv=—j-| 1 OF Oy EEL RE COCO (47) OF Va The identity PY o—div (oF) —o div,,.P gives —P . E=div (oP) —9 div P. Integrating over v, and applying Green’s theorem =| Pe Bao=| oP adf— | p div Pdv. V2 fe V2 Now define functions U, V by Then, by (39) ft =a, (E-+4nP) . Edy = 3] P. Bdo-+-| Edw. Ve 87 | s And ka oaido +4 | BP atp eal co div, Pai) ivi 0 wou (51) Vy fe Ve ee 2 aril: EOD Gh Wan, Secaeleampastran me irre eG ica eH yey By lok es Wee eID (52) 9. DISCUSSION OF THE LITERATURE. It is an essential part of the purpose of this paper to compare the present formulation of electrostatic theory with that given in the literature. There we find that the formulae (27) and (28) are mentioned only incidentally, their fundamental significance is unrecognized, and in many accounts they are neglected entirely. In no case are they made to play any part in the construction of the theory. Indeed most accounts give a force formula in dielectrics which is quite different from (27) and which is derived as an end result of the theory. I shall refer to this again below. On the other hand, the potential formula (30), which we regard as a mere auxiliary to the fundamental statements of mechanical effect, is usually regarded as embodying the whole content of the Poisson-Kelvin hypothesis. And then the moment distribution is replaced by the equivalent charge distributions of Poisson : 96 W. B. SMITH-WHITE. For the purpose of the following remarks it is convenient to recognize two main classes among the accounts of the theory of dielectrics which are available in the literature. On the one side there are those which attempt to keep the discussion quite general and assume no special relation between the vectors P and E; on the other side there are those which restrict all further discussion to the linear inductive case, assuming that the vectors P and E are linearly related and in particular than P=kE. It seems simplest to comment on the work of some recognized authors. Consider first de Donder (1925). He begins with the expression (3) as the ‘‘ energy ’’ of a system of point charges, and transfers it to continuous distribu- tions by the obvious procedure of replacing the sum by an integral. At the same time he regards the polarisation in v, a8 equivalent to the distributions of Poisson. In this process the exact notion of a mechanical potential energy function is obscured, but de Donder, not having emphasized this aspect, has not noticed the loss. By the transfer de Donder obtains his ‘‘ energy from the microscopic point of view ’’, viz. 3 j pedo oodf +% | epdv, 2 Ve and by (53), (54) and (51) this is the function V. By (52) this “‘ microscopic energy ” is distributed with a density By ‘“‘ neglecting the energy belonging to the moment distribution ”’, de Donder also finds an ‘‘ energy from the macroscopic point of view ”’, viz. 3 i epdv, V1 and by (48) this is the function U. By (50) this ‘“* macroscopic energy ”’ is distributed with a density i 3D ~ EL) weeset aed es ee (56) de Donder does not make clear which, if either, of his two energies is to be regarded as a mechanical potential energy function. It would seem a little incongruous to suppose an energy function to be distributed in space. de Donder remarks in his preface ‘‘ Quand on étudie l’énergie électrique localisée dans un champ électrique di 4 des volumes polarisés, il se présente une réelle difficulté ; nous la surmontons en nous placant respectivement au point de vue micros- copique et au point de vue macroscopique.’’ We can admit the difficulty, due to the misinterpretation of the Poisson-Kelvin hypothesis, that has been presented by the notion of energy in dielectrics, but it is not clear what difficulties are overcome by de Donder’s device of having two energies. The following is effectively the argument given by Stratton (1941). Suppose we have a dielectric occupying a volume v, and we accumulate gradually a charge to density pe, in the volume v,. To increase the charge density by Sp in the element dv the work done is pdedv and the total work done in increasing the charge by dp in 2, is THE POISSON-KELVIN HYPOTHESIS. 97 On the other hand the increase in charge inside v, will increase the electrical ‘potential by 5p with the consequent increase of energy of the charge pdv in dv, by an amount pdedv. So the total increment of energy is | aed, 2. NEU MONE ae ae eee (58) But the work done is equal to the increment of energy ; and so each is equal to if (pdp+pd¢)dv. Integrating we find for the energy of the system the amount U=} | epdv. V1 So, this is de Donder’s ‘“‘ macroscopic ” energy. The error in the above argument is apparent if we refer to formula (45). In general we have no grounds for asserting that the right side of (45) is zero. Stratton proceeds in his next paragraph to derive a different formula for the energy of an electrostatic system, and makes no comment on its incon- sistency with his first result. Corresponding to the increase of charge Sp in v, the work done is given by (57); and this is taken to be the increment of electro- static energy. Transforming this by (41), the increment of energy is al E . SDdv, are, 1 D al a| 1 TAPES De oat LA ka ae OE (59) on assuming that, at each point in the dielectric, D depends on E in such a way that E.65D is a perfect differential. The expression (59) is regarded as the general result and the corresponding energy density is and the total energy is 1 D a Bre OUD ay ss eos cba tiay or aislorate ou ae (60) We recognize then three different energy expressions in the literature. There are de Donder’s two expressions (55) and (56), of which the second arises also from an erroneous argument of Stratton. These two expressions are obtained without contemplating any functional relation between D and E. The third expression is (60), which is supposed to hold for a certain kind of functional relation between D and E. The text books of Jeans (1927) and of Abraham-Becker (1932), and the Lectures on Theoretical Physics by H. A. Lorentz (1931) discuss only the case when D and E are linearly related. Jeans and Lorentz do not mention the Poisson-Kelvin hypothesis in relation to dielectrics. The basis for the theory of dielectrics is effectively the assumption of Gauss’ theorem (37). Abraham- Becker derive Gauss’ theorem as above, but this is the only use they make of the Poisson-Kelvin hypothesis. With regard to the energy in dielectric systems Jeans and Abraham-Becker merely assume that results which are found by considering a simple parallel plate condenser will hold quite generally. In this way it is found that (56) represents the energy density in the medium, then by (50) that the whole energy of the system is U. It seems to be worth quoting 98 W. B. SMITH-WHITE. Abraham-Becker to see the importance they attach to the expression (56). ‘‘ The justification of the expression for the energy density of the field assumed in (4) (i.e. (56) above) will form an essential part of the following sections. Let it be remarked at once, however, that the assumption reaches far beyond electro- statics, and in particular that it remains valid even for fields which vary with the time. The main point is that it gives us a general method of calculating the forces which occur in the electrostatic field. For this application, we start from the fundamental theorem that the work done by the field in any arbitrary displacement of the charges is equal to the loss of field energy.’ In fact these authors apply their ‘‘ fundamental theorem ”’ to deformations of the dielectrics as well as displacements of the charges and in this they are not justified. Lorentz derives the same energy by an argument similar to the second one given for (3) above. He considers a system of conductors separated by dielectrics which need not be homogeneous nor isotropic. Assuming only that the vectors D and E are linearly related at each point of the dielectric, it is found that the work done to accumulate the charges on each conductor, gradually and pro- portionally,is U. So U is taken for the energy of the system. But the argument is not satisfactory, for it makes no use of a condition which is essential to the validity of the result. Using suffixes to distinguish the components of a vector, and using also the summation convention, we may write D,=Kig Hy. o ele 0 © e\e ep :0! ‘ey ehes ial selene aleb eile (61) The result is invalid unless the coefficient matrix Kij is symmetric. Quite generally U is the work done when the charge is accumulated in the manner specified, but unless the condition of symmetry is satisfied, other ways of charging the conductors would involve different amounts of work. This of course is the reason why we assert that Aj; must be symmetric for physical reasons, viz. the denial of perpetual motion. In the practically important case, when D and E are linearly related, the energy given by any of the above discussions is the same, excluding only de Donder’s microscopic energy; and this peculiarity seems to have been responsible, in part, for the failure to recognize the inadequacy of them all. It is not shown, in any account, that the energy obtained is a mechanical potential energy function for the system considered. That it is commonly assumed to be so will be evident from the discussion below. Consider next the body force acting in the dielectric or polarized medium. As has been said, the force (27) is usually neglected in the literature. It has been suggested that the body-force should be derived from Poisson’s equivalent distribution ; Chipart (1935). This would give a body-force HE div By o0 ee (62) and corresponding surface traction BP yeh i oe aca nee (63) The suggestion has the merit of consistency if Poisson’s distributions be really considered as equivalent to the distribution of electric moment. It may be noted that these formulae would give a total force and couple acting on the whole volume of the dielectric which is statically equivalent to that given by (27), (28) and (29). The usual account of the body-force in dielectrics is that due to Korteweg and Helmholtz and developed by Lorberg, Kirchoff, Hertz and others. It is expounded by Abraham-Becker, Cohn, Jeans, Stratton and also in the articles by Lorentz, Gans and Pockels in the Encyclopadie der Mathmatichen Wissens- chaften. It is included in the recent text book on theoretical physics by Weizel THE POISSON-KELVIN HYPOTHESIS. 99 (1949). This theory begins with the assumption that the energy as found above is a mechanical potential energy function for the electrical system, valid as such even when the dielectrics in the system are deformable. This assumption is of course not stated explicitly ; rather, it is said, that the work done by the body- force in a deformation of the dielectrics must, by the physical principle of conservation of energy, equal the decrease in the energy of the system. This is a mistake. These systems are semi-conservative in the sense of §6, and they are not conservative when deformations of the dielectrics in them are allowed. The argument is simplest in the case of a fluid dielectric. Let the medium in v, be subjected to an infinitesimal deformation specified by the vector u. Here u is a function of position in v,, and we suppose for simplicity that the normal component of u on the boundary of v, is zero. The charge in v, is supposed to remain fixed. We suppose also that D—=KE, where the dielectric constant K may vary from place to place in the fluid; and, for any particular element of the fluid, K may depend on the fluid density t. The energy of the system is U; and so if F™ denote the body-force in the dielectric we have | OO Oe id) ae eas sic ey) ages ae (64) From (48) and (47) 1 Seth a aa ee 2 sU=3| | ododv = E°8Kadv. To calculate 5K in terms of the displacement u, refer to rectangular coordinates OX,, OX,, OX, and suppose u has components u,, WU, uz. If AK be the incre- ment of K ‘ following the deformation ”’ we have ok Vehe = hy iG Tag and The last is effectively the hydrodynamical equation of continuity. So we find ea OK uy, AAS eS x ae Oay. Thus 1 78% 377 aes F i ae ok Cicr [Pant gal, Bae anc! Finally, owing to the special restriction on u at the boundary of f,, Green’s theorem gives so that 100 W. B. SMITH-WHITE. Hence sy A hes SU =." a) is oe “5, {ua Neng ae 7 | ee ene 65 Birt s) ee UG.) kee (65) Comparing (64) and (65), on account of the arbitrariness of u inside v,, we have Ov This is the force formula of Helmholtz which replaces (27) for fluid dielectrics. If we write K=1-+4rk, P=KE, we have Fh) _F—1V (w=95-(<)); tok ie (67) TAT 1 1 a) ee Mina AP ik: SHIA ME eel ae (2 ) JC) oie (66) which shows that F and F are in general different. Still another force-formula is common in the literature. Many authors ignore the variation of K with t and take the body force to be F, (bh) — eh, Be Oe eS ee (68) St This result is sometimes obtained independently of the above argument by connecting it with Maxwell’s stresses in the dielectric. 10. DEFORMATION OF CONTINUOUS DISTRIBUTIONS. After the digression of the preceding section we return to the development of the theory based on the force formulae of §7. The distribution of electric » moment is non-conservative in a sense already explained (§3) and it is necessary to study the deformation of such distributions. A deformation /\ of a continuous medium is determined when the displace- ment of every particle of the medium is specified. Taking a fixed rectangular system of axes, if ¥,, Ys, Y3 be the coordinates of the particle which originally occupied the position 7, %, x; then the deformation of a region is given by the three functions | (x, Lo, Ls), i=1, 2,3 defined throughout the region. If we suppose this deformation has been reached by a continuous movement from the initial to the final position then / will be regarded as a member of a family of deformations /\(t) which depend continuously on a parameter ¢: Yi=Yi (Ly, Lg, Lz, t), i=1, 2, 3. We take t=0 to correspond to zero deformation. The Jacobian O(Ys) Yor Y3) LOMA ge ORHAN A a IED 69 O(2%, Xa, X) ii V==V(t)=— is positive. An infinitesimal deformation is specified by the differentials 7] m=F At, i=1, 2, 3. eter tener eee ees (70) THE POISSON-KELVIN HYPOTHESIS. 101 We shall be concerned with infinitesimal deformations from the undeformed state; then the partial derivatives in (70) are taken for the value t=0, and Wit, and v1. Associated with the deformation there is an infinitesimal rotation. The strain is specified by the symmetric tensor du; uy peu | PL tite Am=H( Fn au) Se a a ARE (71) and the rotation by the anti-symmetric tensor , Ouj OU; Pirie (A eb Ata 2 Oi 2 ce ani) eoevreeeevr eee eee ce ee oo © (ii ) In vector notation, with the axes OX,, OX,, OX; supposed to be right-handed, we represent the rotation by CF CUI UM ee rs hewic dss leteiees os (oe) where u has components u;, © has components 0;, and 0,=0,;— —Qzp, ete. Let 9 be a function of position in the medium and suppose that » depends also on the deformation, i.e. on ¢. Denote by do the differential of 9 at a fixed point in space and by Ag the differential of ¢ ‘‘ following the displacement ”’. Then a Sp=—5n tat cei eacn Nie sn, Matte ON (74) For a vector function E let AE denote its differential ‘‘ following the displacement ”’ and referred to axes which partake of the infinitesimal rotation ©. Then applying (74) to each of the components of E and allowing for the rotation, we find is Sad ST Se OS . (7) OLy Consider now a distribution of a ‘“‘ quantity’ Q throughout a deformable medium. Let P be the density of the distribution and let p be the ‘ density ”’ reckoned per unit volume of the undeformed state. Then D—VE.. Hort —0;\v=—l. p—P, and Uy G AY Fy," ehioatcitcahe lsu et chet ste teteine. pancelce vetce ( ) So Ug, o6 From (74), oP Hence sp 7] le Sa Oe Co an, OP 7] 102 WwW. B. SMITH-WHITE. For the density P of distribution of a vector quantity, denote by Ap a differential referred to axes which partake of the rotation ©. Then, corres- ponding to (77), 0 dP= —2 (Pug) +O x P+ Ap. Lee (78) Ley For the density 9 of a conservative quantity (77) gives 7) de ene soles Gis sls ees eee (79) which is again the hydrodynamical equation of continuity. 11. THE GENERAL WORK FORMULA. Consider again an electrical system consisting of a continuous charge distribution with density o in v,, and a continuous moment distribution with density Pin v,. In the case of the non-conservative moment distribution it is useful to think of the electric moment as “‘ attached ”’ to a medium ; in fact the formulae of §10 apply to this situation. The force and couple acting in the moment distribution are supposed then to be transferred to this medium. In the application the medium will be the material substance of a dielectric body regarded as continuous. For the conservative charge distribution the notion of such a ‘‘ medium of reference ”’ is unnecessary ; or we may say that the medium is the ‘*‘ continuous electricity ”’ itself. A variation of the electrical system consists of moving the charge in v, and deforming the reference medium in v,. At the same time the electric moment associated with the parts of the medium may alter. An infinitesimal variation would be specified by defining the displacement vector u in v, and v, and by defining /Ap throughout v,. At the same time the medium in v, experiences the infinitesimal rotation ©. The work done by the forces and couples acting on the parts of the system is aw=| F.udr+{ F. udo+| G.Odo+| T. udf, where F, F, G and T are given by (25), (27), (28) and (29). This work may be transformed as follows. If 1; be the direction cosines of the outward normal to f, or f, a8 the case may be, we have, using Green’s theorem, \ Re udo= | eE. udv= = Se ants % OF v, | Oy, 7) 0 = =| pine Cuan’ al Orr. acre =— | PONGyUg df — { : pdpdv, hi 1 oH i EY. udv=|(P . udv= IE Pee an gat | Po-ge ta -|,P. u| ft ~—(P. Eu,)dv a] E. 5° -(Puy) do V2 V2 Ley, -/ oe p. ara { E. Apao— | E. 0x Pads, 2 V2 V2 Va THE POISSON-KELVIN HYPOTHESIS. 103 by (78). i G. Odv=| PXE. Odo= | E. Ox Par, Va ) Vg and | Tudf=}| P.(B.—E2)n.udf=}| P. (E,—E_)ngtigff. 2 fe Sa Also from (49) AV=4/ (059 +od¢e)du +4] PONG UyAf fi 2 -3{ (P. 3E+E. SP)dv—4 | P . E_ngtladf. Vo Hence, from (80), AW+AV+/ B. Apdv=i | (e89—gde)do—4 | ppnatladf 1 -1 (P. 3E—E. 5P)dv +4] P. E,notia lf. 2 Now the right member of this equation is zero. This follows from (45) if the deformation is such that the boundaries f, and f, remain unmoved. It follows generally from the extended form of (45) which I have given elsewhere (Smith- White, 1949). Thus This is the general work formula, the analogue, for continuous distributions, of the formula (18) for discrete systems. From (48), (49), (75), (78), Vi Au-a{ (P.d5E+E. aP)dv—a P. Engg df 0 i av+4{ ae Euz)do—4 | PE neu pele : =. (p. AE+E. Ap)dv =au-3{ (p. AE+E. Ap)dr, V2 since P=p in the initial state. So we find AW=—AU+3) (DiwNE— EVA Pp) doy ese. Ww): (82) 2 which corresponds to (20). 104 W. B. SMITH-WHITE. 12. THE THEORY OF DIELECTRICS. The considerations presented so far may be regarded as a purely analytical theory of continuous electrical distributions of charge and moment, based on the formulae for the mechanical effects given in §7. Now, by means of the physical hypothesis of Poisson and Kelvin, as we interpret it, and the physical assumption that P is determined by E, we make this analytical theory into a mathematical theory of the physical behaviour of dielectrics. The way in which E determines P at any point in the dielectric depends on the physical state of the substance at that point, including the condition of strain in the substance reckoned from some standard configuration. In the simplest circumstances we may suppose P=kE. If the substance of the dielectric is not homogeneous then k varies from place to place in it. If the substance be deformable the value of & for a particular element of the material may depend on its deformation from some standard state. A simple assumption, appropriate to the case of a liquid dielectric, is to suppose that k depends on the density t only. Then p=vP=vkE, and we find, for an infinitesimal deformation specified by the vector u, Ou p. AE—E. Ap=E?z? az) ion T) OL, Formula (82) becomes A et ce sa 20 k ao i 2 At\ rc] Oty, If, everywhere in the dielectric, te then AW=—AJU. In this case the system is mechanically conservative and U is its potential energy function. In general, however, the system is only semi-conservative ; if the dielectric is held rigid, \W=— AU, and the function U is again the potential energy function. The recognition of such non-conservative systems is a new feature in electro- statics. To make such systems acceptable from the physical point of view we must show how to fit them into a wider physical scheme in which physical energy is conserved. This offers no difficulty any more than it does in ordinary mechanics, where we are quite familiar with the fact that real mechanical systems are never completely conservative, but are erase) to a greater or less degree, dissipative. In a system which is not mechanically conservative there will exist cyclic processes in which the work done by the forces acting in the system is not zero. We assert simply that such a non-conservative cycle of operations in our dielectric system is irreversible; the cycle can be performed only in that way which dissipates mechanical energy. In the next section we consider the physical conservation of energy; and then it appears that the irreversibility asserted above is a formal consequence of the second law of thermodynamics. Consider the case in which P is uniquely determined by E and in which the dielectric body is held rigid. In this case the only variation in the system is a movement of the influencing charge. All cycles in the system are reversible. Formula (81) gives THE POISSON-KELVIN HYPOTHESIS. 105 and the denial of perpetual motion now requires that in any cycle i doifiE . 0P=0. This result may be applied to any volume element of the dielectric and so we must suppose that at each point of the dielectric E . SP is a perfect differential. From (52) AV he | SEde: At] s and combining this with (83) Nr E. Dav. AT hs Now, also, E.d5D is a perfect differential, and the system is mechanically conservative with the energy function (59). This justifies one common formula for the ‘“‘ energy’ as a mechanical potential energy function previding the dielectrics are held rigid. The system is really semi-conservative in the nomen- clature we have used. before. In particular, if the relation between D and E is linear, and represented by (61), the condition that E. dD be a perfect differential requires that K\;= Kyi, and then E.dD=}3(D.E). The energy function of the semi-conservative system is then =| D. Edv=U, Sit a by (50). Jeans (1927) reverses the above argument; he makes the proof that Ki; is Symmetric depend upon the assumption that the energy density is =D KE: 13. THE CONSERVATION OF ENERGY. Consider a piece of dielectric substance in volume v, under the electric influence of a charge distribution in volume v,, and held in equilibrium by suitable ‘* pressures ’? applied to its boundary f,. On the element df of f, acts the external force Ildf. Inside the dielectric the mechanical force and couple of electrical origin, 7.e. F and G given by formulae (27) and (28), must be balanced by the mechanical stress in the substance. The statical conditions for this internal equilibrium are written most concisely in tensor notation. Let Fi, Gi be the components of F, G in directions OX;, and if the axes OX,, OX,, OX; be right-handed, write G,=G.,= —G@35, etc. Then the couple G is represented by the anti-symmetric tensor Gi;. Let sij be the mechanical stress tensor specified, at any point A in the dielectric, thus : Draw at A a plane perpendicular to OX;, then si; is the component, in the direction OX;, of the force per unit area acting on the matter on the negative side of this plane, due to the matter on the positive side of it. The equilibrium equations are ney 84 are Tiere ie rece DEUS OT LAE Ue Mena eA TEA ROR (84) Sipe S est Gye Oey hits sacs ellen! dale, "e) 6 « (85) On the boundary f, there act the force T given by (29), the external force I mentioned above, and a force due to the mechanical stress inside v,. Tf Ti, Ti 106 W. B. SMITH-WHITE. are the components of T, II and if n; are the direction cosines of a normal to f,, outward from v,, the conditions of equilibrium of an element df of f, give — Ny So4 +7;+1i,;=0. eo: 1s (0) 6 0 0 e110) ©) #1! 6 ieiiehieniet ie (86) With regard to the charge distribution in v,, its sole purpose now is to provide the source of the electrical influence on the dielectric. We are not concerned to examine the internal equilibrium of the charge distribution in the way analogous to that for the dielectric. It is sufficient to suppose that the charge is maintained in position by some ‘“‘ external agency ’’ which provides a force, on each volume element dv of the charge, just sufficient to balance the force Fdv given by (25). For the electrical energy of the system we take the quantity ak wes 2 Veras t Edv:. bee eee ee (87) This is not now a mechanical potential energy function, but is energy in a physical sense. Only in a special case is V a mechanical potential energy function. This choice for the energy of an electrical system amounts to a definite physical assumption ; and it is justified by its consequences. There is no other obvious choice for the electrical energy of a system. It may be noted that this energy is the energy of de Donder from a microscopic point of view. We may now formulate the physical equation of energy, expressing the first law of thermodynamics, in a variation of the physical system consisting of a dielectric under the influence of electric charge. We suppose that the variation consists of a movement of the charge, a deformation of the dielectric, and an absorption or emission of heat by the dielectric substance. An infinitesimal variation is specified by the displacement vector u defined in v, and v,. If AQ be the heat absorbed by the dielectric, this is accounted for by (i) an increase /J of the ‘‘ internal energy ”’ of the dielectric, (ii) an increase AV of the electrical energy of the system, (iii) the work i F . udv done against the external agency holding the charge, (iv) the work — | Il . udf fa done against the external forces holding the dielectric boundary. So A= AT+AV+| F.udy— | We . Walls oe (88) Now set Gij== 5 (Si, Site eee aie se cee (89) a4j=4(81y — ji) Sil (4) els) 6s: 9/0. 6 6s 0) 0: lo Neleueaete (90) so that 61;, a1; are the symmetric and anti-symmetric parts of the mechanical stress tensor. Then by (71), (72), and (85) tage — (Gap +448)( A Yo8 +948) =Ge8 A YoB +408 Sef = Gap Aves —Gp 8p, THE POISSON-KELVIN HYPOTHESIS. 107 From (86), using Green’s theorem, and (84) re i 1. udf= | | Teupdf— | _, Rasoppas i | : Toupdf— : sa (Sapup)ae os i} _ Toupat— | i Ze upao a | : sap - | Tougdf + | _ Fougdo + | _ G90 — | dnp A vega =|, i a udf+| By: udo+ | G. @dv—| BB Avo RBdv. Hence, from (80) and (88), AQ=AT+AV+AW—| Sap Avago = ar—| tn Avapdo— | Bi Npdoe ew .!. (91) by (81). This result applies to any piece of dielectric substance whatever its dimensions. We infer the elementary relation A¢= At — Oo Avo —E ° APD, ey (92) where 7 is the internal energy per unit volume, and /q is the heat adsorbed per unit volume at any place in the dielectric. In a fluid @jj= —@dij, where @ is the hydrostatic pressure, and 3;;=1 or 0 as I=) or 17. Then 48 AVoR = —88a8 Ava B= —O Avon = —O Av by (71) and (76). So (92) becomes PGI INGE CEN AC = 208 AN a ea ae es Seer (93) Here /\v is the differential of a variable v determined by the state of the fluid ; whereas in (92) the Aw, are not differentials of such variables of state. Consider finally a dielectric held rigid but in which P is not uniquely deter- mined by E. For a variation of the influencing charge we now write (81) and (91) | sW= —3v—| E. 5Pdp, and 39=31— | E. 3Pdbv. Integrating over a cycle in which the influencing charge returns to its initial position and the dielectric returns to its original state, we have Q=W=—| do fiE. SP. 108 W. B. SMITH-WHITE. In this cycle heat Q is absorbed by the dielectric and an equal amount of work W is done by the mechanical forces acting on the influencing charge. The second law of thermodynamics requires that in any such physically possible cycle Q and W should both be negative. We infer that for any physically possible cycle PE. sPz0 at each place in the dielectric; and the left member is the heat generated per unit volume in such a cycle. 14. ELECTROSTATIC STRESS. The notion that all electric action between charged bodies is transmitted by, and through the dielectric, or intervening medium between them, is due to Faraday. Following him, Maxwell showed how to represent this action analytically by an appropriate system of stresses. At first the idea was that Maxwell’s stresses should be interpreted as real physical stresses in the medium, and attempts were made to assign physical properties to the medium so that these stresses might be considered to be induced by the electric ‘‘ displacement ”’ D in much the same way as ordinary elastic stresses in material bodies are induced by deformation of the substance of the bodies. This view has been abandoned, but unfortunately Maxwell’s stresses are often still described as the ‘‘ stresses in the medium ”’ or as the “‘ dielectric stresses’. These descriptions, being based on notions now rejected, are misleading. The electrostatic stress tensor merely provides an alternative and analytically equivalent way of describing the mechanical action on electrified bodies which is described otherwise by the body force (27) and the body couple (28). The analytical situation is quite analogous to the use of a scalar potential @ to describe a vector field E. In order to emphasize the purely formal aspect of the matter we develop the analytical relations, at first, independently of the application. Given a second order tensor si;, write 5,). Se MD: (104) In these formulae k and t refer to the actual deformed state of the dielectric in the existing field. For a fluid which is originally homogeneous and in which k and 7 are functions of the pressure only, the equations (103) and (104) may be integrated, giving do) and da'b) ok Dug gro? | t BD ov’ - THE POISSON-KELVIN HYPOTHESIS. 111 respectively. If, in addition, the fluid be effectively incompressible, we have : Gy — OEE Bas scans Bee i ars (105) and x Ok. Ge hee pa | sys scat seer sveine «ee ss (106) OT Thus GD) —@ =F 7? elk Ot\t If k is not proportional to t the two theories give different values for the pressure in the dielectric. Suppose we have a solid body immersed in a homogeneous fluid, the system being held in equilibrium by a suitable constraining force and couple applied to the body. The fluid develops the pressure ©. The force exerted directly by the electric field on the body has components | No Soi df HE where s;; is the tensor (98) and the integration is over the surface of the body. The reaction of the pressure in the fluid has components | cmdf= | OdQiNg Af. if uy Hence the resultant force acting on the body, which must be balanced by the constraint, has components | ; Ra tn CPT) Hae ROE mn ern (107) On the usual theory this force has components i (ME SGOS) Wadi sc. 2e! Soca ee (108) f Now from (98) and (105) or from (101) and (106) $j —05;j= UD —Godij, Mi; —@' $j; = UD —GoS4j, so that (107) and (108) reduce to the same expression i WMOmeap ke aise (109) if Thus the two theories give the same nett force acting on the solid. In a homo- geneous fluid the stress M o is self-equilibrating, 7.e. it corresponds to no body force. Then the integral (109) may be taken over any surface f in the fluid which encloses the body. From (99) the force components (109) are those of the vector K le Ce. : cam tote) an aoe oar ae (110) where n is the unit outward normal on f. This is the usual expression for the force acting on a body immersed in a fluid. 112 W. B. SMITH-WHITE. Finally, if we suppose that the coordinate axis OX, coincides with the direction of the electric force vector we see that the principal components of 2 2 2 > M) are react eee ; Minis and so this stress may be described as a tension y 87 81 8 along the lines of force of amount 2 81 pression. This is Faraday’s description of the mechanical action of an electric field ; but we see that it gives the nett force acting on the body which is the resultant of that due directly to its electrification and the reaction of the pressure induced in the surrounding fluid. In consequence this description has no fundamental physical significance. together with an equal lateral com- REFERENCES Abraham-Becker, 1932. Electricity and Magnetism. London: Blackie. Chipart, H., 1935. J. de l’Ecole Polytechnique, 2nd Ser., 33, 246. de Donder, Th., 1925. Theorie Mathematique de |’Electricite. Paris: Gauthier-Villars. Debye, P., 1925. Handbuch der Radiologie, 6, 742. Guggenheim, E. A., 1936. Proc. Roy. Soc., 135, 49, 70. Jeans, J. H., 1927. Mathematical Theory of Electricity and Magnetism. Cambridge Univ. Press. Kelvin, Lord, 1884. Reprint of Papers on Electrostatics and Magnetism. London: Macmillan and Co. Larmor, J., 1897. Phil. Trans., A, 190, 280. Livens, G. H., 1926. The Theory of Electricity. Cambridge Univ. Press. —-—-— 1948. Proc. Camb. Phil. Soc., 44, 534. Lorentz, H. A., 1931. Lectures on Theoretical Physics, ITI. London: Macmillan and Co. Smith-White, W. B., 1949. Phil. Mag., Ser. 7, 50, 466. —______———_-——— 1950. Nature, 166, 689. —-—________—_—— 195la. Nature, 167, 401. —-——_______——— 195lb. Proc. Phys. Soc., A. 64, 945. Smith-White, W. B., 1952. THis JouRNAL, 85, 15 Stoner, E., 1937. Phil. Mag., Ser. 7, 23, 833. Stratton, J. A., 1941. Electromagnetic Theory. New York: McGraw-Hill Book Co. Swann, W. F. G., 1922. Bull. Nat. Res. Council, 4, 24. Weizel, W., 1949. Lehrbuch der Theoretesche Physik. Berlin: Springer-Verlag. THE CHEMISTRY OF OSMIUM. Part VIII. THE PREPARATION OF SOME HEXAMMINE Osmium III SALTS. By F. P. DWYER, D.Sc., and J. W. HOGARTH, A.S.T.C. Manuscript received, August 2, 1951. Read, September 5, 1951. It was shown previously (F. P. Dwyer and J. W. Hogarth, 1951) that when ammonium bromosmate IV was heated at 285°C. in an autoclave under two atmospheres of ammonia, bromopentammine osmium III bromide could be extracted from the residue of the reaction. It has now been found that hexammine osmium III bromide is also formed in the reaction but, being much more soluble in water, is eliminated during the purification of the former sub- stance. By the use of a test tube to contain the ammonium bromosmate instead of small platinum boats, using a higher pressure of ammonia and allowing the autoclave to cool slowly, approximately 50% yields of the hexammine compound could be obtained. The hexammine bromide could be isolated from the reaction residue by extraction with cold water, when most of the pentammine compound remained insoluble, followed by repeated crystallization of the almost white precipitate thrown out by the alcohol from the aqueous extract. A better procedure depended on the very sparing solubility of hexammine osmium III iodide sulphate [Os(NH3),|I.SO,, which separated as white micro-cubes on the addition of sodium iodide and ammonium sulphate to the aqueous extract of the reaction residue. The iodide sulphate was transformed to the iodide [Os(NH3),|I, by treatment with barium chloride, to eliminate the sulphate ion, followed by the addition of excess sodium iodide, when yellow cubes separated. Other salts were made by double decomposition from the iodide. These were colourless or white unless the anion was coloured and much more soluble in water than the pentammine salts. The complex cation showed a very notable tendency to crystallize with mixed anions such as bromide-iodide, bromide sulphate, bromide bromosmate, etc. This behaviour recalls that of the hexammine cobalt III cation. The salts reduced silver nitrate to the metal on warming. One molecule of ammonia was easily lost when heated above 100° C. in the dry state or boiled with water. The pyrolysis of these substances is being investigated. The free base could not be obtained from the hexammine iodide solution and silver oxide. The silver oxide was partly reduced to the metal, whilst the dark coloured solution failed to reprecipitate the iodide after treatment with acid and potassium bromide. The hexammine could not be detected in the residue from heating ammonium hexachlorosmate IV and ammonia—the only product being the yellow substance dichloro-octammine-y-ynitrilo-diosmium trichloride described previously. EXPERIMENTAL. Hexammine Osmium III Iodide Sulphate. Ammonium bromosmate (2-0 g.) was placed in a test tube of 7 ml. capacity (4 cm. x 1-5 cm.), placed in the centre of the autoclave described previously. The air was displaced with ammonia 114 DWYER AND HOGARTH. gas and the full pressure of the cylinder (90-100 lb./sq. in.) applied for one hour. The pressure was then reduced to 40 lb./sq. in. (24 atmospheres) and the autoclave heated in an oil bath so that a temperature of 285—290° C. was attained in the centre. After one hour at this temperature, the heating was removed and the autoclave allowed to cool overnight at room temperature in the oil bath. The greyish-green mass of residue and liquid ammonia was allowed to stand in the air until the ammonia had boiled off, and was then ground up finely. The resulting almost white powder was extracted with water (25 ml.) three times and the filtered extract, which was orange coloured, treated with solid sodium iodide until a slight permanent precipitate resulted. The precipitate (probably bromopentammine osmium IIT iodide) was removed and solid ammonium sulphate (5 g.) added to the clear solution. The resulting almost white precipitate of the hexammine iodide sulphate was washed with 5% sodium iodide solution and recrystallized from hot water in the presence of a few drops of ammonia. Occasionally the substance had a rose colour due to traces of an unidentified impurity. It could also be recrystallized by shaking with a suspension of silver chloride to eliminate he iodide ion, and then addition of sodium iodide and ammonium sulphate to the clear solution. The substance crystallized in dense colourless or white cubes, which lost ammonia on heating to 110—120° with slight darkening of colour. The warm aqueous solution rapidly reduced silver nitrate solution to the metal, but only slowly decaiousZ et potassium permanganate solution or bromine water. Found: I=25:0%; N=16-5%. Calculated for [Os(NH,),]I.SO,: I=24-65%, N=16-3%. Hexammine Osmium IIT Iodide. The iodide sulphate (0:5 g.) was suspended in warm water (30 ml.) and normal barium chloride solution (5 ml.) added. The mixture was shaken for ten minutes and the barium sulphate filtered off. Addition of sodium iodide to the filtrate gave a yellow precipitate of the impure iodide, which was recrystallized twice from warm water by the addition of sodium iodide. The substance crystallized in dense bright yellow cubes. The aqueous solution was colourless. Found: Os=28:5%, I=56-2%, N=12-6%. Calculated for [Os(NH,),]I;: Os=28-25%, I=56-59%, N=12-47%. Hexammine Osmium III Chloride. The iodide was shaken with a suspension of silver chloride in warm water, and the filtrate precipitated with acetone and one drop of dilute hydrochloric acid. The substance crystallized in micro-cubes, and was deliquescent. Found: Os=47:3%; Cl=26-7%. Calculated for [Os(NH3;),]JCl,: Os=47-7%; Cl=26-5%. Hexammine Osmium III Bromide. The residue from the autoclave was extracted with the minimum volume of cold water, the extract cooled in ice and treated with alcohol. The rose-coloured crystalline precipitate was dissolved in the minimum amount of water, cooled and the slight precipitate of bromopentammine osmium bromide rejected. The pink solution was treated with solid ammonium bromide and alcohol to reprecipitate the hexammine bromide. 3 Alternatively a concentrated solution of hexammine osmium III chloride was treated with ammonium bromide and the impure bromide containing bromide-chloride dissolved in water and reprecipitated with ammonium bromide and alcohol. The substance crystallized in white cubes. The aqueous solution treated with ammonium | sulphate gave the sparingly soluble cubic bromide sulphate, which was not studied further. oe Found: Os=35:7%; Br=44:8%; N=15-7%. Calculated for [Os(NH,),JBr,: Os=35:-73%; Br=45-08%; N=15-79%. THE CHEMISTRY OF OSMIUM. 115 Hexammine Osmium III Bromide-Hexabromosmate IV Monohydrate. Hexammine osmium IIT iodide (0-2 g.) was shaken with a suspension of silver chloride in water (30 ml.), and to the filtrate was added ammonium hexabromosmate IV (0:2 g.) in water (25 ml.) containing concentrated hydrobromic acid (0-5 ml.). The dark brown solution, on scratching, deposited black stellate prisms. Found: Os=36:2%, Br=52-5%. Calculated for [Os(NH;),|Br[OsBr,].H,O0 : Os=35-9%, Br=52-81%. SUMMARY. The reaction between ammonium hexabromosmate IV and ammonia under 2-5 atmospheres at 285°C. has been found to yield hexammine osmium II bromide as well as bromopentammine osmium III bromide. The salts of the hexammine osmium III cation are usually white and much more soluble in water than the pentammine salts. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT. The authors are indebted to Mrs. E. Bielski for micro-nitrogen analyses. REFERENCE. Dwyer, F. P., and Hogarth, J. W., 1951. Tuis Journat, 84, 111. Department. of Chemistry, University of Sydney. PALLADIUM COMPLEXES. Part III. BRIDGED COMPOUNDS OF PALLADIUM CONTAINING OTHER METAL ATOMS ; COMPLEXES OF O-METHYL-MERCAPTOBENZOIC ACID WITH OTHER METALS. By 8. E. LIVINGSTONE, A.S.T.C. and R. A. PLOWMAN, B.Sc., Ph.D., A.S.T.C. Manuscript received, August 9, 1951. Read, September 5, 1951. Bridged palladium complexes have been reported by Mann and Purdie (1935, 1936), and similar compounds of cadmium and of mercury by Evans, Mann, Peiser and Purdie (1940). In all these complexes the metal atoms are the same, but Mann and Purdie (1940) prepared compounds containing both palladium and mercury, and cadmium and mercury, bridged by bromine atoms. Allison and Mann (1949) reported two bridged structures of tetravalent tin which contained mercury and palladium respectively. In our previous communication—Livingstone and Plowman (1951)—we reported bridged chloro and bromo derivatives of palladium containing o-methyl- mercaptobenzoic acid as a chelating group. Using the same chelating group and a similar method of preparation we have succeeded in preparing bridged compounds of palladium with mercury or copper as the second metal atom. They are: (i) bis(o-methyl-mercaptobenzoato)-y-dibromo-palladium (II)- mercury (II), and (ii) bis(o-methyl-mercaptobenzoato)-u-dibromo-palladium (1I)-copper (II) 2-hydrate. Pact aa LN .2H,0 S0.¢.08 on” oe: a O ch, I II The compounds are insoluble in water, very sparingly soluble in hot alcohol and chloroform, but insoluble in benzene, toluene and acetone. These compounds are interesting in view of the fact that, in the case of the bridged dipalladium and the bridged palladium-copper compounds, the configurations of both metal atoms should be planar, whereas in the case of the analogous palladium-mercury compound the palladium should be planar while the mercury atom would be expected to be tetrahedral, since divalent mercury invariably exhibits the tetrahedral configuration. Compound ii appears to be the first bridged compound of copper containing another metal that has been reported. It is theoretically capable of existing in two isomeric forms cis and trans, but since only one form was obtained, it is assumed that it has the trans configuration. PALLADIUM COMPLEXES. 117 Mann and Purdie (loc. cit.) were unable to prepare bridged compounds of mercury and palladium, using mercury (II) chloride and mercury (II) iodide ; also these workers were unsuccessful in making a mixed palladium-cadmium bridged compound. During the course of this investigation attempts were made to prepare mixed palladium-mercury bridged compounds using mercury (II) chloride and mercury (II) iodide in place of mercury (II) bromide with bis(o-methyl-mercaptobenzoato) palladium (II) but all attempts failed. Similarly no analogous palladium-cadmium compound could be prepared using cadmium (II) bromide. It has been stated by Mann and Purdie (loc. cit.) that the formation of a bridged compound containing two different metals must be dependent to a certain extent on the valency lengths and intervalency angles of each of the four-covalent metallic complexes. Livingstone and Plowman (loc. cit.) also demonstrated that the formation of bridged compounds of palladium is highly specific in its dependence on the nature of the attached ligand, since they were unable to obtain bridging using several other chelating groups attached to palladium. Similar specificity was found by Mann and Purdie (1935) in that bridged compounds of palladium were formed with trialkyl-phosphines and arsines, but not with dialkyl sulphides. Further evidence for the above state- ments is afforded by the fact that, in this investigation, bridged compounds were obtained with palladium and mercury, and also with palladium and copper, but no analogous compound was obtained containing palladium and cadmium, using similar procedures. The reaction of the chelating group o-methyl-mercapto-benzoic acid with metals other than palladium was investigated. The palladium compound has been previously described—Livingstone, Plowman and Sorensen (1951). The only metallic salts which were found to give insoluble compounds with o-methyl- mercaptobenzoic acid were those of Cu™, Hg", Cd" and Ag’. The compounds obtained were: (iii) bis(o-methyl-mercaptobenzoato) copper (II); (iv) bis- (o-methyl-mercaptobenzoato) mercury’ (II); (v) bis(o-methyl-mercapto- benzoato) cadmium (II) ; (vi) silver (I) o-methyl-mercaptobenzoate. CHs . Sees VAN -—-O > 6 CH, Where i = Cu, Hg and Cd Whether o-methyl-mercaptobenzoic acid acts as a chelating group in the case of the silver compound (vi) is open to question. The mercury compound has been previously reported by Sachs and Ott (1926), who gave the melting point as 158-9° C. We found the melting point to be 165-165 -5° C. While Pd™@, Cu™, Hg™ and Cd™ form stable insoluble compounds with o-methyl-mercaptobenzoic acid, only Cu and Hg™ were found to give bridged compounds with Pd". EXPERIMENTAL. (i) Bis(o-methyl-mercaptobenzoato)-.-dibromo-palladium (II)-mercury (1). Mercury (II) bromide (0-6 g.) dissolved in water (40 ml.) was added slowly to a boiling aqueous solution (180 ml.) of bis(o-methyl-mercaptobenzoato) palladium (II) (0-9 g.). After ten minutes heating at the boiling point crystals began to form. After a further fifteen minutes’ 118 LIVINGSTONE AND PLOWMAN. heating, the product was filtered and washed well with hot water, then acetone. The yield of 1-21 g. consisted of deep yellow tetragonal prisms of m.pt. 212° C., which were insoluble in water, acetone, benzene, toluene and only very sparingly soluble in boiling alcohol and chloroform. Found: Pd, 13:4%; Hg, 25:0%; Br, 19-97%. (C,H,O,S),PdHgBr, requires: Pd, 13-31%; Hg, 25-03%; Br, 19-94%. (1) Bis(o-methyl-mercaptobenzoato)-.-dibromo-palladium (I1)-copper (II) 2-hydrate. To a boiling aqueous solution (120 ml.) containing bis(o-methyl-mercaptobenzoato)palladium (II) (0-5 g.) and potassium bromide (5 g.) was added a solution of copper (II) bromide (1-2 zg.) and potassium bromide (8 g.) in 25 ml. water. After five minutes crystallization commenced and after a further fifteen minutes’ heating, the chocolate brown crystalline product (0-65 g.) was filtered hot, washed well with alcohol, then acetone and dried over P,O,; ; m.pt. 208° C. On heating in a closed tube, water is evolved at a temperature just below decomposition. Found: Pd, 15:3%; Cu, 9:3%; Br, (i) 22:0%, (ii) 22-0% (on a separate preparation). (C,H,0,8S),PdCuBr,.2H,O requires: Pd, 15-24%; Cu, 9:08%; Br, 22-82%. It was found that in the absence of potassium bromide, products were obtained which had low Br and slightly high Pd content. These results are consistent with the possibility that one Br bridge is replaced to a small extent by an OH bridge, this effect leing lessened by the presence of an excess of bromide ion. A similar tendency was observed in the preparation of bis(o-methy]- mercaptobenzoato)-u-dibromo-dipalladium (II) (Livingstone and Plowman, 1951). (iii) Bis(o-methyl-mercaptobenzoato) copper (II). o-Methyl-mercaptobenzoic acid (0-33 g.) dissolved in one equivalent of sodium hydroxide solution was added to a warm aqueous solution (10 ml.) of copper (II) bromide (0-33 g.). The crystalline product (iii) precipitated immediately as bright green prisms, insoluble in water and decomposing at 152° C. Found: Cu, 15-95%. Cu(C,H,0,8), requires 15-97%. (iv) Bis(o-methyl-mercaptobenzoato) mercury (II). o-Methyl-mercaptobenzoic acid (0:33 g.) dissolved in one equivalent of sodium hydroxide, was added to a hot aqueous solution of mercury (II) chloride (0-27 g.). The compound (iv) gradually precipitated, yielding 0-31 g. of thin colourless needles, often bunched together in brushes, and insoluble in water; m.pt. 165-165-5° C. Found: Hg, 37-8%. Hg(C,H,O.S), requires: Hg, 37-50%. (v) Bis(o-methyl-mercaptobenzoato) cadmium (II). To a boiling solution of o-methyl-mercaptobenzoic acid (0-75 g.) in one equivalent of aqueous sodium hydroxide (20 ml.) was added slowly an aqueous solution (10 ml.) of cadmium (IT) chloride 2-5-hydrate (0:51 g.). After two minutes well-formed colourless dendritic crystals (0-9 g.) were deposited. M.pt. 286° C. Found: Cd, 25-2%. Cd(C,H,O.8), requires: Cd, 25-16%. (vi) Silver (1) o-methyl-mercaptobenzoate. (a) Silver acetate (0-4 g.) was dissolved in 50% ethyl alcohol (40 ml.) and added slowly to a boiling alcoholic solution (30 ml.) of o-methyl-mercaptobenzoic acid (0:4 g.). Thin colourless needles of m.pt. 234° C. were deposited. Found: Ag, 39-4%. AgC,H,O,S requires: Ag, 39-22%. PALLADIUM COMPLEXES. 119 (6) A solution of o-methyl-mercaptobenzoic acid (0-4 g.) in one equivalent of aqueous sodium hydroxide (20 ml.) was added to a hot aqueous solution (20 ml.) of silver nitrate (0-4 g.). Colourless needles of compound (vi) were deposited. M.pt. 232°C. Found: Ag, 39-4%. SUMMARY. Bromo bridged compounds containing palladium and mercury, and palladium and copper, with o-methyl-mercaptobenzoic acid, C,H,O.S8, as a chelating group, have been prepared; viz. (i) (C,H,O,S),PdHgBr, and (ii) (CLH,O,S),PdCuBr,.2H,O. Compounds of o-methyl-mercaptobenzoic acid with the following metals: copper (II), mercury (II), cadmium and silver— (iti) Cu(C,H,0.8). ; (iv) Hg(Cs,H,O0.8)2; (v) Cd(CsH,0.8),; and (vi) AgC,H,O,S are also described. REFERENCES. Allison, J. A. C., and Mann, F. G., 1949. J.C.S., 2915. Evans, R. C., Mann, F. G., Peiser, H. S., and Purdie, D., 1940. J.C.S., 1209. Livingstone, S. E., Plowman, R. A., and Sorensen, J., 1951. THis JouRNAL, 84, 28. Livingstone, 8. E., and Plowman, R. A., 1951. Tuis JouRNAL, 84, 188. Mann, F. G., and Purdie, D., 1935. J. Soc. Chem. Ind., 54, 814. Mann, F. G., and Purdie, D., 1936. J.C.S., 873. Mann, F. G., and Purdie, D., 1940. J.C.S., 1230. Sachs, G., and Ott, M., 1926. Monatshefte fiir Chemie, 47, 415. Department of Inorganic Chemistry, School of Applied Chemistry, N.S.W. University of Technology. THE ESSENTIAL OIL OF A PHYSIOLOGICAL FORM OF HUCALYPTUS CITRIODORA HOOK. By A. R. PENFOLD, F.A.C.L., F. R. MORRISON, F.A.C.L., J. L. WILLIS, M.Sc., H. H. G. McCKERN, A.A.C.L, and (Mrs.) M. C. SPIES, A.A.C.1. Museum of Applied Arts and Sciences, Sydney. Manuscript received, October 12, 1951. Read, November 7, 1951. Following the announcement of the occurrence of a physiological form of Eucalyptus citriodora by two of the authors (Penfold and Morrison, 1948), the investigation described hereunder was undertaken. The results obtained have confirmed those obtained in the preliminary experiments that the chief constituent of the oil of H. citriodora (Type), namely citronellal, has been largely replaced in the new form by an equiva- lent amount of citronellol and its esters. The amount of foliage available for investigation has been insufficient for a determination of the minor con- stituents, but these will be dealt with in a subsequent communication. The principal components so far identified are citronellol and its acetic and citronellic acid esters, and citronellal. Also under investigation are oils from individual trees containing percentages of aldehyde varying from 40 to 50 per cent., percentages which indicate an intermediate position between the form described in this paper and the “‘ Type ”’ oil. It is worthy of note that the trees, whose foliage yielded essential oils containing only about 10 per cent. citronellal, were observed in their natural habitat growing in close environmental association with trees of normal oil composition (65-85 per cent. citronellal) referred to in this paper as the ‘‘ Type ”’. All the trees examined were found to be morphologically indistinguishable from one another, but for purposes of identification, the physiological form described in this paper will be referred to as Variety ‘‘ A”’. THE ESSENTIAL OIL. The essential oils obtained by steam distillation of the foliage of eight individual forest trees were almost water white in colour. All possessed a pleasant odour of citronellol modified by that of its esters. The odour differed markedly from the sharp aldehydic odour of citronellal, which is characteristic of the oil of the type species. The yields and range of physico-chemical character- istics, together with those of the ‘‘ Type” oil for comparison, are shown in Table 1. A PHYSIOLOGICAL FORM OF EUCALYPTUS CITRIODORA HOOK. 121 TABLE I. Eucalyptus citriodora Hook., Variety ‘“‘ A ’’. Eight Trees from Cordalba, Queensland. Sol- Yield, ubility Ester Ester Alde- Tree Date % on 15° n20” 20° in 70% No. No. hyde No. | Received. | Sample di D D w/w 14 hrs. after Con- Remarks. y as Re- alc Hot Acetyl- tent ceived. Vol Sap. ation % 12/ 7/48 1-4 0-8855 |} 1-4569 | +2-55° — 120-00 231 0:9 pee dry, leaf only. 2, 30/ 7/48 0:8 0:-8876 | 1-4608 |+2-1° — 149-5 228 6-1 Fresh leaves and terminal branchlets. 3 2/11/48 2-0 0:°8825 | 1-4570 |+1-5° 1:25 86:5 271 11-0 Do. 4 11/ 1/49 1°8 0:8830 | 1:4544 |+0-7° 1°3 116-0 265 14-0 Fresh leaf only. 5 11/ 1/49 1-6 0:8864 | 11-4556 |+0-8° 1:3 127-0 249 12-0 Do. 6 23/ 1/50 3-0 0:-8872 | 1-4507 |+1-01° 1:4 191-4 258 6:0 Air. dry, leaf only. 7 23/ 1/50 1°5 0:8736 | 1:4541 |—0-90° 1-7 149-5° 270 11-0 Do. 8 13/ 6/50 3:4 0:8853 | 1°4521 |—0-7° 1:5 163-0 277 14-0 Do. Type 0:5 0:8640 | 1:4511 |+3° to | 1-3 to 12 to 230 to 65 to | Fresh leaves oil to to to —3° 1-5 60 to 85% and terminal] 0:75% | 0:8770 | 11-4570 292 branchlets. EXPERIMENTAL. The oil from tree No. 8 was selected for examination. The aldehyde content was determined by the hydroxylamine method of the Essential Oil Sub-Committee of the Society of Public Analysts (1932). The ester number after acetylation was equivaleent to 96-2% of acetylizable substances (calculated as C,)H,,O) in the original oil. Forty millilitres of the crude oil were fractionally distilled at 10 mm., the fractions obtained having the characteristics shown in Table II Residue — 3 TABLE II. Fraction ee 20° 20° No. B.p. Vol., ml. 15 nee Gas 1 70— 96° 6 0: 8666 1-4544 -5-6° 2 95-106° 6 0-8772 1-4536 —4-4° 3 107-—109° 24 0- 8839 1- 4504 +0-64° Determination of Ci ronellal. Fraction 1 yielded a semicarbazone, m.p. 84° from petroleum ether, and a yellow 2 : 4-dinitrophenylhydrazone, m.p. 80° from ethanol, both alone and in admixture with authentic specimens of these derivatives. Fraction 1 thus appears to consist principally of citronellal. Determination of Citronellol. A portion (20-5 ml.) of the crude oil was saponified with 0-5N alcoholic potassium hydroxide (250 ml.) at room temperature for two days. After dilution with water, 18 ml. of oil were recovered from the solution of potassium salts of the acids derived from the esters. The oil (15 ml.) after drying with anhydrous Na,SO,, was heated for two hours on the steam bath, under a reflux with phthalic anhydride (15 g.) and benzene (15 ml.). The cold reaction mixture was 122 PENFOLD, MORRISON, WILLIS, MCKERN AND SPIES. neutralized with aqueous potassium hydroxide and freed from unchanged oil by extraction with ether. After removal of ether the alcohol was recovered by steam-distillation with excess of sodium hydroxide. Ten millilitres of a colourless oil of pleasant rose-odour were obtained having , 15° 20 dis 0-8620, D. citronellol. Supporting evidence for the presence of this alcohol was obtained by the preparation of the allophanate, m.p. 106-107°, and the silver salt of the acid phthalate, m.p. 126°. (Mixed melting points showed no depression.) Hence the primary alcohol, free, and combined as ester, consists entirely of citronellol. 1-4556, a, +1:71°. These constants correspond closely with those of Determination of Acids (Citronellic and Acetic) Combined with Citronellol. The solution of potassium salts of the acids derived from the esters was evaporated to a small volume and extracted with ether to remove traces of oil. After removal of residual ether, the solution was acidified with dilute sulphuric acid. About 1-5 ml. of an oily acid separated which was converted directly to rts silver salt. 0-1003 g. silver salt yielded 0-0393 g. silver=39-18% Ag. Silver citronellate requires 38-99% Ag. 15° 15 0:9431, A further specimen of the oily acid was isolated, and had b,, 140-153°, d at 1°4591, ean +1:0°. D The benzylthiuronium ester was prepared, m.p. 146-147°, both alone and in admixture with an authentic specimen. This acid is therefore citronellic acid. The aqueous solution from the separation of the oily acid was steam distilled, the distillate being collected in three fractions. After neutralization with ammonia, each fraction was evaporated to a small volume and the silver salt of the acid prepared. Fraction 1. 0-1004 g. Ag salt gave 0-0651 g. Ag=64-84% Ag. a 2. 00-2608 g. Ag salt gave 0-1692 g. Ag=64-88% Ag. Sn 3. 0-1966 g. Ag salt gave 0:1275 g. Ag=64-85% Ag. Silver acetate requires 64-67% Ag. From a mixture of the silver salts of each of the foregoing fractions an anilide was prepared, m.p. 114°, undepressed in admixture with an authentic specimen of acetanilide. This acid is therefore acetic acid. No evidence was obtained for the presence of formic, butyric or valeric acids. REFERENCES. Essential Oil Sub-Committee of the Society of Public Analysts, 1932. Analyst, 57, 773. Penfold, A. R., and Morrison, F. R., 1948. Aust. J. Sci., 11, 29. AUSTRALASIAN MEDICAL PUBLISHING COMPANY LIMrrep | ~ Seamer and Arundel Streets, Glebe, N.S.W. = 1952 : Eee ih wy « PROCEEDINGS | oe Se Re 195%) - (INCORPORATED 1881) - gage e --. =OPART IV. (FEB 0 (05a VOL. LXXXV - Ee 2 EDITED BY ae sate IDA A. BROWNE, D.Sc. pase oe Honorary Editorial Secretary _ THE AUTHORS OF PAPERS ARE ALONE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE STATEMENTS MADE AND THE OPINIONS EXPRESSED THEREIN ee: SYDNEY : Lee ss PUBLISHED BY THE SOCIETY, SCIENCE HOUSE _—-——,s GLOUCESTER AND ESSEX STREETS = 1952 e oe Containing Papers read in December, 1951 ee 1 Plates VII and VIII, pp. 123-156 and Index, pp. XXIX-XXXI_ Part IV Arr. XIII. —The Occurrence of a Physiological Form of aioe oitieouaedt Fr. :. uel and Its Essential Oil. By A. R. Peale F. R. Momsen: J. L. Bee -McKern and a) M. C. Pee sik | Asie ta pi Pe Heat ree “Wales By Ida A. Brown and Kathleen M. Sherrard "Antimony! Tartrates, By F. P. ‘Dwyer and (Miss) i “C. Gyarfas « XVI. —Coordination Compounds of Conper AIT. ees Todo-cupra tes as f es “Acotone Solution. By C. M. Harris... oe Se as ee ee i i Ar. _XVIL—Some Complexes Derived from Silver Sli! ‘By Cc. M. Harris e ‘Arr. XVIII. —Coordination Compounds of Copper. TVs. ‘Some Cuprates (I) f Solution. BY, C. M. Harris and H. N. oS ceca eR Sage ‘Solution. By C. M. Harris and HL N. ‘Ss. Schafer : i : hee XX.—Palladium Complexes. IV. Bancieas bai Palladium Compo . Gece orem By S. E. Hiyingsions dt } THE OCCURRENCE OF A PHYSIOLOGICAL FORM OF BACKHOUSIA CITRIODORA F. MUELL. AND ITS ESSENTIAL OIL. By A. R. PENFOLD, F.A.C.L., F. R. MORRISON, F.A.C.I., J. L. WILLIS, M.Sc., H. H. G. McKERN, A.A.C.I., and (Mrs.) M. C. SPIES, A.A.C.I. Museum of Applied Arts and Sciences, Sydney. Manuscript received, November 14, 1951. Read, December 5, 1951. The species Backhousia citriodora has been described by Bentham (1866) and Bailey (1900). The tree is of medium size and occurs in restricted belts in the rain forests (‘‘ brush ’’) between Brisbane and Rockhampton, Queensland. The essential oil was first described by the firm of Schimmel & Company of Miltitz, Germany (1888). It was shown to consist almost entirely (95 per cent.) of the aliphatic aldehyde, citral. In 1923 one of the present authors (A.R.P.) examined oils from trees cultivated at Ashfield, N.S.W., and confirmed ~the above finding. Although the natural stands of this tree are not extensive, small quantities of the oil have been distilled and marketed spasmodically during the past sixty years. The oil was found to be very constant in composition, the citral content being within the range of 90-97 per cent. Mr. J. R. Archbold of Maryborough, Queensland, whilst engaged in the production of oil from trees growing near Miriamvale, about 160 miles north- west of Maryborough, as recently as June, 1950, noticed a slight difference in odour of one of the distillates, which indicated that a different kind of oil was present in some of the leaves distilled. Examination of additional single tree samples by the authors revealed the occurrence of a physiological form of Backhousia citriodora. The oil from these particular trees was found to consist largely of citronellal, in contradistinction to the Type, which contains 90-97 per cent. of citral. This observation was recorded by the authors in the Australian Journal of Science (1950). It is of interest to note that this is the first recorded occurrence of lwvo-citronellal in an Australian essential oil. The citronellal isolated from this source possesses the highest optical rotation yet recorded, viz. ap —14-21°. A survey of the area was made by two of the authors (F.R.M. and J.L.W.) in June, 1951. The trees were found scattered throughout an area of about ten acres on a steep, rocky hillside in dense rain forest: (‘‘ brush ’’). Some of the trees were very large, one in particular being 92 ft. high, with a girth at breast height of 6 ft. 8 ins.; the average tree, however, was about 12 ins. in diameter. The variant trees were located in two pockets, each containing about a dozen trees, of which six or seven were variants and the remainder normal. All the trees examined were found to be morphologically indistinguishable from one another, but for the purposes of identification the physiological form described in this paper will be referred to as Variety “‘ A”’. L PENFOLD, MORRISON, WILLIS, MCKERN AND SPIES. 124 ce 66 66 ZSSF-T ob-O+ PLSP-T 280-0+ OL8F-T whee. ad 0S" 208" ‘ad AT, “TEN og? ‘TI GTaViL $9-0 bE-0 &&-0 % Tt JO PlelaA “i ‘DLopoijia pisnoyyovg ¢ € G Z #1Z T ‘OT "SOARBO'T ‘ON JO UBIOM ejdureg ‘PIO ‘oTBAULLLITAL “AYPROOT 1¢/9/F T¢/9/¥ 09/8/82 "34eq *sqUONYSUOD 9[qGezITAQO0" *yU90 Jed ONT 0} JUETVAINDS ‘QG6Z JO oqUINU 10489 UL py ‘UOT}RTAQOO" 1047" ‘G “ON o[duIVeS— ALON 16 Peetet “SHTIIM “TI “£ pure wosir ~IOW “HU “A AQ poqoo]qop 16 F201 “Plog “YSIV “A “£ AQ poyoo]qop 66 “s[OA §-T % (AA/ MA) “SyIVUley queyuog *[OWOoLy [ery %0L Ul AVTEQNOS SHIIM “'T “£ pue Uosir SON 4 Aq Bee 21199 4:64 - ss %0: $2 0-11 + - > 706 62 b-O1 e ce ce do¥ BL &-6 %G-B9 T-OT “plod “Yory “UW “£ AQ poeqoa][op %L:99 ‘ef ETL *quoyU0n ‘deg *SYIVULOY IeIl9 40H -UOIPIO simoy £T ‘ON Joqsi 9697 -T 9697-1 TvaP- 1 L6GP-T TLo7-T 99G7-T dad 0S" 096: 6L— 064? LL— Obes Mba oG L-GL— 008 -6— of8-6— 006 T498-0 GOLZ8-0 8298-0 8998-0 8648-0 FEL8-0 og 8-0 98-0 ‘aT *SOAVOT jo oTdules JUSTOAA Vo, SOHVA “TON “L vloporpa msnoyyong ‘T ATaVL se ce C6 oe 66 6e 6é ce ce a3 +“ pr® ‘eTeaureLTy £4100] 1¢/9/F 04/8/82 0¢/9/6T 0¢/9/61 0¢/9/6T 0¢/9/6T *poaleooyy eyed A PHYSIOLOGICAL FORM OF BACKHOUSIA CITRIODORA F. MUELL. 125 THE ESSENTIAL OIL. The essential oils obtained by steam distillation of the foliage of individual forest trees were of a pale lemon tint, and possessed the characteristic odour of citronellal. The oil, in fact, is almost identical with that of the Type oil of Eucalyptus citriodora, which has been marketed for many years. The yields and physico-chemical characteristics are shown in Table I. The principal constituents identified were [-citronellal and d-isopulegol. Small quantities of citronellol and esters were present. For comparative purposes, the essential oils obtained from trees of the Type species growing alongside the physiological form were also examined.. The principal constituent was citral (91-92 per cent.). The results are shown. in Table II. EXPERIMENTAL. Backhousia citriodora, Variety ‘ A”’. A total of 88 lb. of leaves and terminal branchlets was subjected to distillation in steam, six separate distillations being conducted. The respective crude oils were individually examined, and the results obtained are summarized hereunder. Determination of 1-citronellal. ‘The percentage of aldehyde present in each sample of oil was determined by the hydroxyl- amine method of the Essential Oil Sub-Committee of the Society of Public Analysts (1932). Samples 3 and 4 were used for the separation and identification of citronellal. The oil was shaken with sodium bisulphite solution, and the crystalline compound separated, washed with ether-alcohol mixture, and dried. It was subjected to steam distillation in the presence of an excess of sodium carbonate, the citronellal thus isolated possessing the following constants : bios 88°, 42° 0-8555, n2°” 1-4477, ap —14-21°. It yielded a semicarbazone, m.p. 83-5° after recrystallization from hexane, and a 2 : 4 dinitrophenylhydrazone, m.p. 81° after recrystallization from ethanol. Mixed melting point determinations with authentic specimens of these derivatives showed no depression. Determination of d-isopulegol. (a) Sample No. 6 (25 g.) was heated with an equal weight of phthalic anhydride in benzene solution on the steam bath for eight hours. The phthalic acid ester was subjected to steam distillation in the presence of an excess of sodium hydroxide. A water-white oil (3-6 ml.), possessing the characteristic odour of isopulegol, was isolated. It had the following constants : ai8” 0-9235, n2°° 1-4700, ap +8-68°. It yielded, with naphthyl-isocyanate, a well defined «-naphthyl urethane, m.p. 120°, after recrystallization from methanol. A mixed melting point determination with an authentic specimen from another source showed no depression. (6) Sample No. 5 (29 g.) cooled to 0° C. was added to a solution of hydroxylamine hydro- chloride (40 g.) and potassium carbonate (40 g.) in 200 ml. water at 0° C. After 24 hours’ agita- tion, the oximated oil was separated, dried and fractionated at 14 mm. Fraction 1 (3 ml.) had b. 94-98°/14 mm. and a}3° 0-9147, 02° 1-4726, ap +4-08°. Fraction 2 (2 ml.) had b. 98-110°/14 mm., whilst the remainder of the oil, the oxime of citronellal, distilled at 136-146°/14 mm. The physical constants of Fraction 1 agree well with those for isopulegol, and the identity of this alcohol was confirmed by its yielding with «-naphthyl-zsocyanate an «-naphthyl-urethane of m.p. 120-121° from methanol. Determination of Citronellol. The citronellal was removed from samples No. | and 2 by distillation at 9-5mm. The residue was treated with an equal weight of phthalic anhydride in benzene solution on a steam bath for 126 PENFOLD, MORRISON, WILLIS, MCKERN AND SPIES. two hours. A small quantity of phthalic acid ester was isolated, which, on steam distillation with an excess of sodium hydroxide, yielded 1 ml. of an alcohol possessing the characteristic rose odour of citronellol. On treatment with cyanic acid, the allophanate was obtained, m.p. 104: 5°, which was undepressed in admixture with an authentic specimen from another source. Backhousia citriodora, Type. Identification of the Principal Constituent, Crtral. Citral was determined as the major constituent of the oils of the Type trees growing adjacent to the trees of Backhousia citriodora, variety ‘‘ A’. The oils from the Type (see Table II) were | mixed, treated with 35 per cent. neutral sodium sulphite solution, and the citral isolated in the usual manner. The citral so obtained was water-white and had b,, 105-107°, ata 0- 8920, n20° 1-4885, a, --0°. It yielded a citryl-6-naphthocinchoninie acid, m.p. 199—200° on recrystal- D D y: yy Pp p yi lization from alcohol, unchanged in admixture with an authentic specimen from another source. SUMMARY. A physiological form of Backhousia citriodora F. Muell., has been observed in the rain forest near Miriamvale, Queensland, growing in association with the Type species, and has been designated Variety ‘‘ A’”’. The essential oil contains /-citronellal (62-80 per cent.), d-isopulegol, citronellol, and ester. The Type species from the same area contains 91-92 per cent. of citral. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS. Thanks are due to Mr. J. R. Archbold, who drew our attention to the occurrence of this form, and for his co-operation and assistance during the visit to Miriamvale. | To the Queensland Forest Service, and particularly to Mr. W. R. Suttie, District Forest Officer at Maryborough, Queensland, and his staff, we are greatly indebted for their wholehearted co-operation in this investigation. REFERENCES. Bailey, F. M., 1900. ‘‘ The Queensland Flora ’’, Part IT, p. 644. H. J. Diddams & Co., Brisbane. Bentham, G., 1866. ‘‘ Flora Australiensis ’’, Vol. 3, p. 270. Lovell, Reeve & Co., London. Penfold, A. R., 1923. Sydney Technological Museum Bulletin, No. 5, p. 5. Penfold, A. R., eé al., 1950. Aust. J. Set., 13, 27. Schimmel & Co., 1888. Bericht., April, p. 17. Society of Public Analysts, Essential Oil Sub-Committee, 1932. Analyst, 57, 773. GRAPTOLITE ZONES IN THE SILURIAN OF THE YASS-BOWNING DISTRICT OF NEW SOUTH WALES. By Ips A. BROWN,” D.Sc., and KATHLEEN M. SHERRARD, M.Sc. With Plates VII and VIII and two text-figures. Manuscript received, November 14, 1951. Read, December 5, 1951. PART I. STRATIGRAPHY. (I.A.B. and K.M.S.) INTRODUCTION. The Yass District has been well known for its shelly faunas, especially those from Hatton’s Corner, since fossils were first recorded from Yass Plains by Strzelecki in 1845. Graptolites, however, were not recorded from the area until Mitchell (1886a) exhibited to the Linnean Society of New South Wales, from Bowning, near Yass, ‘‘. . . specimens of Graptolites, probably undescribed, and certainly the first recorded from N.S8.W., showing that the formations there which have hitherto been regarded as Devonian are in reality Silurian.” In the same year Mitchell (1886b) published an account and illustrative section of the Bowning beds, but did not refer to the graptolites. His section showed the Bowning beds folded into a syncline. In 1888(a) he exhibited further graptolites from Bowning and ‘ Belle Vale’’. He also noted (18885) ‘“‘ several graptolites from micaceous sandstones in the Lower Trilobite Bed on the eastern side of the syncline; and in shaly sandstone on the western side, in the Great Shale bed.”’ No exact locality was given, nor were the graptolites named specifically or generically. In 1902 T.S. Hall identified ‘* Monograptus allied to M. dubius ”’ in specimens collected by Mitchell from the Lower Trilobite bed at ‘ Belle Vale ’’, a large property lying between Yass and Bowning. Shearsby (1912) recorded among the fossils in the Barrandella shales at Yass, Monograptus (?) and Dendrograptus. In 1915 Mr. Shearsby (Sherrard and Keble, 1937) discovered Monograptus cf. vomerinus in a spoil-heap made near Bowning railway station during railway works. In 1937 Sherrard and Keble described several species of Monograptus from Silverdale, two miles east-north-east of Bowning and seven miles north- north-west of Yass (indicated as ‘‘ Graptolite Bed’? on Plate VII). These were the first graptolites described from the district whose exact source was known. The graptolite most abundant at this locality, as will be shown in this paper, is Monograptus salweyi from the zone of M. scanicus in the Silurian of Britain. An account of the stratigraphy of the Yass-Bowning District was published by one of us (Brown, 1941), in which all previous work was summarized and all recorded fossils from the district were assigned to their proper stratigraphical * Mrs. W. R. Browne. 128 BROWN AND SHERRARD. horizons. The field-mapping indicated that the Monograptus horizon of Sherrard and Keble, 1937, is stratigraphically above the ‘‘ Dalmanites Bed ”’ (=‘* Phacops Bed” of Jenkins, 1878; =-‘‘ Middle Trilobite Bed ”’ of Mitchell, 1886), as clearly stated in the paper (Brown, 1941, pp. 320, 324, 328, 333, 334, Plate XIV). The Dalmanites bed contains abundance of Dalmanites meridianus Eth. & Mitchell, 1895, and there is thus no justification for Gill’s assumption (1948) that the age of this trilobite is not Silurian. Portion 7 16 Ae ee petien 15 5 Ss f | is : > oo key te (oe PARISH ~ yy z U n y ; Taemas Road Fig. 1.—Sketch-map to show relationship of graptolite-bearing beds in Portion 15, Par. Hume, near junction of Good Hope and Taemas roads. In 1947 Messrs. G. Packham and J. Veevers, under the guidance of Mr. A. J. Shearsby, discovered Monograptus bohemicus in shale immediately below the Dalmanites bed, west of Hatton’s Corner, two miles west of Yass. Subse- quent collecting by Mr. Shearsby and the two present writers has confirmed this discovery and shown that the bohemicus bed persistently underlies the Dalmanites bed, wherever the latter is shown on the accompanying map (Plate VIT). Miss G. L. Elles of the Sedgwick Museum, Cambridge, has kindly examined specimens from this bed and states they are of the type of M. bohemicus which is characteristic of the top of the M. nilssoni zone of the Silurian. GRAPTOLITE ZONES IN THE SILURIAN OF THE YASS-BOWNING DISTRICT. 129 Furthermore, the sandstone described by Sherrard and Keble (1937) with graptolites from the zone of Monograptus scanicus has since been located at several places about two miles south of Hatton’s Corner, not far from the eastern edge of Portion 15, Parish of Hume, near the junction of Taemas and Good Hope roads (Text-fig. 1; Plate VIII, figs. a, b). On the side of a grassy hill near this point Monograptids, though rare, have been found on at least three horizons, up to 200 feet stratigraphically above the Dalmanites bed, which outcrops below the sandstone with M. scanicus zone graptolites. Beneath the Dalmanites bed is found shale with M. bohemicus. Finally, Monograptus vomerinus has been found about the middle of the Black Bog shales in the western branch of Reedy Creek near its crossing by the Good Hope road (Plate VII). SEQUENCE AND CORRELATION. The Silurian sequence in the Yass-Bowning district has been described by one of us (Brown, 1941). The sedimentary rocks have been divided into the Bango, Yass and Hume Series in ascending stratigraphical order, separated from each other by rocks of igneous origin. Graptolites have been found in the Hume Series alone, which is therefore the only one considered in this paper. This series consists of limestones, shales, sandstones and conglomerates arranged in the following descending order : | | Approximate | ‘Thickness Accompanying Graptolites. (in Feet). Tuffaceous conglomerate... ae 150 Shale and sandstone oe: nal 50 (?) Upper Trilobite bed .. ois sie 20 Shale and conglomerate ae es 100 Sandstone ile ys - sot 12-20 .| Monograptus salweyi, M. cf. twmescens, Dictyonema. Sandstone ie re hs 5 eae 200 M. salweyt. Middle Trilobite bed (Dalmanites | bed) .. oN ef Se: eae 4 bohemicus bed ie Bes Me 6 M. bohemicus, M. nilssoni, M. crinitus, | M. roemeri, Dictyonema. Black Bog Shales... ae Se | 200 M. vomerinus. Hume Limestone (=Lower Trilobite | | bed) .. ay ee AC Set 0-20 Monograptus allied to M. dubius. Barrandella Shales... se a 5-150 Monograptus (?). Bowspring Limestone it a 0-100 Although it has been generally recognized, and particularly by Etheridge (1891) and Dr. Dorothy Hill (1940), that the shelly fossils of the Hume and Bowspring Limestones and the associated beds are approximately of the same age aS those of the Wenlock (Etheridge) or Wenlock-Ludlow boundary (Hill) of Britain, few, if any, of the species are identical. On the other hand the graptolitic fauna, which has now been found in close association with the shelly fauna, includes on one horizon (the bohemicus bed) four species of Monograptus which are all restricted to the zone of M. nilssoni of the Lower Ludlow of Britain. The same assemblage is found in the Henryhouse Shale of Oklahoma, U.S.A. (Decker, 1935). Moreover, the dominant graptolite of the overlying salweyi beds at Yass-Bowning is highly characteristic of the M. scanicus zone of Britain. 130 BROWN AND SHERRARD. The graptolites thus permit a more exact correlation of the Yass-Bowning and British sequences as indicated below : Zones in Britain. Equivalents in Hume Series. Monograptus scanicus. M. salweyi (in sandstone). LOWER Dalmanites (Middle Trilobite) bed. LuDLow. Monograptus nilssoni. | WM. bohemicus (in shale). Cyrtograptus lundgrent M. vomerinus (in Black Bog Shales). WENLOCK. to Monograptus allied to M. dubius (in Lower Trilobite Bed). Cyrtograptus murchisoni. Monograptus (?) (in Barrandella Shales). It will be seen, however, that there appears to be no marked break in the sedimentation at Yass between the equivalents of the Wenlock and Ludlow, since about half-way up the thick Black Bog Shales occurs Monograptus vomerinus, which is found throughout the Wenlock succession in Britain, while immediately above the Black Bog Shales is the six-feet bohemicus bed with its assemblage of graptolites restricted to the M. nilssoni zone of the Lower Ludlow in that country. PART II. SYSTEMATIC DESCRIPTIONS. (K.M.S.) Order GRAPTOLOIDEA Family Monograptidze Lapworth, 1873. Genus Monograptus Geinitz restricted, 1852. Monograptus bohemicus (Barrande, 1850). Plate VIII, Fig. d; Text-fig. 2, d. Monograptus bohemicus (Barrande), Elles and Wood, 1911, 367, pl. xxxvi, figs. 4a-d. Rhabdosomes up to 7 cm., but more usually about 2 cm. long and 1-3-2 mm. wide. Strong ventral curvature of the rhabdosome continuous throughout length in the short examples, but with straight distal section in the few long ones. Thece 10 to 14 in 10 mm., up to 2 mm. long and 0-5-0-7 mm. wide. Proximal thece sometimes seem longest and are impressed into a sigmoidal bulge by the overlying thecze where the rhabdosome is most curved. Distal thece are straight. Apertures of thecze in proximal region appear convex, but become concave distally. Overlap one-third to one-half. Inclination 35 to 40 degrees. Sicula 1 mm. long and 1 mm. wide at its base, with virgella 0-7 mm. long. Gregarious habit. Associates : M. nilssoni, M. roemeri, M. crinitus, Dictyonema, cf. Orbiculoidea, Pterinea retroflexa, Cardiola fibrosa, Hurypterid. Localities: Beneath Dalmanites bed, 200 yards south of Yass River, west of Hatton’s Corner, Portion 7, Par. Hume; Portion 15, Par. Hume, near junction Good Hope and Taemas roads ; Portion 5, Par. Yass, on Black Range road, beneath the Dalmanites bed outcropping near this road between the Hume Highway and 14 miles south-south-west of it. GRAPTOLITE ZONES IN THE SILURIAN OF THE YASS-BOWNING DISTRICT. 131 Monograptus nilssoni (Barrande). (Plate VIII, figs. ¢, f; text-figs. 2e, g. h.) Monograptus nilssoni (Barrande), Elles and Wood, 1911, 369, pl. xxxvii, figs. la-e. ere a (Barr.) Frech, 1897. Lethea paleozoica, i, 662, Taf. A, ewe. Rhabdosome 5 em. long with slight concave curvature. Width 1 mm., thece 8 in 10 mm., just under 2 mm. long and 0-4 mm. wide. Overlap a quarter. Thecee have convex ventral walls and an aperture at right angles. Inclination 20 degrees. uD Big: 2: (c) M. salweyi (Hopkinson), Portion 15, Par. Hume. d) M. bohemicus (Barrande), Portion 7, Par. Hume. e) M. nilssoni (Barrande), Portion 7, Par. Hume. M. roemeri (Barrande), Portion 7, Par. Hume. (h) M. nilssoni (Barrande) ‘“‘ Linograptus ’’, Portion 7, Par. Hume. (A.M., F44613.) (a) Monograptus crinitus Wood, Portion 7, Par. Hume. (A.M., F44615.) ) Monograptus nilssoni also occurs in groups of rhabdosomes branching off from near sicula forming what has been called ‘‘ Linograptus’’ (Frech, 1897 ; Boucek, 1932). Four, six or more branches radiate from a small central plate with webs joining each stipe near the point of bifurcation. Very slight curvature, thece developed (8 in 10 mm.) on inner side of curve, overlap negligible. Branches 0-3 to 0-5 mm. wide and up to 7 mm. long. Thecal apertures slightly concave. Associates and locality: As for M. bohemicus. 132 BROWN AND SHERRARD. Monograptus salweyi (Hopkinson). (Plate VIII, figs. a, b; text-figs. 2b, c.) Monograptus chimera var. salweyt (Hopkinson), ENies and Wood, 1911, 400, pl. xxxix, figs. 5a-d. Monograptus salweyi (Hopkinson), Elles, 1944. Geol. Mag. Ixxxi, 275. Monograptus flemingu (Salter), Sherrard and Keble, 1937, 313. Rhabdosome up to 2:0 cm. long, sometimes showing slight dorsal curvature proximally, which is probably due to the graptolites being observed from a dorsal aspect. Width, proximally 0-8 mm., distally 1-6 mm. Sicula, including virgella, 1 mm. long, reaching to opposite aperture of first theca. Thece 13-11 in 10 mm., up to 2-5 mm. long, with a spine which is usually curved and is up to 1 mm. long.. Proximally spines occupy one-half to one-third width of rhabdo- some, distally one-quarter to one-fifth. Overlap one-half to two-thirds. Thece 0-4 to 0-6 mm. wide. Thecal apertures sometimes concave, sometimes convex. When convex and the aperture has a curved spine, the appearance of a hook is suggested. Proximally, the walls of thece are first convexly curved then bent over in a concave curve. Virgula prolonged 3 mm. beyond rhabdosome, as is characteristic of M. salweyt. M. salweyi from Silverdale (Portion 34, Par. Derringullen) is slightly wider and longer and has fewer thece in 10 mm. than those from the Parish of Hume. Those from the former locality show a more pronounced S-shaped curvature of their thecal walls, which when continued into a spine almost amounts to a hook. Associates : Monograptus cf. tumescens, Dictyonema, Craniops, (2) Zygospira, ef. Lissatrypa, cf. Parmorthis, Howellella, Plectodontid, Serpulites. Localities : Portion 15, Par. Hume; Black Range road, Portion 125, Par. Yass; Portion 34, Par. Derringullen. Discussion.—At Silverdale the sandstone, in which this graptolite was first found, is not underlain by the Dalmanites bed nor by shale with M. bohemicus, so that its age relative to the bohemicus band is not obvious. When first found, this graptolite was identified as M. flemingw (Sherrard and Keble, 1937). How- ever, in 1950, when Miss Elles generously made available for comparison type specimens of M. chimera var. salweyi (Hopk. m.s.), it was evident that the graptolite from Silverdale, previously named M. flemingii, is actually M. salweyt (Elles, 1944), occurring here in the rigid form which is characteristic of the zone of M. scanicus. At Silverdale, these graptolites are imbedded in the sandstone in such a way that a certain amount of torsion has occurred, giving a hooked appearance to the thece in some views. The discovery, near the junction of Good Hope and Taemas roads, of M. bohemicus (characteristic of the zone of M. nilssoni) in a bed conformably underlying sandstone containing the graptolite under discussion, is confirmation that the latter must belong to the zone of M. nilssoni or higher, and therefore cannot be M. flemingu, which does not range higher than the zone of M. vulgaris. Monograptus crinitus Wood. (Text-fig. 2a.) Monograptus crinitus Wood, Elles and Wood, 1913, 435, pl. xliv, 3a-e. Rhabdosomes 2 cm. long, 0-5 mm. wide. Usually occurs as bundles of fragments. Slight ventral curvature. Thece 9-10 in 10 mm., 1-5 mm. long, 0-3 mm. wide. Overlap less than half. Angle of inclination 25 degrees. Apertures horizontal, sometimes pressed out to denticles. Associates and locality: As for M. bohemicus. GRAPTOLITE ZONES IN THE SILURIAN OF THE YASS-BOWNING DISTRICT. 133 Monograptus vomerinus (Nicholson). Monograptus vomerinus (Nicholson), Elles and Wood, 1911, 409, pl. xli, la-e. Rhabdosome straight, 1-5 cm. long, 1 mm. wide. Distal fragments only preserved, with virgula. Thece 13 in 10 mm., nearly 2 mm. long, 0:5 mm. wide. Thece have convex ventral margin with well-marked thecal edge, overlap one-half to one-third. Inclination 30 degrees. Aperture concave, almost pouch-like with denticle or spine occasionally suggested. 3 Locality : Reedy Creek crossing of Good Hope Road, in Black Bog Shale. Monograptus roemeri (Barrande). © (Plate VIII, fig. g; text-fig. 2f.) Monograptus roemeri (Barrande), Elles and Wood, 1911, 397, pl. xxxix, 2a-d. Rhabdosome under 2 mm. wide with ventral curvature. Thece 18 in 10 mm., each 2 mm. long, 0-3 mm. wide, overlap three-quarters. Associate: M. bohemicus. Locality: As for M. bohemicus. Order DENDROIDEA. Dictyonema sp. (Plate VIII, fig. e.) One poorly preserved fragment, 2-5 cm. long, 1 cm. wide, apparently flabelliform, but incompletely preserved. Branches 8 in 10 mm., each branch about 0-3 mm. wide and 0:25 mm. apart. Dissepiments up to 20 in 10 mm., mesh 0-5 mm. long and 0:3 mm. wide. Monograpius bohemicus is superimposed on specimen ; from bed below Dalmanites bed. Dictyonema sp. also occurs at Silverdale with M. salweyt. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS. Facilities for carrying out this work have been kindly made available to the writers by Professor C. E. Marshall, D.Sc., Ph.D., of the University of Sydney. Professor W. B. R. King, F.R.S., of the University of Cambridge, England, was good enough to allow one of us (K.M.S.) to examine graptolites in the collections of the Sedgwick Museum. She also wishes to thank Miss G. L. Elles of the Sedgwick Museum for the generous help and advice she gave her. The other writer wishes to acknowledge financial assistance for field expenses from the Commonwealth Research Grant (University of Sydney). REFERENCES. Boucek, B., 1932. Vestnik Stat. Geol. ustav. Ceskoslav. Rep., 8, 145. Brown, I. A., 1941. Tuis Journnat, 74, 312. Decker, C. E., 1935. Journ. Pal., 9, 434. . Elles, G. L., and Wood, E. M. R., 1911, 1913. Mon. Pal. Soc., 64, 66, 359, 415. Etheridge, R., Junr, 1891. Rec. Aust. Mus., 1, 201. Etheridge, R., Junr., and Mitchell, J., 1895. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 10, 485. Gill, E. D., 1948. Tuis JourNAL, 82, 16. Hall, T. 8., 1902. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 27, 654. Hill, D., 1940. Jbid., 65, 388. Jenkins, C., 1878. Jbid., 3, 21. Mitchell, J., 1886a, 6. Jbid., 1, 577, 1193. —-———— 1888a. Jbid., 3, 150. — 1888). Rept. Aust. Ass. Adv. Sci., 1, 291. Shearsby, A. J., 1912. Jbid., 13, 106. Sherrard, K., and Keble, R. A., 1937. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 62, 303. Strzelecki, P., 1845. Physical Descriptions of New South Wales and Van Diemen’s Land. 134 BROWN AND SHERRARD. EXPLANATION OF PLATES. Pruate VII. Geological sketch-map of the Yass District. (Reprinted from These Proceedings, Vol. LX XIV, 1941, Plate XIV.) PLATE VIII. All photographs taken by I. A. Brown. | The numbers refer to specimens registered in the collections of the Australian Museum, Sydney. (a) Monograptus salweyi (Hopkinson), Portion 15, Par. Hume. No. F44607. Mag. x2.3. (6) M. salweyi (Hopkinson), Portion 15, Par. Hume, No. F44608. Mag. x2.3. (Note extension of virgula). (c) M. nilssoni (Barrande), Portion 7, Par. Hume. F44609. Coll. Messrs. G. Packham and J. Veevers. Mag. X2.3. (d) M. bohemicus (Barrande), Portion 7, Par. Hume. F44610. Coll. A.J. Shearsby. Mag. x 2.3. (e) Dictyonema sp. and M. bohemicus, Portion 7, Par. Hume. F44611. Coll. Messrs. G. Packham and J. Veevers. Mag. x2:-3. (f) M. nilssons (Barrande) ‘‘ Linograptus”’, Portion 7, Par. Hume. F44612. Coll. Mr. C. V. G. Phipps. Mag. x2.3. (g) M. roemeri (Barrande), Portion 7, Par. Hume. No. F44614. Mag. x2.3. (h) Dalmanites bed and underlying bohemicus bed, showing true dip. Half mile south of Yass River and half mile west of Hatton’s Corner, Portion 7, Parish of Hume. ne ee ee a Boambolo a Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. LNXXV, 1951, Plate VIT 2 4 i——|] F Sook Ee SEN ‘ac! 9 Sat 5 fides : S tas 3; 3 a , 2 fs S Za | i ; =) = is zy : 3 qo é > ) BE ey i Ge Se 2 Re, S wD i: : : i HB of x LORS = 2 § rs z 3 se, BE So) dp} 5 z 2 KN 8 a ae ee S| > z ss Oo OEM eL . ‘sung, * ) ¢ AY gPirapee g Ans hs fachells Creek 2 & HUI Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. EXXXYV, 1951, Plate VIII Se ROOTS ie ae RS SSS SS SOR eS we teitp D fy * ' 5 a ; 1 ti as THE RESOLUTION OF TRIS-2: 2’-DIPYRIDYL METAL COMPLEXES THROUGH THE IODIDE ANTIMONYL TARTRATES. By F. P. DWYER, D.Sc., and (Miss) E. C. GYARFAS, M.Sc., Ph.D. Manuscript recewed, November 13, 1951. Read, December 5, 1951. In a previous paper (Dwyer and Gyarfas, 1950) it was shown that when a solution of d,l-tris-2 : 2’-dipyridyl ruthenium II antimony! tartrate was frac- tionally precipitated with potassium iodide solution, l,tris-2 : 2’-dipyridyl ruthenium II iodide antimonyl tartrate [Ru(dipy).]5.1,.(SbO.Tart),.18 H,O separated as the least soluble fraction. Subsequently, d-tris-2 : 2’-dipyridyl ruthenium II iodide separated. This is the most convenient method of resolution of the ruthenium compound. It has now been found that the crystallization of the iodide antimony] tartrates is the most efficient method of resolution of the analogous dipyridyl complexes of iron II, osmium IT and nickel. The three complex ion groups in the lattice compound always have the same configuration— laevo in the Na-D line, except the iron compound, which is dextro owing to rotatory dispersion. The iron II and nickel I1 compounds have been resolved previously, like the ruthenium II compound, through the tartrates (Werner, 1912; Morgan and Burstall, 1931). The tartrates, however, have a high water solubility, and as a result Werner isolated only the laevo form of tris-2 : 2’-dipyridyl iron IT iodide ; whilst Morgan and Burstall were forced to use both d and / ammonium tartrates in order to obtain both forms of the nickel compound. A further complication with both of the above compounds is the rapid racemization of the enantio- morphous forms. In the resolution of the osmium compound (Burstall, Dwyer and Gyarfas, 1950) through the antimonyl tartrates, both diastereoisomerides were very soluble in water and difficulty was encountered in preparing the pure optical forms. The sparingly soluble iodide antimony] tartrates can be obtained by several procedures. The racemic iodide can be transformed to the antimonyl tartrate with silver antimony! tartrate, and the resulting solution treated fractionally with potassium iodide. Alternatively a solution of the racemic chloride can be treated with excess of potassium antimony] tartrate, and with potassium iodide. The addition of alkali after approximately half of the complex salt has precipitated destroys the antimony] tartrate radicle, and ensures a high degree of purity for the other antipode. Since the rate of racemization of the nickel and iron compounds is raised considerably by hydroxyl ions (Davies and Dwyer, 1952) after making alkaline, all operations must be conducted quickly. The lattice compound can be decomposed by either dilute acid, or alkali or sodium acetate solution. The rate of solution in sodium acetate is not high and usually requires warming. If acid is used it should be dilute sulphuric or nitric acid, since the halogen acids tend to form precipitates of the form [M(dipy)s|[(SbX,).]. After solution and filtration of the antimony oxide, the active compounds can be precipitated as the iodide or perchlorate Werner (loc. cit.) found 136 DWYER AND GYARFAS. [x ]2?0— —440°, and —520° for J, Fe(dipy)3I,.6H,O and the bromide hexahydrate. By the new procedure both enantiomorphous forms of the iron compound have been obtained with almost ten times these rotations—Fe(dipy);(ClO,),.2H,O, [x ]29— +4,800 and —4,100°. EXPERIMENTAL. 1-Tris-2: 2’-Dipyridyl Nickel Iodide Antiumonyl Tartrate Octadecahydrate. Nickel sulphate heptahydrate (1-35 g.) in water (50 cc.) was treated with dipyridyl (2-35 g.), and the mixture heated to dissolve the dipyridyl. The resulting red solution of the complex sulphate was cooled in ice and solid potassium iodide (0-2 g.) added. The slight precipitate of the racemic iodide was filtered and the clear solution treated with potassium antimony] tartrate (4 g. in 25 cc. of water at 10° C.). On scratching the sides of the vessel, pink micaceous plates of the lattice compound separated. The precipitate was collected and washed with ice water and ether. Addition of potassium iodide fractionally to the filtrate gave a little more of the lattice compound, followed by the dextro iodide, and finally a little racemic iodide. A 0:04% solution of the lattice compound in N/20 sodium hydroxide gave «;,,,=—0-12° (2 dm. tube), whence [x ]5 96, =—150°. Found): Ni»: 34965) 50—14-09% 5 U—a-io,- Calculated for Ni;(C,)>H gN.2).(C,H,O,SbO),I,.18H,0 : Ni=5-34%; Sb=14-72%; I=7-80%. 1-Tris-2 : 2’-Dipyridyl Nickel II Perchlorate Trihydrate. This was obtained by dissolution of the lattice compound in 0:05N. sodium hydroxide at 10° C., and after removal of the antimony oxide, adding sodium perchlorate. The pink flakes were washed with ice water and ether. A 0:-1% solution in water gave a54.,=—0-96° (2 dm. tube), whence [«]}%.,=—480°. Found: Ni=7:6%. Calculated for Ni(C,,H,N,)3(ClO4)..3H,O : Ni=7-53%. d-Tris-2 : 2’-Dipyridyl Nickel II Perchlorate Trihydrate. The d iodide obtained from the mother liquid of the lattice compound was ground up with an excess of silver chloride and a little ice water until double decomposition was complete. After filtration from silver halide, sodium perchlorate (20%) was added. A 0:1% solution in water ZAaVe M516; = +0:°95°, whence ee = +475°. Found: Ni=—7-6%. Calculated for Ni(C,,H,N,)3(ClO,4)..3H,O0 : Ni=7-53%. 1-Tris-2 : 2’-Dipyridyl Osmium II Iodide Antimonyl Tartrate Octadecahydrate. The racemic iodide (0:8 g.) was transformed to the antimony] tartrate by shaking with silver antimony] tartrate (0-8 g.) in water (80 cc.). After filtration, a further amount of the racemic iodide (0:8 g.) was dissolved in this solution by warming. On cooling, the crystalline lattice compound separated in dark green micaceous plates. Alternatively the compound was prepared by transforming the whole of the racemic iodide to the antimony] tartrate, and then fractionally precipitating with potassium iodide. Laevo tris-2 : 2’-dipyridyl osmium IT iodide and the dextro compound, obtained respectively from the lattice compound and the filtrate, had the same rotation, as previously found (Burstall, Dwyer and Gyarfas, loc. cit.). A 0:005% solution of the lattice compound gave «=—0-07° (1 dm. tube), whence [x ]e% 6; =—1400°. Found): Os— lor 7194; Sb— le 6c lie ae: Calculated for Os3(C,>H gNe)9(C,H,O,SbO),1,.18H,O : Os=15-8% ; Sh=13-5% ; I=7-16%. THE RESOLUTION OF TRIS-2 : 2’-DIPYRIDYL METAL COMPLEXES. 137 d-Tris-2: 2’-Dipyridyl Iron II Iodide Antimonyl Tartrate Octadecahydrate. The racemic iodide (2-6 g.) was shaken with silver chloride excess and water (25 cc.). After filtration and washing of the silver halide, the total volume was made up to 50 cc. and the solution cooled in ice. A solution of sodium iodide (0:9 g.) in water (20 cc.) was also cooled in ice. Potassium antimony] tartrate (2 g.) was dissolved in the iron solution by stirring, and then 2 ec. of the iodide solution added with scratching the sides of the vessel. After two minutes the lattice compound was filtered, and washed with ice water. The remainder of the sodium iodide added in equal portions to the filtrate, filtering between each addition, and carrying out the operations as quickly as possible gave strongly laevo rotatory products for the first two fractions, and weakly laevo rotatory for the last. All fractions were washed with ice water, then ether. A 0:01% solution of the deep red micaceous plates of the lattice compound gave ap = +0: 21° (1 dm. tube), whence [a}/®= +2100°. Hounds) He—5-12%; Sb—14-6% ; I=7:7%. Calculated for Fe;(C,,>H,N.),(C,H,O,SbO),I,.18H,0: Fe=5-08%; Sb=14-76% ;s LST SL ye. d-Tris-2 : 2’-Dipyridyl Iron II Perchlorate Dihydrate. The iodide antimony] tartrate (1 g.) was dissolved in 0-:05N sodium hydroxide (20 cc.) at 4°C. After filtration of the antimony oxide, and addition of sodium perchlorate, the deztro perchlorate was obtained as red micaceous plates. The active perchlorate was less soluble than the racemate. The substance was washed with ice water and ether. A 0:01% solution in water gave ap=—+0-48° (1 dm. tube), whence [a ]t°= +.4,800°. Found: Fe=6-8%. Calculated for Fe(C,,>H,N.)3(ClO,4)..2H,O : Fe=6-72%. 1-Tris-2 : 2’-Dipyridyl Iron II Perchlorate Dihydrate. The laevo iodide fractions from the iodide antimony] tartrate separation (vide supra) were ground up in a mortar with silver chloride and a little ice water. The silver halide precipitate was removed quickly, and the deep red solution of the active chloride precipitated with sodium perchlorate. Approximately 25% of the substance was left in the solution in order to avoid separation of any racemate. A 0:01% solution in water gave ap =—0-41° (1 dm. tube), whence [a }t> = —4,100°. Found: Fe=6-62%. Calculated for Fe(C,,H,N,)3(ClO,4)..2H,O : Fe=6-72%. SUMMARY. The complex ions M(dipy),++, (M=Fe, Os, Ru, Ni) yield sparingly soluble isomorphous iodide antimonyl tartrates, /-[M(dipy).],.I,.(SbO.Tart.),.18 H,O and d-[Fe(dipy).],.I,.(SbO.Tart.),.18 H,O. These curious lattice compounds have been found to be the most suitable substances for the resolution of the dipyridyl complexes. In this way both optical forms of the iron compound have been isolated, and their rotations are almost ten times that described by Werner for the laecvo antipode. REFERENCES. Burstall, F. H., Dwyer, F. P., and Gyarfas, E. C., 1950. J. Chem. Soc., 953. Dwyer, F. P., and Gyarfas, E. C., 1950. THis JouRNAL, 83, 174. Dwyer, F. P., and Davies, N. R., 1951. Trans. Faraday Soc., 1952. In press. Morgan, G. T., and Burstall, F. H., 1931. J. Chem. Soc., 2213. Werner, A., 1912. Ber., 45, 433. Department of Chemistry, Sydney University. COORDINATION COMPOUNDS OF COPPER. PART III. CompLtEex I[ODO-CUPRATES (I) FROM ACETONE SOLUTION. By C. M. HARRIS. Manuscript received, November 12, 1951. Read, December 5, 1951. Marsh and Rhymes (1913) found that silver iodide dissolved in acetone solutions of the iodides of ammonium and the alkali metals. They obtained from these solutions a series of compounds of the general type M[Ag,I,].nC,H,O containing acetone of crystallization (where M=Cs and n=0; M=K and Rb and n=2; and M=Na and NH, and n=3) and from aqueous acetone, the compound Rb[AgI,].0-5 H,O. Copper (I) iodide dissolved in a similar manner but they failed to isolate any compounds. This communication reports the preparation of some complex iodo-cuprates (I) from acetone solution. Saturation of an acetone-sodium iodide solution with copper (I) iodide and evaporation under a variety of conditions always led to precipitation of copper (I) iodide. A compound approximating to Na[Cu,I,] (1) was isolated by pouring the above solution into anhydrous ether and drying the crystals that were deposited, at 100°C. This compound was extremely unstable to water and difficult to obtain pure. An attempt was made to isolate more stable compounds using pyridinium and N-methyl-pyridinium iodides. Yellow prisms of pyridinium diiodo-cuprate (I), [C;H;NH][Cul,] (11), and N-methyl-pyridinium diiodo-cuprate (I), [C;H,NCH,|[Cul,] (II1), were obtained on cooling a boiling acetone solution saturated with respect to both components. These compounds were obtained in an exactly similar manner from methyl ethyl ketone. Compound III was also obtained by treating an acetone solution of copper (I) iodide and sodium iodide with N-methyl-pyridinium iodide. Red prisms of N-methyl-quinolinium diiodo-cuprate (I), [C,H,NCH,][Cul,], were similarly obtained. This compound has previously been isolated from aqueous solution by Kohn (1912). The reaction of either compound III or copper (I) iodide and sodium iodide, dissolved in acetone, with an aqueous acetone solution of bis(ethylenediamine)- copper (IT) iodide, yielded mauve plates of bis(ethylenediamine)copper (IT) triiodo- , cuprate (I) 1-5 hydrate, [Cu™(C,H,(NH.,).).|[Cutl,].1-5 H,O (IV). An analogous propylenediamine compound [Cu™(CH,CH(NH,)CH,NH,),|[Cutl,].1-5 H,O was also prepared. Both these compounds readily lose their water of hydration at 100° C. It is interesting to note that compound IV is not obtained on reacting a hot aqueous solution of potassium iodide and copper (I) iodide with bis(ethylene- diamine)copper (II) iodide. From aqueous solution, only brown prisms of | bis(ethylenediamine)copper (II) diiodo-cuprate (1), [Cu™(C,H,(NH,).).|[Cutl,]., have been obtained (Harris, 1948). Compounds IV and V are decomposed by boiling water, [Cu™(A), |[Cutl,] — [Cu™(A),]?++2I-+Cul, COORDINATION COMPOUNDS OF COPPER. 139 depositing copper (I) iodide. By carrying out the decomposition with dilute acetic acid in the presence of potassium iodide the divalent copper liberates iodine 2[Cu™(A), ][Cutl,]+8H* — I,+4[AH,]?*++4Cul, which can be titrated with thiosulphate in the usual way. Compounds I-V reduce aqueous silver nitrate to metallic silver, instantly in the cold, due to the univalent copper they contain. All copper (I) structures yet investigated have been shown to possess copper involved in either two linear or four tetrahedral bonds (Wells, 1945). Thus compounds II and III apparently contain the diiodo-cuprate (I) ion of which numerous derivatives have been obtained from aqueous solution (Abegg, 1908, and Mellor, 1923) and for which the linear configuration [I-Cu-I]- would be expected (Pauling, 1940). Compounds IV and V could possess one of a number of structures. They could contain [Cul,]?- ions, bridged [Cu,I,|*~ ions, or [CulI,]- ions in the form of a mixed anionic compound [Cu(A),][Cul,]I. The last two would appear the most likely since three covalent copper (I) complexes have not been verified by structure determinations. HXPERIMENTAL. (i) The Reaction of an Acetone Solution of Sodium Iodide with Copper (I) Iodide. Excess of finely powdered copper (I) iodide was refluxed with a boiling acetone solution (10-0 ml.) of sodium iodide (0-60 g.). The solution, on saturation, was filtered into anhydrous ether (100 ml.) and the crystalline mass formed was broken up beneath the ethereal solution, filtered rapidly, and washed with anhydrous ether followed by anhydrous benzene. The benzene vapour was removed under vacuum over phosphorus pentoxide. Yield 1-5 g. On heating at 100° C. the compound lost 4-2 per cent. of its weight. The following analyses are calculated on a dry weight basis. Found: Cu, 23:4; I, 71-1%. | Na[Cu,I,] requires Cu, 23-9; I, 71-7%. The compound is deliquescent and decomposed readily by moisture from the air. It is not completely soluble in acetone being partially decomposed to copper (I) iodide and thus requires some excess of sodium iodide for its preparation. (ii) Pyridinium Duiodo-cuprate (IL). Acetone (200 ml.) was refluxed in the presence of excess pyridinium and copper (1) iodides. The resulting saturated solution was filtered hot and cooled to 15°C. The yellow prisms that were deposited were washed with anhydrous ether and dried under vacuum over phosphorus pentoxide. Yield 1-5 g. Methyl ethyl ketone (100 ml.) similarly gave 0-6 g. Found: Cu, 16-1; I, 63-:3%. [(C,H,NH][Cul,] requires Cu, 16-0; I, 63-8%. The compound is decomposed by water. It can be recrystallized from acetone or methyl ethyl ketone. During the course of this work it was noted that copper (I) iodide was soluble in molten pyridinium iodide and on cooling and washing out excess pyridinium iodide yellow prisms remain. This compound is probably the same as the above. (iii) N-methyl-pyridinium Dviiodo-cuprate (I). Prepared similarly to the previous compound, it also crystallized in the form of yellow prisms. Acetone (300 ml.) gave 1-8 g. and methyl ethyl ketone (650 ml.) 3-0 g. Found: Cu, 15:4; I, 61:8%. (C,H,NCH, ][CuI,] requires Cu, 15-45; I, 61-7%. M 140 Cc. M. HARRIS. This compound was also readily obtained by adding a hot solution of N-methyl-pyridinium iodide (2-5 g. 0-011 g. mole) in acetone (10 ml.) and water (2-0 ml.) mixture to a boiling acetone (15 ml.) solution of sodium iodide (3-1 g. 0-021 g. mole) and copper (I) iodide (1-9 g. 0-010 g. mole). The yellow prisms that were deposited were washed with a small amount of acetone and dried under vacuum. Yield 3-0 g. (73%). Found: Cu, 15-6; I, 61:8%. The solubility of this compound in acetone and methyl] ethyl ketone permits of its recrystal- lization from these solvents. It is decomposed by water, particularly on heating. Copper (1) iodide is also soluble in molten N-methyl-pyridinium iodide, presumably forming the above compound, and yellow prisms can be isolated by washing out the excess of pyridinium salt with methyl] alcohol. A solution of compound III in acetone was titrated conductimetrically with an acetone- sodium iodide solution but no evidence of ion formation, such as [Cul,}-+I- & [Cul,]?- was obtained. N-methyl-quinolinium Diiodo-cuprate (1). Prepared similarly to compound III from an acetone solution of sodium iodide and copper (I) iodide by treatment with an aqueous acetone solution of N-methyl-quinolinium iodide. The compound which crystallized in bright red prisms was obtained in almost theoretical yield. Found: Cu, 13-8; I, 54:-6%. Calculated: Cu, 13-77; I, 54-98%. (iv) Bis(ethylenediamine)copper (II) Triiodo-cuprate (I) 1- a Hydrate. To a boiling solution of bis(ethylenediamine)copper (II) iodide dihydrate (1-5 g. 0-0032 g. mole : Morgan and Burstall, 1926) in water (25 ml.) and acetone (100 ml.) mixture was added a boiling solution of sodium iodide (4-0 g. 0-027 g. mole) and copper (I) iodide (0-61 g. 0-0032 g. mole) in acetone (75 ml.). The mauve hexagonal plates that were deposited on cooling were washed with cold acetone and air dried. Yield 1-4 g. (68%). Found: Cu(total), 19-4; Cu, 9-8; I, 57-5; H,O at 100°C., 4-0%. [Cu™(C,H,(NH,),), ][Cu'l,].1-5 H,O requires Cu(total), 19-4; Cu%+, 9-7; I, 58-1; H,O, 4-1%. If too much sodium iodide is used in this preparation the compound fails to appear on cooling. This compound was also readily obtained by treating a boiling solution of bis(ethylenediamine) copper (II) iodide dihydrate (0-90 g. 0-0019 g. mole) in water (20 ml.) acetone (75 ml.) mixture with a boiling acetone (200 ml.) solution of compound ITI (0-80 g. 0-0019 g. mole). The immediate precipitate of hexagonal plates was isolated and washed as before. Found: Cu(total), 19-5; H,O at 100°C., 3-6%. The compound is slowly decomposed by water in the cold but inateatiy on boiling forming a purple solution of bis(ethylenediamine)copper (II) iodide and a white precipitate of copper (1) iodide. ‘The compound is decomposed by acid as described previously. It reduces silver nitrate solution instantly to metallic silver due to the univalent copper it contains and on dehydration at 100° C. its colour deepens. (v) Bis(propylenediamine)copper (II) Triodo-cuprate (I) 1-5 Hydrate. Bis(propylenediamine)copper (II) iodide dihydrate (0-88 g. 0-0018 g. mole) was dissolved in water (5:0 ml.) and acetone (35 ml.). After the addition of sodium iodide (1-0 g. 0-0067 g. mole) the solution was heated to boiling and treated with a boiling solution of copper (I) iodide (0:50 g. 0:0026 g. mole) and sodium iodide (2-0 g. 0-013 g. mole) in acetone (35 ml.). The solution was cooled to room temperature and the purplish crystals that were deposited were filtered, washed with acetone and air dried. Yield 0-5 g. (42%.) Found : Cu(total), 18-6; Cu+, 9-1; I, 55-3; H,O at 100°C., 3-64, 3-94%. [Cu(CH,CH(NH,)CH,NH.,), |[Cul, ].1-5 H,O requires Cu(total), 18-61; Cu*+, 9-3; I, 55-75; H,O, 3:96%. The properties of this compound are similar to its ethylenediamine analogue. COORDINATION COMPOUNDS OF COPPER. 141 Bis(propylenediamine)copper (II) Iodide Dihydrate. Prepared from pyopylenediamine and copper (I) iodide in a somewhat analogous manner to bis(ethylenediamine)copper (II) iodide dihydrate (Morgan and Burstall, loc. cit.). A mixture of copper (I) iodide (19 g. 0-10 g. mole), propylenediamine (10-0 ml. 0:12 g. mole) and water (40 ml.) was refluxed for 3 hours. The purple solution was filtered and concentrated till crystal- lization occurred. The purple crystals were filtered and washed with two small lots of acetone and air dried. Found: Cu, 12:7; I, 50-0; H,O at 100°C., 7-0%. [Cu(CH,CH(NH,)CH,NH,), |I,.2H,O requires Cu, 12-7; I, 50:6; H,O, 7:2%. This compound is very soluble in water and reasonably soluble in aqueous acetone and alcohol. ANALYSES. Copper was estimated volumetrically by the thiosulphate method. On the addition of potassium iodide to a solution containing divalent copper and pyridinium or quinolinium salts, there is precipitated a complex pyridinium or quinolinium tetraiodo-cuprate (II) (Datta, 1913; Datta and Ghosh, 1914), which removes portion of the divalent copper from solution. It was thus found necessary to first remove the pyridine or quinoline by boiling with a shght excess of sodium hydroxide solution for 30 minutes. Copper was determined on the remaining solution in the usual way, iodine being first removed by fuming with concentrated sulphuric acid containing small amounts of nitric acid. The estimation of divalent copper in the presence of copper (I) in compounds IV and V was carried out as follows: The compounds were decomposed by a small amount of hot water (20 ml.) to yield a solution of the bis(amine)copper (II) iodide and a precipitate of copper (I) iodide. A small amount of potassium iodide (2-0 g.) was added to the cooled solution followed by acetic acid (1-3 ml. 17N). A large excess of potassium iodide (10 g.) was added to completely dissolve the copper (I) iodide and the liberated iodine then titrated with thio- sulphate to a starch end-point in the usual way. SUMMARY. The preparation of three types of complex iodo-cuprates (1) from acetone or aqueous acetone solution has been described. These are (a) Na[Cu,I,} ; (b) [C;H;NX][Cul,] (where X=—H and CH,); and (ec) [Cu™(A),][CuI,].1-5 H,O (where A=C,H,(NH,), and CH,CH(NH,)CH,NH,). They are all, except (a), well defined, coloured, crystalline compounds. During the course of this work bis(propylenediamine)copper (II) iodide dihydrate [Cu(CH,CH(NH,)CH,NH,),|I,.2H,O, was prepared by the action of propylenediamine upon copper (I) iodide. : REFERENCES. Abegg, R., 1908. Handbuch der anorganischen Chemie, 2, Pt. 1, p. 550. Hirzel, Leipzig. Datta, R. L., 1913. J. Chem. Soc., 103, 426-432. Datta, R. L., and Gosh, T., 1914. J. Am. Chem. Soc. 36, 1020. Harris, C. M., 1948. THis JouRNAL, 82, 218-224. Kohn, M., 1912. Montash, 33, 919-922. Marsh, J. E., and Rhymes, W. C., 1913. J. Chem. Soc., 103, 781-786. Mellor, J. W., 1923. ‘‘ A Comprehensive Treatise on Inorganic and Theoretical Chemistry”’, Vol. 3. Longmans, London. wis Morgan, G. T., and Burstall, F. H., 1926. J. Chem. Soc., 1503. Pauling, L., 1940. ‘‘ The Nature of the Chemical Bond ”’, p. 89. Cornell University Press. Wells, A. F., 1945. ‘‘ Structural Inorganic Chemistry’, pp. 502-508. Oxford University Press. i School of Applied Chemistry, N.S.W. University of Technology, Sydney. SOME COMPLEXES DERIVED FROM SILVER HALIDES. By C. M. HARRIS. Manuscript received, November 12, 1951. Read, December 5, 1951. It has been reported in a previous communication that copper (I) iodide dissolves in concentrated ammonium or alkali bromide solution (Harris, 1950). From these solutions tetramminecopper (II) and bis(ethylenediamine) copper (II) derivatives, [Cu%(A),][CuIBr], (where A=NH, and 2A—C,H,(NH,),), were isolated. Reaction of these solutions with ammonia and ethylenediamine afforded indirect evidence that they were not mixtures of the [CuI,]- and (CuBr,|~ ions (loc. cit.). This communication reports the result of a similar investigation using silver iodide in place of copper (I) iodide. Silver iodide dissolves appreciably in boiling concentrated solutions of ammonium or alkali bromide presumably forming the bromo-iodo-argentate (I) ion, AgIi+Br- = [AgIBr]-, similar to copper (I) iodide. Dilution decomposes the complex ion precipitating silver iodide. Purple crystals of bis(ethylenediamine) copper (II) bromo-iodo- argentate (I), [Cu(C,H,(NH,).).][AgIBr],, and orange crystals of the analogous nickel (II) complex, [Ni(C, H,(NH,).,).|[ Agi Br],, were obtained by metathesis from these solutions. The nickel complex was obtained by reaction of the argentate (I) solution with tris(ethylenediamine)nickel (II) bromide. The isolation of the bis(ethylene- diamine) nickel (II) complex instead of the tris-compound is apparently due to the fact that in solutions of tris(ethylenediamine)nickel (II) salts there exists the equilibrium [Ni(C,H,(NHe)2)3]** = [Ni(C,H,(NH)2)2]** +C.H4(N Ho), and, in this case, the bis-derivative is the least soluble. The failure of Bucknall and. Wardlaw (1928) to resolve the octahedral tris(ethylenediamine)nickel (IT) ion could be attributed to this equilibrium. Failure to resolve the tris(ethylene- diamine)copper (II) ion is probably due to the same type of equilibrium. The existence of this equilibrium in the case of copper (II) is supported by the work of Amiel (1934), who found that copper (II) complexes such as (Cu(C,H,(NH4)2)3](ClO,)2.H,O lose one diamine group to pass over anthe the more stable bis(ethylenediamine)copper (II) complex. Both the above argentate (1) complexes are decomposed by water, particu- larly on heating, forming a solution of the complex copper (II) and nickel (II) bromide and a precipitate of silver iodide. Whilst the corresponding bromo-iodo-cuprate (I) solution reacts immediately with ammonium hydroxide to yield a precipitate of (Cul),.NH, (loc. cit.) the bromo-iodo-argentate (I) solution failed to yield a similar compound. LEthylene- diamine also gave no visible reaction. A series of silver complexes, (AgX),.C,H,(NH,.). (where X =Cl, Br and I), similar to the copper (I) complex (Cul),.C,H,(NH,), (loc. cit.), were obtained SOME COMPLEXES DERIVED FROM SILVER HALIDES, 143 during the course of this work by dissolving the appropriate silver halide m ethylenediamine and precipitating with alcohol. These compounds are unstable to water and acids and are light-sensitive. The corresponding propylenediamine compound with silver iodide was prepared but proved to be unstable, losing propylenediamine. EXPERIMENTAL. Bis(ethylenediamine)copper (II) Bromo-iodo-argentate (1). A boiling solution of ammonium bromide (180 g.) and silver iodide (4:7 g. 0-020 g. mole) in water (185 ml.) was added with stirring to a boiling solution of bis(ethylenediamine)copper (II) bromide monohydrate (3-6 g. 0-010 mole: Johnson and Bryant, 1934) and ammonium bromide (10 g.) in water (25 ml.). An immediate purple precipitate appeared. The solution was cooled to 65° with stirring and the purple prisms were filtered, washed well with methanol to remove ammonium bromide followed by acetone and air dried. Yield, 3-9 g. (48%). Hound; ‘Cu, 7:7; Agl, 57-2; Br, 19-7%. [Cu(C,H,(NH,)2). [Agi Br], requires Cu, 7-82; AglI, 57-76; Br, 19-66%. Bis(ethylenediamine)nickel (II) Bromo-todo-argentate (1). Prepared similarly to the previous compound save that tris(ethylenediamine)nickel (II) bromide dihydrate (4-3 g. 0-010 g. mole) was used in place of the copper (II) complex and 200 ml. of water instead of 185 ml. The solution was cooled to 60° C. when the orange crystals that deposited were filtered and washed, and dried as before. Yield 2-6 g. (32%). Found: Ni, 7:2; AglI, 58-6; Br, 19-6%. [Ni(C,H,(NH,),). [Agi Br], requires Cu, 7-26; AglI, 58-1; Br, 19-78%. The tris(ethylenediamine)nickel (II) bromide dihydrate used in the above preparation was prepared by treating a solution of nickel bromide with an excess of ethylenediamine and pre- cipitating with alcohol. The compound was washed with acetone and air dried. Found: Br, 37:0; H,O, 7-:9%. Calculated for [Ni(C,H,(NH,),),]Br2-2H,O ; Br, 36:8; H,O, 8-3%. The Reaction of Silver Halides with Ethylenediamine. The powdered silver halide was dissolved in anhydrous ethylenediamine by gentle warming and the solution filtered into 95% ethanol. The colourless crystals were washed with acetone and dried under vacuum. Silver Halide. Silver Halide. Compound. (Found.) _ (Calculated.) (AgCl),.C,H,(NH,). aes fd os 82 s 5 82 S 6 (AgBr),.C,H,(NH,), he ate Ag 86 ., 7 86 : 2 (AgI),.C,H,(NH,). site he oh 88 * l 88 y 6 These compounds are light-sensitive and decomposed by water. The silver halide was estimated by boiling the compound with dilute nitric acid and weighing the residue. The Reaction of Silver Iodide with Propylenediamine. Powdered silver iodide dissolved in propylenediamine at room temperature. Pale yellow micro-crystals were obtained by pouring into methanol. The product was washed with acetone 144 C. M. HARRIS. and air dried to remove acetone. The compound smelt strongly of propylenediamine and it had evidently lost a considerable amount as was indicated by the analysis for silver iodide. Found: AglI, 91:4%. (AgI),.CH,CH(NH,)CH,NH, requires AgI, 86:4%. SUMMARY. Silver iodide dissolves in the presence of a large excess of bromide ions to form colourless solutions containing the bromo-iodo-argentate (I) ion. Complex derivatives of this ion with bis(ethylenediamine)copper (II) and bis(ethylene- diamine)nickel (II) ions have been prepared from such solutions by metathesis. A series of compounds of general formula (AgX),.C,.H,(NH.). was prepared from ethylenediamine and the silver halides. Propylenediamine forms an unstable silver iodide complex. REFERENCES. Amiel, J., 1934. C.R., 199, 201. Bucknall, W. R., and Wardlaw, W., 1928. J.C.S., 2739. Harris, C. M., 1950. Tuts Journat, 84, 111-116. School of Applied Chemistry, N.S.W. University of Technology, Sydney. COORDINATION COMPOUNDS OF COPPER. Part IV. Some CupPpRATES (I) FROM ACETONE SOLUTION. By C. M. HARRIS and H. N. 8. SCHAFER. Manuscript received, November 12, 1951. Read, December 5, 1951, In a previous communication, one of us (Harris, 1952) reported the prepara- tion of various iodo-cuprates (1) from either acetone or aqueous acetone solution. This communication describes the following additional compounds : I. [Cu™(C,H,(NH,)»)o][CuCl,].1°5 HO. II. [Cu™(C,H,(NH,).)9][Cu'Br,].2°5 H,0. Ill. [C,H;NH][CulBr]. IV. [C,H;NCH,][Cul(CNS)]. V. [C;H,NCH,][Cu(CNS),]. Compounds I and II were prepared by reacting the appropriate copper (1) halide, dissolved in an aqueous solution of the corresponding ammonium halide, with the required bis(ethylenediamine)copper (IT) halide. These two compounds are analogous to the complex iodo-cuprates (1), [Cu™(A),][CutI,].1-5 H,O (A=C,H,(NH,), and CH,CH(NH,)CH,NH,) previously described (Harris, loc. cit.). Copper (1) iodide dissolves in boiling acetone or methyl ethyl ketone solutions of pyridinium bromide. On cooling, yellow prisms of compound III, pyridinium bromo-iodo-cuprate (I), are deposited. This type of compound has recently been obtained from aqueous solution (Harris, 1951) in the form of the complex copper (IT) cuprates (I), [Cu™(A),][CutIBr], (where A=NH, and 2A =0,H,(NH,)2). Yellow prisms of compound IV, N-methyl-pyridinium iodo-thiocyanato- cuprate (1), were crystallized from an acetone solution of N-methyl-pyridinium iodide which had been saturated with copper (I) thiocyanate. The yellow dithiocyanato-cuprate )I) compound (V) was also prepared by treating an acetone solution of ammonium thiocyanate and copper (I) thiocyanate with N-methyl- pyridinium iodide. These compounds are all decomposed by water, acids and alkali, particularly on heating. They are insoluble in organic solvents, such as benzene, chloroform and ether, and reduce aqueous silver nitrate solution to silver due to the univalent copper they contain. EXPERIMENTAL. (i) Bis(ethylenediamine)copper (II) Trichloro-cuprate (I) 1-5 Hydrate. To a solution of bis(ethylenediamine)copper (II) chloride monohydrate (2-5 g.: Johnson and Bryant, 1934) and ammonium chloride (2:5 g.) in water (35 ml.) was added acetone (90 ml.). The solution was refluxed over a mixture of excess copper (I) chloride and copper powder for 10 minutes and on filtering was cooled rapidly to room temperature in an atmosphere of coal gas. 146 HARRIS AND SCHAFER. The purple needles that were deposited were filtered and washed with methyl] alcohol followed by ether. The ether was removed under vacuum. Yield 0:6 g. Found: Cu (total), 33-2; Cl, 27-7; H,O at 100°C., 7-1%. [Cu"(C,H,(NH,))2 [Cu'Cl,].1-5H,O requires Cu(total), 33-4; Cl, 27-9; H,O, 7-4%. This compound is instantly decomposed by water to white copper (I) chloride and a purple solution of bis(ethylenediamine)copper (II) chloride. The compound is oxidized in moist air assuming a blue-green colour. It reduces silver nitrate solution to metallic silver. (ii) Bis(ethylenediamine)copper (I1) Tribromo-cuprate (1) 2:5 Hydrate. To a solution of bis(ethylenediamine)copper (II) bromide monohydrate (3-6 g. 0-010 g. mole) in water (50 ml.) was added ammonium bromide (2:0 g.) followed by acetone (200 ml.) and the solution heated to boiling. To this solution was added a boiling solution of copper (1) bromide (1:6 g. 0-011 g. mole) in acetone (250 ml.) and water (50 ml.) containing ammonium bromide (4-0 g.) and one drop of 7N hydrobromic acid. The solution was cooled to 20° C. with stirring and the compound that was deposited was filtered and washed with 90% alcohol followed by ether. The ether was removed under vacuum. Yield 2-0 g. (40% “«ipurple prisms. Found: Cu(total), 24-2; Br, 44-9; H,O at 100°C., 8-6%. [Cu™(C,H,(NH,),),][Cu'Br3].2-5H,O requires Cu(total), 23-9; Br, 45-1; H,O, 8-5%. This compound is decomposed by water depositing a white precipitate of copper (I) bromide and forming a purple solution of bis(ethylenediamine)copper (II) bromide. The compound is oxidized in moist air assuming a blue-green colour and it reduces silver nitrate solution instantly to metallic silver. (iui) Pyridintum Bromo-iodo-cuprate (I). Pyridinium bromide (3-0 g.) was refluxed with excess of powdered copper (I) iodide and methyl ethyl ketone (500 ml.). The yellow solution was filtered hot and cooled to 0°C. The yellow needles were filtered, washed with dry ether and dried under vacuum over phosphorus pentoxide. Yield 2-4g. The compound can also be prepared in a similar manner from acetone. Found: Cu, 18-1, 18:2%; 0-3518 g. complex gave 0-4246 g. AgIl+AgBr. [C,H,NH][CulBr] requires Cu, 18-:1% ; 0-3518 g. complex to give 0-4241 g. Agl4+AgBr. The compound is readily decomposed by water to copper (I) iodide and reduces silver nitrate solution to metallic silver. It is hygroscopic. (iv) N-methyl-pyridinium Iodo-thiocyanato-cuprate (I). Excess of copper (I) thiocyanate and N-methyl-pyridinium iodide were refluxed with acetone (500 ml.) to form a yellow solution. The filtered solution was cooled to 20° C. and the yellow crystals that were deposited were washed with a small amount of cold acetone and dried under vacuum over phosphorus pentoxide. Found: Cu, 18-3%; 0-243 g. complex gave 0-283 g. AgI+AgCNS. [C;H,NCH,][Cul(CNS)] requires Cu, 18-56%; 0-243 g. complex to give 0-284 g. AgI+AgCNS. The compound is readily decomposed by water and reduces silver nitrate solution to metallic silver. (v) N-methyl-pyridinium Dithiocyanato-cuprate (I). Copper (I) thiocyanate (1-2 g. 0-010 g. mole) was dissolved in a boiling solution of ammonium thiocyanate (7-0 g.) in acetone (50 ml.). To this was added a hot solution of N-methyl-pyridinium iodide (3-3 g. 0-015 g. mole) dissolved in a mixture of acetone (20 ml.) and water (3-0 ml.). The clear yellow solution on standing overnight deposited golden yellow crystals which were filtered off, washed with acetone and dried under vacuum. Yield 1-3 g. (47%). Found: Cu, 23-1; CNS, 43:-4%. [C,H;NCH, |[Cu(CNS),] requires Cu, 23-3; CNS, 42-4%. COORDINATION COMPOUNDS OF COPPER. 147 The compound was contaminated slightly with iodide, giving a high value for thiocyanate which was determined as its silver salt. The compound is decomposed by water slowly in the cold and readily on heating and reduces silver nitrate solution to metallic silver. REFERENCES. Harris, C. M., 1951. THis Journat, 84, 111-116. —-—_—____——— 1952. Tunis JouRNAL, 85, 138. Johnson, C., and Bryant, S., 1934. J. Chem. Soc., 1783. School of Applied Chemistry, N.S.W. University of Technology, Sydney. SOME HALOGENOARGENTATES (I) AND HALOGENOPLUMBATES (II) FROM ACETONE SOLUTION. | . By C. M. HARRIS and H. N. 8S. SCHAFER. Manuscript received, November 14, 1951. Read, December 5, 1951. In previous communications (Harris, 1952; Harris and Schafer, 1952) the preparation from acetone or aqueous acetone solution of various types of cuprates (I) has. been described. This communication records the preparation of the following halogenoargentates and halogenoplumbates (II) , I. [Cu(C,H,4(NH-2)o)2][AgBre]p. Il. [C;H,;NCH, [Ag], ]. Ill. [C;H;NCH,][Ag,]I,]. IV. [C;H;NCH,][PbI,]. V. [Cu(O,H4(NH3)2)2][PbBr,]. VI. [Cu(C,H,(NH,)>).][PbIy]. VII. [Cu(C,H,(NH,).).|[PbI,Br],. Compounds I, II, IV, V, VI and VII were obtained by treating an aqueous acetone solution of the silver or lead halide and sodium or ammonium halide with the appropriate N-methyl-pyridinium or bis(ethylenediamine)copper (II) halide. Compound III was obtained from an aqueous acetone solution of ammonium and silver thiocyanate by treatment with N-methyl-pyridinium iodide. If bis(ethylenediamine)copper (II) bromide or iodide was added in place of N-methyl-pyridinium iodide, compound I or its iodine analogue, bis(ethylene- diamine)copper (II) diiodo-argentate (I), was obtained. This last compound has previously been prepared by Spacu and Spacu (1931) as well as the propylene- diamine analogue (Spacu and Spacu, 1932). Compounds of the general type M[Ag,I,] have been prepared before from acetone solution by Marsh and Rhymes (1913) and the compound Rb[AgI,].0-5 H,O obtained by them from aqueous acetone. It is interesting to note that with copper (I) halides three types of complexes, M[Cu,X,], M[CuX,], and M,{[CuX,] have been obtained (loc. cit.) from either acetone or aqueous acetone. All the above compounds are unstable to water, on boiling, and insoluble in common organic solvents such as benzene and chloroform. HXPERIMENTAL. (i) Bis(ethylenediamine)copper (II) Dibromo-argentate (1). To a boiling solution of bis(ethylenediamine)copper (II) bromide monohydrate (1:0 g. : Johnson and Bryant, 1934) and ammonium bromide (2-0 g.) in a mixture of water (15 ml.) and acetone (100 ml.) was added a boiling solution of ammonium bromide (10 g.) in acetone (200 ml.) and water (30 ml.) saturated with silver bromide. The immediate precipitate of mauve micro- crystals was filtered and washed with methyl! alcohol followed by ether. Dried under vacuum. Yield 1-5 g. Found: Cu, 8-75; Ag, 29:8; Br, 44:2%. [Cu(C,H,(NH,).). [AgBr,], requires Cu, 8-84; Ag, 30:0; Br, 44-4%. SOME HALOGENOARGENTATES (I) AND HALOGENOPLUMBATES (IT) 149 The compound is insoluble in cold water but decomposed readily on heating to a purple solution of bis(ethylenediamine)copper (II) bromide and a precipitate of silver bromide. (1) N-methyl-pyridinium Dvriodo-argentate (1). To a warm solution of silver iodide (1-0 g. 0-0043 g. mole) and sodium iodide (10 g.) in acetone (100 ml.) was added a warm solution of N-methyl-pyridinium iodide (1-5 g. 0-0068 g. mole) dissolved in a mixture of acetone (10 ml.) and water (1-0 ml.). On standing cream micro- crystals were deposited, which were filtered and washed with a small amount of cold acetone and dried under vacuum. Yield 1-4 g. Found: Ag, 23:5; I, 55-5%. [C,H,;NCH, |[AgI,] requires Ag, 23-7; I, 55-7%. Water decomposes the compound into its constituents. il) The Reaction of N-methyl-pyridinium Iodide with an Acetone Solution of Ammonium and Silver Thiocyanates. A hot solution of silver thiocyanante (1-7 g. 0-010 g. mole) and ammonium thiocyanante (10 g.) in acetone (100 ml.) was treated with a solution of N-methyl-pyridinium iodide (2-5 g. 0-011 g. mole) dissolved in a mixture of acetone (10 ml.) and water (2-0 ml.). The immediate precipitate of white prisms was filtered from the cooled solution, washed with acetone and dried under vacuum. Yield 2:2 g. (82%). Found: Ag, 31:2; I, 54-5%. [C;H,NCH, |[Ag.I,] requires Ag, 31:3; I, 55-1%. The compound is decomposed by water, particularly on heating. The Reaction of Bis(ethylenediamine)copper (If) Halides with an Acetone Solution of Ammonium and Silver Thiocyanates. (a) With Bis(ethylenediamine)copper (II) Bromide. A boiling solution of silver thiocyanate (3-3 g. 0-020 g. mole) and ammonium thiocyanate (4-0 g.) in acetone (60 ml.) was mixed all at once with a boiling solution of bis(ethylenediamine) - copper (II) bromide monohydrate (1-8 g. 0-0050 g. mole) in a mixture of acetone (50 ml.) and water (10 ml.). The precipitate of mauve microcrystals was washed with acetone and dried - under vacuum. Yield 1:4 g. (80%) of compound I. Found: Ag, 29-7; Br, 44:1%. (6) Weth Bis(ethylenediamine)copper (II) Iodide. To a boiling solution of bis(ethylenediamine)copper (II) iodide monohydrate (2-3 g. 0-0050 g. mole) and ammonium thiocyanate (2-0 g.) in acetone (150 ml.) and water (20 ml.) was added all at once a boiling solution of silver thiocyanate (1:7 g. 0-010 g. mole) and ammonium thio- cyanate (10 g.) in acetone (100 ml.). The immediate precipitate of mauve microcrystals was washed with acetone and dried under vacuum. Yield 1-8 g. (78%) of bis(ethylenediamine)copper (II) diiodo-argentate (I). Found: Cu,'7:08; Ag, 23-8; I, 55-33%. Calculated: Cu, 7-01; Ag, 23-8; I, 56-0%. This compound was also obtained by reacting a sodium iodide-silver iodide solution in acetone with bis(ethylenediamine)copper (II) iodide. Found: Cu, 6°95; Ag, 23:6; I, 55:7T%. (iv) N-methyl-pyridinium Triiodo-plumbate (II). Lead iodide (2-0 g. 0:00043 g. mole) and sodium iodide (5-0 g.) dissolved in boiling acetone (40 ml.) was treated with N-methyl-pyridinium iodide (2-0 g. 0:0091 g. mole) dissolved in a boiling mixture of acetone (10 ml.) and water (2:0 ml.). The immediate precipitate of pale 150 HARRIS AND SCHAFER. yellow prisms was filtered from the cooled solution and washed with acetone followed by ether. Dried under vacuum. Yield 2-4 g. (80%). Found: Pb, 30-4; I, 55-5%. [C;H,NCH,][PbI,] requires Pb, 30-4; I, 55-9%. The compound is immediately decomposed by water depositing yellow lead iodide. (v) Bis(ethylenediamine)copper (II) Tetrabromo-plumbaie (IZ). To a boiling solution of bis(ethylenediamine)copper (II) bromide monohydrate (2-0 g. 0-0055 g. mole) and ammonium bromide (40 g.) in acetone (200 ml.) and water (35 ml.) was added a boiling solution of lead bromide (2-0 g. 0-0054 g. mole) and ammonium bromide (40 g.) in acetone (410 ml.) and water (80 ml.). The immediate flocculent precipitate of mauve micro- crystals was filtered from the hot solution and washed with acetone followed by ether. Dried under vacuum. Yield 2-9 g. (75%). Found: Cu, 9-1; Pb, 29-0, 29-1; Br, 45-1%. [Cu(C,H,(NH,).).][PbBr,] requires Cu, 9-0; Pb, 29-2; Br, 45-0%. The compound is decomposed by water, readily on heating, depositing a precipitate of lead (II) bromide and forming a purple solution of bis(ethylenediamine)copper (II) bromide. (vi) Bis(ethylenediamine)copper (II) Tetraiodo-plumbate (II). Lead iodide (2-0 g. 0:0043 g. mole) and sodium iodide (10 g.) in boiling acetone (150 ml.) was added to a boiling solution of bis(ethylenediamine)copper (II) iodide monohydrate (0°90 g. 0-0020 g. mole) and sodium iodide (2-0 g.) in a boiling mixture of acetone (75 ml.) and water (10 ml.). The immediate precipitate of greenish-grey microcrystals was washed with acetone followed by ether and dried under vacuum. Yield 1-8 g. (95%). Found: Cu, 7:06; .Pb, 22-9; I, 56-3%. [Cu(C,H,(NH,).). |[PbI,] requires Cu, 7:08; Pb, 23:1; I, 56-5%. The compound is decomposed by water similarly to the previous compound. (vil) Bis(ethylenediamine)copper (II) Diiodo-bromo-plumbate (IT). Lead iodide (2-0 g. 0-0043 g. mole) was dissolved in a boiling mixture of acetone (200 mal.) and water (20 ml.) that had previously been saturated with ammonium bromide. This solution was added to a boiling solution of bis(ethylenediamine)copper (II) bromide monohydrate (1-6 g. 0-0044 g. mole) in acetone (100 ml.) and water (15 ml.). The immediate precipitate of mauve microcrystals was filtered and washed with acetone followed by ether. Dried under vacuum. Yield 2-6 g. (95%). Found: Cu, 5-1; Pb, 32-3%. 0-289 g. compound gave 0-303 g. AgBr+AglI. [Cu(C,H,(NH,).), ][PbI,Br], requires Cu, 5:0; Pb, 32-7%. 0-289 g. compound to give 0-300 g. AgBr+Agl. SUMMARY. The halogeno-argentates (I), [Cu(C,H,(NH,).).|[AgBr.]., [C; H;NCH,][Agls], and [C,;H,NCH,|[Ag,I,], have been prepared from aqueous acetone solution. Halogenoplumbates (II), [C;,H;NCH,][PbI,], [Cu(C,H,(NH,).).|[PbBr,], [Cu(C,H,(NH,).).|[PbI,], and [Cu(C,H,(NH,).,).][PbI,Br],, were also obtained using this solvent. REFERENCES. Harris, C. M., 1952. THis Journat, 85, 138. Harris, C. M., and Schafer, H. N. §., 1952. Turis Journat, 85, 145. Johnson, C. H., and Bryant, S. A., 1934. J.C S., 1783. Marsh, J. E., and Rhymes, W. C., 1913. J. Chem. Soc., 103, 781-786. Spacu, G., and Spacu, P., 1931. Bull. soc. Stinte Cluj, 5, 387-421, 473-487. —_—_——______—_____————. 1932. Z. anal. Chem., 90, 182-189. School of Applied Chemistry, N.S.W. University of Technology, Sydney. PALLADIUM COMPLEXES. PARTIV. REACTIONS OF PALLADIUM COMPOUNDS WITH 1: 10 PHENANTHROLINE. By 8S. E. LIVINGSTONE. Manuscript recewed, November 14, 1951. Read, December 5, 1951. Coordination compounds of 1 : 10 phenanthroline with several of the metals, e.g. iron, nickel, osmium, etc., are known but it appears that only two complexes of palladium with this ligand have been reported (Ryan, 1949). 2: 2’-Dipyridyl is very similar to 1 : 10 phenanthroline in the type of coordination compounds it forms with the metals; dichloro-2 : 2’-dipyridyl palladium was prepared by Morgan and Burstall (1933). A series of compounds was prepared of the type Pd phen X, where phen=1: 10 phenanthroline and X=Cl, Br, I, CNS, NO, and 2X =C,0,. These compounds are all insoluble in water and organic solvents and probably have the structure since divalent palladium almost invariably exhibits the four covalent square planar configuration, involving dsp? orbitals. These compounds are prepared by treating a solution of K,PdX, (where X=Cl, Br, I, CNS, NO,; 2X=C,0,) in hot water with a hot aqueous solution of 1:10 phenanthroline monohydrate (I). The compound [Pd phen X,] is immediately precipitated. It is interesting to note that no precipitate or change in colour occurs in the case of K,Pd(CN),. Also these compounds dissolve in aqueous KCN to give colourless solutions, precipitating 1:10 phenanthroline. This tends to confirm the fact that the bond between Pd and CN is very strong, stronger even than that between Pd and I. When chlorine is passed through a suspension of [Pd phen Cl,] (II) in chloroform bright red prisms of tetrachloro-1: 10 phenanthroline palladium (IV) are formed. [Pd phen Cl,]+Cl, CHCl, an {Pd phen Cl,] _ ee Wy heat 150°C. = VII 152 S. E. LIVINGSTONE. This compound VIII rapidly loses chlorine in moist air, and on heating to 150° C. is converted back to the dichlorodiammine II. The tetrachlorodiammine VIII is analogous to Pdpy,Cl, and PdenCl, (where py=pyridine and en=ethylenediamine) (Rosenheim and Maass, 1898) and Pd(NH;),Cl, (Drew et alia, 1932). The reactions of II with various amines were investigated. (a) 1: 10 Phenanthroline. Compound II dissolves on warming in excess aqueous 1:10 phenanthroline to give a clear yellow solution. Concentration and precipitation with acetone yields the original compound II. However, Pa phen Cl, Le phen eee yellow Solution II evaporation + acetone (PR. d phen,| (C1O,), (Pa phen,|(C joke OHSQ),. 2H,O Pd phen CL IX X I pole yellow prisms deep yellow prisms addition of a solution of ammonium perchlorate to the clear solution yields bis(1: 10 phenanthroline) palladium (I1) perchlorate, which can be recrystallized from water. Similarly, addition of a solution of sodium 2-naphthol-6-sulphonate to the yellow solution yields bis(1: 10 phenanthroline) palladium (II) 2-naphthol- 6-sulphonate dihydrate. If a large excess of sodium chloride is added to the yellow solution, pale cream needles of II are precipitated. It seems certain that the yellow solution contains the tetrammine chloride [Pd phen, ]Cl, in solution and that there exists an equilibrium [Pd phen Cl,]+phen = [Pd phen,|+*+ +2Cl- The tetrammine ion [Pd phen, |** is apparently only stabilized by the presence of a large anion such as perchlorate or naphthol sulphonate. Fy phen e nee Fer ——— pole yellow solution Concentretion or treatment with c\O4 acetone yee [Ps phen Pye| (C10,) Pa phen CL XI II (b) Pyridine. When II is warmed with water containing a little pyridine, it dissolves to a pale yellow solution which, on treatment with NH,CI1O,, yields dipyridine-1: 10 phenanthroline palladium (II) perchlorate which can be recrystal- lized from water. PALLADIUM COMPLEXES. 153 If, however, the pale yellow solution is concentrated, or if acetone is added, the original dichlorodiammine II is precipitated, in analogy with the solution of [Pd phen,|Cl, mentioned above. It is interesting to note that Morgan and Burstall (1934) found that [Pt dipy Cl,] dissolves in excess aqueous dipyridyl and also in aqueous pyridine to give yellow solutions, but evaporation led only to viscid gums which decomposed into the original [Pt dipy Cl,]. (c) Ammonia. II dissolves to a very pale yellow solution when treated with dilute aqueous ammonia at 40°C. Addition of NH,CIlO, precipitates diammino- 1: 10 phenanthroline palladium (If) perchlorate. This compound XII is obtained as colourless crystals by recrystallization from water. (d) Ethylenediamine. A solution of the tetrammine ion [Pd phen en|+* is obtained when II is warmed with a slight excess of aqueous ethylenediamine. Precipitation with NH,ClO, and subsequent recrystallization yields colourless needles of ethylenediamine-1: 10 phenanthroline palladium (II) perchlorate-X1I1. (e) Quinoline. II dissolves to a yellow solution when boiled with water and a considerable excess of quinoline. Addition of NH,CIO, results in precipitation of a brownish resin from which no definite compounds were obtained. 2 EXPERIMENTAL. (II) Dichloro-1: 10 Phenanthroline Palladium (II). To a hot aqueous solution (70 ml.) of K,PdCl, (2 g.) was added a solution of 1 : 10 phenanth- roline-[ (Halcrow and Kermac, 1946) (1-2 g.) in boiling water (50 ml.). Pd, 20:52%. (d) Ethylenediamine (XIII) Hthylenediamine-1: 10 Phenanthroline Palladium (II). IT (0-4 g.), water (20 ml.) and 3% aqueous ethylenediamine (4 ml.) were warmed to 40° C. for three-quarters of an hour when solution was complete. Hxcess of NH,ClO, was added to the almost colourless solution and the subsequent white precipitate was recrystallized twice from water. 0-12 g. of colourless needles were obtained from the second recrystallization. Found: Pd, 19-4%. PdC,,H,N.C,H,N,H, (C104), requires ° ied: 19: 55%. (e) Quinoline. II (0:4 g.) was suspended in boiling water (25 ml.) ; addition of a consider- able excess of quinoline produced a clear yellow solution ; when this was treated with NH,CI1O, a brownish resin was thrown down. Attempts to free this resin from quinoline were unsuccessful and no definite compound was isolated. SUMMARY. Some reactions of palladium compounds with 1:10 phenanthroline (compound I) have been investigated. I reacts with K,PdX, to form a Series of compounds of the type [Pd phen X,] (where phen=1:10 phenanthroline and X=Cl, Br, I, CNS, NO, and 2X=C,0,): the oxalato compound was obtained as the monohydrate. [Pd phen Cl,|—compound II—is oxidized to [Pd phen Cl,|— (compound VIII) by passing chlorine through a suspension of II in chloroform. II dissolves in excess of aqueous solution of I to form a solution of the tetrammine chloride [Pd phen, |Cl,, which could not be isolated from solution ; but treatment of this solution with ammonium perchlorate and sodium 2-naphthol-6-sulphonate yields compounds IX—[Pd phen,|(ClO,), and X— [Pd phen, |(C,,H ,OHSO;),.2H,O respectively. IT also dissolves in aqueous pyridine (py), ammonia and ethylenediamine (en) to yield solutions of mixed tetrammines from which the following compounds were obtained on treatment with NH,ClO,: XI [Pd phen py,|(ClO,),; XII [Pd phen (NH3),|(ClO,),; XIII [Pd phen en](ClO,),. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT. The author is indebted to Dr. E. Challen for the carbon, hydrogen and nitrogen analyses. N 156 S. E. LIVINGSTONE. REFERENCES. Drew, H. D. K., Pinkard, F. W., Preston, G. H., and Wardlaw, W., 1932. J.C.S., 1895. Halcrow, B. E., and Kermac, W. O., 1946. J.C.S., 155. Landersen, G., 1926. Z. anorg. Chem., 154, 429. Morgan, G. T., and Burstall, F. H., 1933. J. Indian Chem. Soc., P. C. Ray Commemoration Vol, 1-16. Morgan, G. T., and Burstall, F. H., 1934. J.C.S., 965. Rosenheim, A., and Maass, T. A., 1898. Z. anorg. Chem. 18, 331. Ryan, D. E., 1949. Can. J. Research, 27B, 938. Department of Inorganic Chemistry, School of Applied Chemistry, N.S.W. University of Technology. INDEX A Page An Elementary Non-Conservative Electrical System os ie 221d Annual Dinner of the Society .. cop Xt Annual Report of the Council eee Authors, Guide to a ae eae hig Awards of the Society .. ce oa VI B Backhousia citriodora F. Muell. and Its Essential Oil, The Occurrence of a Physiological Form of ee see L23 Balance Sheet... 28 Se XXill Bequest, Form of : iv Berndt, R. M., and Bode ©. ate — Joint Award of ae David Medal for 1950 Age XXi Brown, Ida A., and Sherrard, Icathiecn M.—Graptolite Zones in the Silurian of the Yass-Bowning District of New South Wales... eel Warf Burfitt Prize, Awards of ae Walter thio. € b.< Burke-Gaffney, T. N.—Seismicity of Australha 5 es Ae pa TAY: C Challinor, R. W.—Obituary Notice XXVI Chemistry of Osmium. Part VIII (1X) 113 Clarke Memorial Lecture for 1951, by Dr. A. B. Edwards.—The Ore Minerals and their Textures... ‘ 26 Clarke Memorial Medal for 1951, Award of Zz A OS6:4 Commemoration of CRG: Scientists Pee xX Contour Trench Formations in Upland Plains of New South Wales .. ee | fas} Conversazione Be rey KER: Cook Medal, Awards of the James XViil Coordination Compounds of Copper— Part III. Complex Iodo-Cuprates (I) from Acetone Solution ae .. 138 Part IV. Some Cuprates () from Acetone Solution... .. 145 Copper, Coordination Compounds of— Part IIT. Me ae ae .. 138 Part IV. i : oh .. 145 Enamedoniaphora sinuosa Pesvormardl se nov. ae aa A ae ae ite) O D Page David Medal, Awards of the Edgeworth xviii Distinguished Visitors .. Xxl Dwyer, F. P., and Gyarfas, E. ‘C.—The Resolution of Tris-2 : 2’-Dipyridyl Metal Complexes through the Iodide Antimony]! Tartrates .. 135 Dwyer, F. P., and Hogarth, J. W.—The Chemistry of Osmium. Part VIII (IX), The Preparation of Some Hex- ammine Osmium III Salts .. oo Ll EK Edgeworth David Medal for 1950, Award of the... a Sif bg BED 9 'o:G., and (Mrs.) Spies, M. C.— The Essential Oil of a Physiological Form of Hucalyptus citriodora Hook. 120 The Occurrence of a Physiological Form of JBackhousia citriodora F. Muell. and Its Essential Oil .. 123 Plowman, R. A.—See Livingstone, S. E., and Plowman, R. A. Poisson-Kelvin Hypothesis and _ the Theory of Dielectrics .. 82 Popular Science Lectures pod Presidential Address—By F. R. Morrison General 1 The Science Museum—Its Duties and Its Dues 3 R Report of the Council .. xx Resolution of Tris-2 : 2’-Dipyridyl Metal Complexes through the Iodide Anti- monyl Tartrates a5 i .. 185 Robertson, W. H. — Occultations Observed at Sydney Observatory during 1950 be i a si ea Ss Schafer, H. N. S.—See Harris, C. M., and Schafer, H. N. S. Science House Management Committee, Society’s Representatives nen o.< Section of Geology, Report XXV1 Seismicity of Australia .. ew Wi Sherrard, Kathleen—The Geology of the Nanima-Bedulluck District, near Yass, New South Wales a 63 Sherrard, Kathleen—See Brown, ‘Ida Ase and Sherrard, Kathleen. Silurian of the Yass-Bowning District of New South Wales, Graptolite Zones im) Ghee 2 127 Silver Halides, Some Complexes Des .. 142 rived from INDEX Xxxi Page Smith-White, W. B.— An Elementary Non-Conservative Electrical System .. 15 The Poisson-Kelvin igmoeneas an the Theory of Dielectrics .. 82 Society’s Medal for 1950, Award of ie Btin.o-4 Some Complexes Derived from Silver Halides .. a a Ke .. 142 Some MHalogenoargentates (I) and eee ombates ay from Acetone Solution : . 148 Spies, M. C.—See Penfold, A. R., e¢ al. Stillwell, F. L. — Clarke Memorial Medallist for 1950 Es re Beale. &:<| Vv Page Vonwiller, O. eee Medal for 1951 ay: : a Spe, <:< WwW Waterhouse, G. A.—Obituary Notice xxvii Wiesener, F. A.—Obituary Notice XXVii Willis, J. L.—See Penfold, A. R., e¢ al. Y Yass-Bowning District of New South Wales, Graptolite Zones in the Silurian of the .. 127 Yass, New South ‘Wales, The “Geology of the Nanima-Bedulluck District, near a oe OS t ; ‘ ary LA RA, ¥ ’ ry ty . . ; © « ’ t i " | Oy int 1 . . , { Ant lagen Pah Ae eke eat ¥y bt F age 1 ahs AUSTRALASIAN MEDICAL PUBLISHING COMPANY LIMITED Seamer and Arundel Streets, Glebe, N.S.W. _ fore te 1952 ie ies pee 1 i Ff f « | 7 y \ & ‘ « ¢ i \ y = i F —— ; mat +m i ; Fj . ‘ eer, rs Til = Ff : | i Ve aire ‘ ae , a és ¢ P F i i i \ , : 5 ) i ‘ ns ; 1 a :) f ; | f at oF i ( Boris Boe al aE PUAN Meee +a a boon Vy git SM IAN INSTITU “AEA niin 3 9088 01308